Skip to main content

Full text of "The spirit world: its inhabitants, nature, and philosophy"

See other formats


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

Boston  Library  Consortium  IVIember  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/spiritworlditsinOOcrow 


THE 


SPIEIT    WOELD: 


ITS   INHABITANTS, 


NATUEE,   AND   PHILOSOPHY. 


BY 

EUGENE   CROWELL,  M.D., 

""^Autlior   of 
"The  Identity  of   Primitive   Christianity   and   Modern  Spiritualism." 


'•  Come  up  hither  and   I   will   show  thee   things  which  must  be  hereafter." 

— Hev.  iv.  1. 

" 'Tis  an  authentic  picture  of  the  spheres; 
In  one  thou  art,  in  ftie  art  soon  to  be; 
Its  mission  is  to  dry  the  mourner's  tears, 
And  ope  to  light  serene  futurity."— ^arrz*. 


BOSTON: 

COLBY    &    RICH, 

9  Montgomery  Place. 

1879. 


Copyright,  1879,  by 
EUGENE    OROWELL. 


Trow's 

Printing  and  Bookbinding  Co., 

205-213  East  iztk  St., 

NEW   YORK. 


COISTTEITTS. 


Introduction pp.  1-10 

CHAPTER  T. 

THE   SPIRl'T   AND    SOUL. 

Embodied  Man  is  a  Trinity — The  Spiritual  Body  Substantial — 
At  what  Period  does  Man  become  a  Living-  Soul  ? — Exceptions 
to  the  Rule  that  All  Men  are  Immortal — No  Sub-human  or 
Semi-human  beings  in  the  Spirit-World — Animals  like  Man 
have  Spiritual  Bodies — Spiritual  Limbs  do  not  Project  from 
Amputated  Stumps — Accidents  to  Spirits. 

DEATH,    THE   BIRTH   OF   THE    SPIRIT. 

The  Changes  that  Death  Produces — In  Dying  the  Spirit  sometimes 
Suffers — A  Means  of  Egress  should  be  Provided  for  the  Depart- 
ing Spirit — Effects  of  Narcotics  upon  the  Spirit — Spirits  are 
Bom  Naked  into  the  Next  Life — Treatment  of  Mortal  Remains 
— Spirits  Sensible  of  Marks  of  Affection. 

TEMPORARY   DESERTION   OF    THE   BODY   BY   THE   SPIRIT. 

Mr.  Owen  Witnesses  Such  a  Case — His  Description  of  It — It  is  At- 
tended with  Danger  to  the  Body — When  and  to  Whom  it  Hap- 
pens— Not  of  Common  Occurrence— No  Visible  Magnetic  Line 
Connecting  Spirit  and  Body pp.  11-20 

CHAPTER  II. 

GENERAL  VIEW  OF  THE  HEAVENS. 

The  Spirit-World  and  The  Spiritual  World — Distances  of  the  Heav- 
ens— The  Spirit-World  Substantial — The  Temperature  of  Space 
— The  Higher  Forms  of  Animal  and  Vegetable  Existence  are 


IV  CONTENTS. 

There  Reproduced — Thought  Does  not  There  take  Visible  Form 
— Was  the  Spirit- World  Formed  by  the  Accretion,  of  Sublimated 
Atoms  Arising  from  the  Earth? — The  Relations  that  Spirits 
Sustain  to  Their  World— Our  Earth  is  The  Type  of  That 
World ..pp.  31-26 

CHAPTER  III. 
THE  LOW  HEAVENS  OR  SPHERES. 

THE   EARTH   SPHERE. 

The  Spirit-World  Envelops  Us — Arrangement  of  the  Low  Spheres 
— All  Spirits  are  Human  Beings — Minds  and  Bodies  Diseased 
Produce  Sin  and  Crime — Heaven  and  Hell  are  Localities — Con- 
dition Accurately  follows  Character — Some  Progress  Slowly 
having  no  Desire  for  Improvement — Many  Spirits  Continue  to 
Exist  on  The  Earth  for  Periods  of  Time — The  Habits  of  Earth- 
Bound  Spirits — Their  Influence  Banefal — Our  Prisons  and 
Insane  Asylums  are  Infested  with  Them — Mortals  frequently 
can  Benefit  Them — Physical  Imperfections  sometimes  Appa- 
rently Perpetuated  in  Earth-bound  Spirits — How  Low  Spirits 
are  Governed — Missionaries  are  Sent  to  Labor  with  Them — Pro- 
gression a  Universal  Law — Condition  of  the  Drunkard — Repent- 
ance in  This  Life — The  Wicked  Heaven  or  Second  Sphere — Its 
Cities — Its  Inhabitants — The  Cities  are  Enclosed — Desolation 
of  the  Country — The  "  Hells  "  of  Swedenborg. 

CONDITION  OP   BIGOTED   SECTARIANS. 

Sects  are  Perpetuated  in  the  Lower  Heavens — Purgatory — Condition 
of  the  Degraded  Among  Roman  Catholics — The  Irish  Heavens 
— Bigoted  and  Intolerant  Protestants — They  are  Placed  under 
Discipline — Are  Still  more  Zealous  than  Wise — The  Truth  Ulti- 
mately Comes  to  All pp.  27-48 

CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  HIGHER  HEAVENS. 
THE   INDIAN  HEAVJ]NS. 

The  First  Sphere  is  an  Indian  Heaven — "Where  no  White  Man 
robs  the  Indian  " — Description  of  It — Condition  and  Employ- 


CONTENTS.  V 

ments  of  the  Indians — Their  Order  of  Progression — Mr,  Owen's 
Visit  to  Their  Heavens — His  Description  of  Them. 

DESCRIPTION   OF   THE   HIGHER  HEAVENS, 

The  Third  and  Fourth  Heavens — The  Prevailing  Conditions — Na- 
tional Distinctions  there  Exist — The  First  of  the  European 
Heavens  the  Lowest — The    American  and  European   Heavens 

Compared. 

THE  NEGRO  HEAVENS. 

Their  Location — Condition  of  Negro  Spirits — Their  Progression  like 
That  of  the  Indians — They  Ultimately  Blend  with  the  Whites. 

MR.    OWEN'S  VISIT   TO   THE   HIGHER  HEAVENS. 

Means  of  Communication  Between  the  Different  Heavens — A  Dis- 
tinguished Visitor — The  Information  He  Imparted — He  Had 
Been  in  the  Spirit-World  One  Hundred  and  Fifty  Years — He 
was  Then  in  the  Thirty-second  Heaven — He  Knew  of  Eight 
Heavens  above  That — He  becomes  the  Guide  of  Mr,  Owen  on 
a  Visit  from  the  Fifth  to  the  Fifteenth  Heaven — Mr.  Owen 
Describes  these  Heavens — Government  in  the  Heavens— Penal- 
ties for  Disobedience — Planetary  Spirits — How  the  Grounds 
are  Ornamented — An  Incredible  Story — Steamboats  and  Steam- 
ships  pp.  49-67 

CHAPTER  V. 

THE  HIGHER  HEAVENS  {continued). 

HEAVENLY   MANSIONS   OR   HOMES. 

Description  of  Them — Gardens — Furniture — Mr.  Owen's  Descrip- 
tion of  His  Own  Home  in  the  Fourth  Heaven — His  Servants — 
Painting  and  Architecture — Nothing  There  can  be  Destroyed. 

GARMENTS,    ORNAMENTS,    AND   OTHER   OBJECTS. 

The  Love  of  the  Beautiful  a  Spiritual  Sentiment — Garments  of  Spirits 
Different  in  Each  Heaven — Male  Garments — Female  Garments 
— How  Young  Children  are  Clothed — Garments  always  Found  in 
Their  Homes — Jewelry  of  Gold,  Silver,  and  Precious  Stones. 

EMPLOYMENTS  OF  SPIRITS.      MEANS  OF  SUPPLYING  OTHER  WANTS. 

Every  Desire  of  Good  Spirits  Gratified — Musical  Instruments — 
Wheeled  Vehicles — Where  Certain  Objects  are  Obtained — Books 


VI  CONTENTS. 

and  Libraries — Periodicals  and  Newspapers — The  Manufactur- 
ing Heaven — Employments  of  Spirits — A  Spirit  Friend  Describes 
her  Usual  Daily  Occupations — Another  Friend  Describes  His — ■ 
Temples,  Halls,  and  Theatres — Hunting,  Fishing,  and  Riding — 
Farms  in  the  Heavens — Spirit  Mechanics — Spirits  Require  Sus- 
tenance— Masonic  and  Odd  Fellows'  Lodges — Mediums  Retain 
their  Power — Spirits  Are  not  Idle — Employments  Congenial — 
Scientists  in  the  Heavens pp.  68-89 

CHAPTER  YI. 

THE  HIGHER  HEAVENS  {continued). 
SUNDAY  OBSERVANCE. 

Sunday  a  Day  Distinct  from  others — Manner  of  Observance — Ser- 
vices in  the  Temples — There  are  no  Holidays  in  the  Heavens. 

TITLES  AND  NAMES  IN  THE   HEAVENS. 

The  Record  of  a  Good  Life  above  Earthly  Titles — Earthly  Names 
Perpetuated — Earthly  Fame  and  Distinction,  unless  Deserved, 
of  little  Account  There — A  Monarch  would  there  Receive  no 
Homage, 

THE   PERSONAL   APPEARANCE   OF  SPIRITS. 

The  Ages  that  Spirits  Appear — Personal  Characteristics  Preserved — 
Ugly  People  become  Beautiful — No  Spirit  Dwarfs  nor  Giants — 
No  Deformed  Spirits — The  Complexions  of  Spirits — The  Ap- 
pearance of  Spirits  Represents  their  Condition — The  Heads  of 
Advanced  Spirits  not  Surrounded  with  Halos  or  Spheres  of 
Light. 

LANGUAGE  IN  THE  HEAVENS. 

Spirits  Communicate  with  Each  Other  as  We  Do,  by  Speech — Many 
Languages  in  the  Heavens — Swedenborg's  Error — In  what 
Manner  the  Knowledge  of  Foreign  Languages  is  Useful  to 
Spirits. 

PREVISION  OF    SPIRITS. 

This  Faculty  is  Rare  Among  Spirits — With  Those  who  Possess  it,  it 
is  Limited — A  Seance  in  the  Ninth  Heaven — What  is  the  Intel- 
ligence Back  of  the  Clairvoyant? — Good   Spirits  are  Able  to 


CONTENTS.  \n 

Acquire  Special  Gifts — Our  Capabilities  are  Foreseen  by  Cer- 
tain Spirits. 

THE   INSANE   IN   SPIRIT   LIFE. 

What  Spirits  are  Insane — Only  the  Degraded — There  are  Infirma- 
ries in  the  Second  and  Third  Heavens  for  the  Insane — They 
Very  Soon  Recover  their  Reason — Idiots  require  Protracted 
Treatment — How  the  Spirit  is  Affected  when  the  Body  is  Blown 
into  Fragments — The  Spiritual  Body  Indestructible .  pp.  90-103 


CHAPTER  VII. 
THE  HIGHER  HEAVENS  {couti?iiied). 

WHEREIN   SPIRITS  DIFFER. 

"As  One  Star  differeth  from  Another  Star  in  Glory  "  Equality  is 
in  Respect  to  Happiness — Growth  there  is  Gradual  but  More 
Rapid  than  Here — Each  is  Most  Happy  in  His  own  Heaven — No 
Event  There  corresponding  to  the  Death  of  the  Physical  Body 
— No  Atheists  in  the  Heavens  above  the  Third — True  Earthly 
Character  a  Passport  to  the  Best  Associations  There. 

MARRIAGE    IN   THE   HEAVENS. 

True  Marriage  is  There  a  Recognized  Institution — What  Earthly 
Marriages  are  There  Perpetuated — Unmarried  Spirits — Spirits 
as  Match-Makers — The  Ceremony  of  Marriage  in  The  Heavens. 

FAMILY  RELATIONS  IN  THE  HEAVENS. 

Affection  Survives  Death — Where  Spiritual  Attraction  exists  Fami- 
lies become  Reunited — My  Parents  voluntarily  Remove  to  a 
Lower  Heaven — Husband  and  Wife  there  never  Outgrow  Each 
Other — Spirits  are  Sensible  of  Tokens  of  Affection. 

CHILDREN   IN   THE   HEAVENS. 

The  Conditions  that  Surround  Them — A  Grand  Nursery  in  the  Fifth 
Heaven — The  Care  for  Them  is  a  Labor  of  Love — Their  Edu- 
cation—The Acquisition  of  Knowledge  by  Them  a  Pleasure — ■ 
The  Means  of  Instruction — The  Condition  of  Older  and  De- 
praved Children — Children  Increase  in  Stature  aa  Here — 
Bringing  Children  to  Earth. 


Alii  CONTENTS. 

ANIMALS   IN  THE   SPIRIT-WORLD. 

They  are  Actual  Objective  Existences — Their  Origin — What  Species 
are  There  to  be  Found — Their  Intelligence — Most  Spirits  be- 
lieve Them  to  be  Identical  with  Those  They  Left  Behind — 
Horses,  Dogs,  and  Birds  are  Sometimes  Brought  to  Earth — As 
to  Phantom  Animals  Seen  by  Mortals — A  Successful  Experi- 
ment  pp.  103-120 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE   MOVEMENTS  OF    SPIRITS. 

Their  Movements  are  Controlled  by  Their  Volition — They  are  In- 
stinctive and  Natural — They  are  not  Guided  by  Knowledge — 
Time  and  Space  there  Known — Spirits  Passing  To  and  From 
the  Earth — Entrance  to  the  First  Sphere — Avenues  of  Commu- 
nication— The  Time  Required  for  Spirits  to  Go  from  the  Earth 
to  the  Heavens  and  Vice  Versa — Their  Sensations  while  Tra- 
versing Space — Their  Movements  through  our  Atmosphere — 
Certain  Spirits  can  Trace  Us — Spirits  and  the  Remains  of  A. 
T.  Stewart — Spirits  and  the  Murder  of  Mrs.  Hull — Powers  of 
Spirits  Limited — Few  Spirits  Visit  the  Polar  Regions — The 
Doctrine  of  Magnetic  Currents. 

THE   RETURN   OF   SPIRITS  TO   EARTH. 

Few  Spirits  Compelled  to  Revisit  the  Earth — The  Majority  do  not 
Return — The  Majority  Disbelieve  in  the  Fact  of  Intercourse 
with  Mortals — Instances  in  Illustration — Mr.  Owen  still  Engaged 
in  Disseminating  the  Truth. 

DO  ANCIENT     SPIRITS  AND   SPIRITS     FROM   OTHER   WORLDS  VISIT 

THE   EARTH  ? 

Difficult  Questions  to  Solve — The  Rule  and  Exceptions  to  It — Cer- 
tain, at  Least,  of  the  Planets  Inhabited — Spirits  Deny  that  the 
Sun  is  a  Vast  Globe  of  Fire — The  Sun  and  Moon  Inhabited — 
Ability  of  Spirits  to  Visit  Other  Heavenly  Bodies,  .pp.  131-135 

CHAPTER  IX. 

GUARDIAN   SPIRITS. 

Every  Adult  Mortal  has  a  Guardian  Spirit — Their  Peculiar  Qualifica- 
tions— How  Appointed — They   are    Our    Monitors  as  well  as 


CONTIJNTS.  IX 

Guardians — Their  Duties  and  Powers — They  Make  Note  of  Our 
Conduct  and  Report  to  Higher  Intelligences — Good  and  Bad 
Acts  Registered — The  Record — Silence  Enjoined  upon  Guar- 
dians when  in  the  Presence  of  Their  Wards — Mental  Questions 
Answered  through  their  Agency — Any  Spirit  Who  Claims  to  be 
Our  Guardian  Speaks  falsely. 

SPIRITS  ON  DIFFERENT   PLANES  COMMUNICATE, 

In  All  Ages  it  Has  Been  Thus — The  Characteristics  of  Good  Spirits 
— Spirits  in  the  Heavens  Above  the  Third  Incapable  of  Decep- 
tion— The  Rule  by  which  to  Determine  the  Moral  Status  of 
Spirits — There  Have  Been  as  Many  Martyrs  to  Error  and  Folly 
as  to  Truth. 

DIFFICULTIES  ATTENDANT   ON  SPIRIT-INTERCOURSE. 

The  Difficulties  Enumerated — Why  so  Few  Communicate — Spiritu- 
alists when  They  Pass  Over  find  it  More  Difficult  to  Communi- 
cate than  They  Supposed — A  Cause  of  Erroneous  Replies  and 
Teachings  by  Spirits— Like  Us  They  mistake  Their  Opinions 
for  Knowledge — We  frequently  Influence  their  Opinions — 
Prohibited  Knowledge — No  Common  Highway  of  Communica- 
tion  pp. 136-147 

CHAPTER  X. 

THE  PHILOSOPHY  OP   SPIRIT-INTERCOURSE. 

In  Controlling  a  Medium  a  Spirit  Does  Not  Enter  the  Body  of  the 
Former — Method  of  Controlling — Trance  Mediums — The  Diffi- 
culties to  be  Encountered — Mr.  Owen's  Experience  in  Speaking 
through  a  Medium — Spirits  commonly  Read  Their  Addresses 
from  Spiritual  Manuscript — Speaking  Exhausts  Spirits — Re- 
searches in  Science  by  Spirits — One  Means  by  which  They  Ac- 
quire Knowledge — As  to  Our  Thoughts  Reaching  Spirits — An 
Error  of  Swedenborg — Thoughts  are  not  More  Tangible  to 
Spirits  than  to  Us — Our  Memory  is  a  Sealed  Volume  to  Spirits. 

THE   MEMORY   AND   KNOWLEDGE   OF   SPIRITS. 

Their  Memory  of  Earthly  Events  not  So  Good  as  that  of  Mortals — 
No  Reason  why  We  should  Remember  Everything — The  Mem- 
ory of  their  Misdeeds  Haunts  Guilty  Spirits — Mr,  Owen's  Mem- 


CONTENTS. 

ory — A  Spirit  in  Tliree  Years  Forgetting  nearly  Everything 
Relating  to  his  Earth-Life — Certain  Spirits  for  a  Long  Period  of 
Time  Retain  their  Memory  of  Earthly  Events — The  Difficulties 
under  which  Their  Defective  Memory  places  Them  when  Com- 
municating With  Us — Spirits  taking  Notes — Forgetting  Proptr 
Names — Parallel  Cases  with  Us — Spirits  whose  Memory  is  Best 
—  [t  is  For  the  Best — We  Carry  with  Us  all  Useful  Knowledge — 
Why  We  do  not  Receive  New  and  Higher  Truths. .  .pp.  148-168 


CHAPTER  XT. 

VISUAL   PERCEPTION   OF   MATERIAL   OBJECTS  BY   SPIRITS. 

Few  Spirits  distinctly  perceive  Earthly  Objects— Low  Spirits  gene- 
rally Perceive  them  Best — How  the  Sight  of  Spirits  is  Affected 
— Our  Guardians  can  perceive  Us  Distinctly,  Few  Others  Can 
— Our  Bodies  and  Clothing  not  Transparent  to  Spirits — Certain 
rare  Exceptions  to  This  Rule — Our  Spirits  Invisible  to  All  Dis- 
embodied Spirits-  -How  Spirits  are  Affected  by  Earthly  Light 
and  Darkness — Spiritual  Light — Few  Spirits  able  to  Read 
Written  or  Printed  Characters — Certain  Spirits  able  to  Read 
Closed  Books  and  Manuscript. 

THE   ABILITY   OP   SPIRITS   TO   HEAR    AND    UNDERSTAND   OUR   CON- 
VERSATION. 

Ordinarily  few  Spirits  excepting  Guardians  are  able  to  Hear  Us 
Converse — When  Mediums  are  present  They  are  Able  to  Hear 
Us — The  State  of  the  Weather  affects  Their  Power — Owing  to 
Their  imperfectly  Understanding  us  They  frequently  draw 
Wrong  Conclusions. 

POWER   OP    SPIRITS  TO   PASS   THROUGH    SOLID   MATTER. 

Most  Spirits  are  Able  to  Pass  Through  Walls  of  Stone  and  Wood — 
All  Material  Substances  are  Equally  Substantial  to  Spirits — 
Transporting  Small  Objects  through  the  Air — Certain  Gross  and 
Degraded  Spirits  unable  to  Pass  Through  Matter — No  Spirits 
possess  the  Power  to  Penetrate  below  the  Surface  of  the  Earth 
or  a  Body  of  Water — Contact  with  Spirits — Their  Vision  cannot 
ordinarily  Penetrate  Spiritual  Substance. 


C0x\Ti-;Nrs.  XI 

SPIRITS    IN   RELATION   TO   THE    ELEMENTS. 

They  are  Affected  by  Cold  and  Hea,t  as  We  Are — Strong-  Winds  and 
Storm}'  Weather  are  Disagreeable  to  Them — The  Effects  that 
Would  Follow  from  Contact  with  Fire — They  are  Sensitive  to 
Odors  and  Perfumes — If  Exposed  they  are  Liable  to  Sea-sick- 
ness  pp.  109-180 


CHAPTER  XII. 

MATERIALIZATION — FORM   MANIFESTATIONS. 

The  Processes  are  of  a  Scientific  Nature — But  certain  Low  Spirits 
appear  t )  Naturally  Possess  the  Power — The  Methods  of  Pro- 
cedure by  Spirits  in  Cabinet  Seances — Eepresenting  an  Adult 
Spirit  who  passed  Away  in  Childhood  as  Still  a  Child — Spiritual 
Birds  sometimes  Brought  to  Earth  and  Materialized — Spiritual 
Flowers  frequently  Brought  and  Materialized — Haunting  Spirits 
are  Materialized  in  Greater  or  Less  Deirrees — Permanent  Mate- 
rialization  of  Persons  and  Inanimate  Objects  Impossible — All 
Spirits  when  Visiting  the  Earth  become  More  or  Less  Material- 
ized— All  Objects  brought  here  Also  Become  in  Degree  Materi- 
alized. 

PHANTOM   SHIPS   AND   RAILWAY   TRAINS, 

The  Legendary  Phantom  Ship  not  a  Myth — Spiritual  Ships  are 
Constructed  and  Sailed  by  the  Spirits  of  Mariners — Where  the 
Materials  Come  From — Spectral  Railway  Trains  are  Realities — 
How  and  by  Whom  Constructed — Never  Seen  by  Mortals  in  a 
Strong  Light — Sometimes  perceived  Clairvoyantly — Spectral 
Men  in  Armor — Generally  perceived  Clairvoyantly — Have  Most 
frequently  Been  Seen  in  the  Highlands  of  Scotland. 

RAPPINGS   AND    MOVING   OP   MATERIAL   OBJECTS. 

The  Raps  Produced  by  Strokes  with  a  Materialized  Hand  or  Knuckle 
or  Other  small  Spiritual  Object — Articles  of  Furniture  Moved  by 
Materialized  Spirit  Hands.  Neither  Electricity  nor  Magnetism 
the  Agent  Employed — Spirit  Lights — How  Produced — How 
Levitation  is  Effected. 


xii  contp:nts, 

TRANCE    AND   VISIONS. 

Trance  Induced  by  Disembodied  Spirits — Their  Object  in  Producing' 
It — By  What  Means  it  is  Induced — All  Trance  Subjects  are 
Mediums — The  Visions  of  Trance  Subjects  are  only  Impressions 
made  on  the  Mind  by  the  Operating  Spirits — The  Thoughts  of 
the  Latter  become  Mental  Pictures pp.  181-189 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

SPIRITS  IN  RELATION   TO  ANIMALS. 

They  are  Capable  of  Influencing  certain  Animals — Bible  Instances 
— Certain  Domestic  Animals  sometimes  Perceive  Spirits — Ani- 
mals should  have  Spiritual  Organisms— Mischievous  or  Vicious 
Spirits  sometimes  Influence  Animals  to  Injure  Mortals — Spirits 
sometimes  Amuse  Themselves  vs^ith  Domestic  Animals. 

DO   SPIRITS    INTEREST   THEMSELVES   IN   OUR  BUSINESS    AFFAIRS? 

Some  of  Them  Do — Extreme  Caution  should  be  Exercised  in  Inter- 
course with  Such  Spirits — We  Should  be  Gruided  by  Our  Own 
Judgment — Under  what  Circumstances  it  may  be  Safe  to  Con- 
sult Spirits  on  Business  Affairs — Their  Mission  is  to  Instruct 
and  Guide  Us  in  the  Right. 

THERE    IS  ROOM    IN    GOD'S   UNIVERSE   FOR   ALL. 

Where  can  Departed  Spirits  find  Space  in  which  to  Exist  ? — We  call 
Figures  to  Our  Assistance — The  Problem  then  Easily  Solved — 
There  is  Room  for  All — The  Vastness  of  Space — Our  Compre- 
hension is  Limited pp.  190-195 


CONCLUSION. 

This  Description  Fragmentary — Other  Investigators  will  Add  to  It 
—This,  the  Child-Life  of  The  Spirit— Our  Glorious  Destiny— 
"  Hope  on,  O  Weary  Heart." pp.  195-197 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  problems  of  the  ages,  have  been,  What  are  we? 
Whence  came  we  ?  and,  Whither  are  we  bound  ?  Of  these 
the  last  is  the  most  momentous,  and  it  is  the  object  of  this 
work  to  aid  in  the  solution  of  this  problem  so  that  other 
investigators  may  be  assisted  in  advancing  a  step  fm-ther, 
and  in  theii'  turn  enlighten  the  paths  for  others  who  may 
succeed  them  in  exploring  the  reahties  and  mysteries  of 
that  world  to  which  we  are  all  hastening,  and  of  which  even 
a  httle  knowledge  may  be  of  service  in  preparing  us  for  our 
introduction  to  it. 

There  are  three  stages  in  the  progTess  of  spiritual  knowl- 
edge. We  have  not  yet  substantially  advanced  beyond  the 
first  stage,  that  of  observation  and  examination  of  the 
kno^Ti  facts.  The  orderly  arrangement  and  classification 
of  these  belong  to  the  second  stage,  and  is  a  work,  the  most 
of  wliich  yet  remains  to  be  accomphshed.  When  this  is 
done  there  still  remains  the  task  of  deducing  and  estab- 
hshing  the  laws  that  govern  them.  Our  knowledge  of  the 
facts  themselves,  which  is  essential  to  any  considerable 
progTess,  is  yet  limited,  and  it  is  owing  to  this,  principally, 


IXTKODUCTIO:;. 


that  so  little  progress  lias  been  made  in  tlieir  classification 
and  the  knowled^'e  of  theii'  laws. 


■■&' 


"  Facts  are  the  basis  of  philosophy  ; 
Philosophy  the  harmony  of  facts 
Seen  in  their  rioht  relation." 


'■o^ 


Some  of  the  statements  contained  in  this  volume  are  of 
such  a  novel  and  incredible  character  that  I  cannot  suppose 
my  Spiritualist  friends  will,  at  least  at  first,  be  able  to  ac- 
cept them,  but  I  trust  they  will  remember  that  the  tiTith 
is  not  always  probable,  and  therefore  will  carefully  consider 
and  weigh  before  they  reject,  for  I  feel  assured  that  such  a 
course  will  result  in  their  acceptance  of  at  least  some  of 
the  statements  which  at  first  they  will  deem  incredible,  if 
not  impossible.  When  these  statements  have  thus  been 
subjected  to  careful  and  imjDartial  examination,  and  viewed 
in  the  light  of  other  estabhshed  facts,  and  of  other  knowl- 
edge of  spiritual  things,  should  my  friends  be  unable  to 
accept  certain  of  them  I  shall  expect  them  to  fi-eely  and 
unreservedly  ex]3ress  their  dissent.  I  have  no  dread  of 
honest,  inteUigent  criticism  ;  this  I  invite  from  fiiend  and 
foe  ;  this  alone  I  expect  from  the  friends  of  the  cause,  while 
from  its  enemies  I  am  prepared  to  meet  with  little  argxi- 
ment,  but  much  ridicule,  and  even  my  veracity  may  be 
called  in  c|uestion'.  But  this  also  I  can  bear,  relying  with 
perfect  confidence  upon  the  results  of  the  future  researches 
of  earnest  and  able  minds  in  our  ranks,  through  the  most 
accomplished  and  reliable  mediums,  to  confirm  and  estab- 
hsh  the  truths,  for  the  conveyance  to  the  world  of  which  I 


INTRODUCTIOX.  '  6 

am  onlr  tlie  liumble  instrument.  These  revelations  are 
only  fra<;-mentai-\'  and  are  but  an  installment  of  Avliat  will 
be  mven  to  the  world  throuidi  other  instrumentalities 
^vithin  the  next  quarter  of  a  century,  and  I  even  hox)e,  here- 
after, to  be  able  to  add  other  new  facts  and  new  truths  to 
those  here  presented. 

Those  of  111}'  readers  Avho  are  famihar  with  my  work, 
T/ie  Identity  of  Frimitwe  Christianity  and  Modern  Spiritual- 
ism, ^^ill  notice  that  certain  statements,  mostly  explanatory, 
contained  in  this  volume  are  at  variance  with  certain  others 
made  in  that  work.  This  should  be  ex]3ected  when  the 
numerous  facts  noticed  and  questions  discussed  in  that 
work  are  considered,  and  for  the  explanation  of  which,  in 
part,  I  had  to  depend  upon  the  observation,  experience, 
and  opinions  of  others,  while  in  the  present  volume  I  have 
confined  myself  almost  wdiolly  to  the  presentation  of  the 
recorded  teachings  of  my  spirit  instructors,  and  so  far  from 
being  disappointed  mth  the  contradictions  which  appear  I 
am  equally  sui'j)rised  and  gTatified  that  they  are  not  more 
numerous.  I  will  here  remark,  that  in  no  instance  in  this 
work  have  I  suppressed  an  opinion  or  statement  of  fact  in 
the  teachings  of  my  instructors  on  account  of  its  being 
contradictory  to  what  I  have  stated  in  my  former  work. 

Some  of  the  information  contained  in  this  volume  v^as 
given  in  reply  to  questions  which  required  of  my  instruct- 
ors from  one  to  three  months  to  answer. 

The  medium  who  has  been  the  channel  of  communica- 
tion with  my  spirit  instructors  is  Charles  B.  Kenney,  of 


/ 


4  TXTRODUCTION'. 

Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  who  is  controlled  exclusively  by  two 
Indian  spirits,  and  there  are  three  other  spirits  to  whom  I 
am  indebted  for  the  revelations  contained  in  this  volume. 
These  are,  my  father,  formerly  a  clergyman,  who  entered 
spirit-life  half  a  centnry  since,  Robert  Dale  Owen,  and 
George  Henry  Bernard  ;  the  latter  in  this  life  having  been 
a  cotton  and  shipping  merchant  at  New  Orleans,  from 
which  place  he  passed  to  spirit  life  about  forty  years  ago. 

It  is  proper  that  I  should  here  state  my  reasons  for 
assuming  the  identity  of  these  spirits.  These  reasons  are 
as  follow : 

1st.  For  nearly  eight  years,  during  which  time  I  have 
been  intimately  acquainted  and  associated  with  Charles 
B.  Kenney,  the  medium,  I  have  ever  found  him  as  a  man 
strictly  tiTithful  and  honest,  and  as  a  medium  the  most 
gifted  and  reliable  I  have  known,  and  this  reliability  I 
attribute  in  a  great  measure  to  the  fact  of  his  medium- 
ship  for  communication  having  been,  with  a  few  rare 
exceptions,  restricted  to  assisting  me  in  the  work  in  which 
I  have  been  engaged.  His  character  in  all  respects  is 
beyond  reproach  or  suspicion,  and  he  is  highly  esteemed 
by  all  who  are  acquainted  with  him. 

2nd.  For  these  eight  years,  during  which  I  have  been 
in  almost  daily  communication  with  the  two  Indian  spirits 
who  exclusively  control  him,  I  have  invariably  found  them 
as  truthful  and  honest  as  the  medium  himself,  devoted  to 
my  interests,  and  solicitous  for  my  welfare,  as  witnessed  in 
numerous  and  constantly  occurring  instances,  their  lan- 
guage and  acts  at  aU  times  evidently  being  prompted  by 


INTRODUCTION".  5 

feelmgs,  not  simply  of  regard,  but  of  devoted  affection. 
From  this  extended  association  with  and  experience  of 
them  I  claim  that  I  am  justified  in  pronouncing  them 
strictly  honest  and  reliable  to  the  extent  of  their  knowl- 
edq-e. 

od.  During  these  eight  years  m}'  spirit  father  has, 
through  this  medium,  been  in  almost  daily  communica- 
tion with  me,  and  until  Robert  Dale  Owen  passed  from 
earth  it  was  my  father  iipon  whom  I  chiefly  depended  for 
assistance  in  acquiring  information  in  relation  to  the  spirit 
world  and  hfe.  Although  I  availed  myself  of  every  oppor- 
tunity of  obtaining  information  from  other  spirit  friends, 
and  although  it  was  during  the  first  year  or  two  that  I 
more  especially  tested  his  identity  on  every  possible  occa- 
sion, and  always  with  satisfactory  results,  yet  from  that 
time  to  the  present  I  have  in  no  instance  permitted  an 
opportunity  to  escape  of  applying  other  tests,  and  with 
like  results.  In  addition  to  this  evidence  the  two  Lidians 
have,  from  the  first,  assured  me  of  his  identity,  as  have  all 
my  other  spirit  fiiends  who  from  time  to  time  have  com- 
municated with  me  through,  not  only  this  but  other  me- 
diums, in  whom  I  have  confidence.  I  may  also  state  that 
the  joroofs  of  his  affection  and  watchful  care  are  numerous 
and  striking. 

4dh.  As  to  the  identity  of  Mr.  Owen.  A  year  or  two 
before  he  passed  fi'om  earth  he  made  the  acquaintance  of 
my  medium,  and  formed  a  high  opinion  of  him,  both  as  a 
man  and  medium,  and  at  my  seances  he  also  became  ac- 
quainted "svith  his  two  Indian  guides,  of  w^hom  he  formed 


6  INTRODUCTIOX. 

an  equally  liigli  opinion,  and  tlius  lie  and  tliey  were  ac- 
quainted previous  to  his  passing  away. 

5//i.  Mr.  Owen  during  liis  last  visit  to  me,  being  aware 
of  liis  approaching  dissolution,  repeatedly  promised  to 
communicate  with  me  through  the  medium  as  soon  as 
possible  after  entering  spirit  life,  his  last  promise  being 
made  on  the  day  he  left  my  house,  and  only  nine  days 
previous  to  his  decease.  He  also  promised  to  assist  me 
from  the  other  side  in  my  labors. 

Gth.  At  the  first  seance  I  had  with  my  medium  after 
Mr.  Owen's  decease,  the  Lidian  sjDirit  controlling  an- 
nounced his  presence,  assuring  me  in  the  most  emphatic 
and  direct  manner'  of  his  being  the  identical  Mr.  Owen 
whom  he  and  I  had  kno^vn  in  the  flesh,  and  from  that 
time  to  the  present,  at  all  seances,  I  have  depended  upon 
him  to  announce  his  presence,  and  he  having  been  person- 
ally acquainted  with  him  when  in  the  flesh,  must  have 
been  able  to  recognise  him  in  spirit,  so  there  can  be  no 
mistake  in  regard  to  this  question,  and  the  only  remaining 
question  is  as  to  his  truthfuhiess  in  constantly  testifying 
to  Mr.  Owen's  identity.  This  question  is  aflirmatively 
answered  if  it  be  conceded  that  eight  years  of  intimate 
association  with,  and  experimental  knowledge  of  him  and 
his  companion,  entitle  me  to  a  correct  determination  of 
their  truthfulness  and  reliability,  as  it  would  of  the  truth- 
fulness and  reliability  of  a  mortal  friend  with  whom,  for 
an  equal  period  of  time,  I  may  have  sustained  the  most  in- 
timate relations. 

lih.  From  the  time  Mr.  Owen  first  communicated  with 


IXTUODUCTIOX.  7 

me  tlirougli  oui'  medium  to  the  present  I  have  availed  my- 
self of  fi-equent  opportunities  of  testing  Ids  identity,  and 
the  results  have  always  been  satisfactoiT,  and  beside  this 
he  has  fi-equently,  of  his  o^ii  accord,  referred  to  incidents 
and  cii'cumstances  with  which  he  and  I  alone  were  fami- 
lial*, and  to  conversations  between  us  in  eaii;h  life,  and  to 
agi'eements  and  differences  of  opinion,  and  in  one  instance 
even  refeiTed  to  and  resumed  a  conversation  in  which  we 
had  engaged,  but  which  was  interiaipted,  when  he  at  one 
time  was  visiting  me  previous  to  j)assing  away. 

Up  to  the  time  that  3Ii'.  Owen  became  associated  with 
mv  father  on  the  other  side,  as  one  of  my  instiTictors,  the 
method  of  communication  thi'ough  the  medium  had  been 
for  his  principal  guide  to  control  him,  and  then  communi- 
cate to  me,  in  imj^erfect  English,  what  was  said  to  him  by 
my  other  sjDiiit  fiiends,  but  to  my  suiprise,  the  fii'st  time 
]Mr.  Owen  addressed  me  thi'ough  the  medium  he  did  so 
directly,  and  in  language  free  from  imperfect  pronuncia- 
tion, in  fact  in  unobjectionable  Enghsh,  The  course  pur- 
sued then  and  at  all  subsecjuent  seances  by  my  spiiit 
instructors  in  estabhshing  and  maintaining  a  line  of  com- 
munication between  them  and  myself,  thi'ough  the  medium, 
is  as  follows. 

My  spirit  fiiends  being  present,  and  seated  in  chaii's 
previously  arranged  so  that  I  shall  face  them  and  the  medi- 
um, his  principal  Indian  controller  takes  j)ossession  of  him, 
rendering?  him  absolutely  unconscious,  then  the  Indian 
companion  of  the  controller,  in  turn,  psychologizes  the 


8  INTRODUCTION. 

latter,  reducing  liim  to  a  similar  state  of  unconsciousness. 
There  are  now  two  absolutely  insensible  mediums,  one  on 
eacli  side  of  tlie  dividing  line  between  the  material  and 
spiritual  worlds,  and  both  united  in  the  most  intimate 
psj^chological  relationship,  in  close  and  perfect  rapport. 
After  the  companion  of  the  controller  has  psychologized 
the  latter  his  further  and  sole  duty,  during  the  seance,  is 
to  steadily  maintain  his  influence  over  him,  and  thus  insure 
a  state  of  insensibihty  and  consequently  of  passivity  on  his 
part. 

The  channel  of  communication  between  the  two  worlds 
noAV  being  open  all  that  is  required  of  either  of  my  instruc- 
tors who  may  desire  to  communicate  with  me  is  for  him, 
while  directing  his  attention  to  the  psychologized  Indian 
spirit  and  ignoring  the  medium  on  this  side,  to  address 
the  words  intended  for  me  directly  to  him,  as  if  he  were 
the  mouth-j)iece  of  a  speaking  tube,  or  a  telephone,  and  on 
the  instant  the  words  are  audibly  and  natui-ally  expressed, 
by  the  lips  of  the  medium,  and  thus  a  direct  line  of  com- 
munication is  established  between  them  and  myself. 
Should  the  sj^uit  speaking  aUow  his  attention  to  be  di- 
verted from  the  sjDirit  medium  the  line  of  communication 
becomes  momentarily  interrupted.  It  matters  not  how 
many  spirits  are  present,  they  can  all  in  turn,  with  equal 
facility,  directly  communicate  through  this  channel,  and 
not  only  is  each  word  fully  and  clearly  expressed  in  the 
order  in  which  it  is  uttered  by  them,  but  even  the  accentu- 
ation and  emphasis,  are  conveyed  with  accuracy.  The 
great,  and  heretofore  generally  considered  insuperable  dif- 


INTRODUCTION.  9 

ficiilty  of  correctly  and  reliabty  impressing  tlie  brain  of  the 
medium  ^itli  the  language,  as  well  as  the  ideas  of  the  com- 
municating spirit,  is  by  this  method  completely  overcome. 
But  notT\'ithstanding  many  spirits  may  be  present,  and 
able  to  communicate,  yet,  since  Mr.  Owen  first  communi- 
cated mth  me  no  earthly  friend  has  been  permitted  to  be 
jn-esent  at  any  seance.  He  says  they  have  received  imper- 
ative orders  from  higher  powers  to  exclude  all,  and  against 
my  inclination  I  am  compelled  to  submit  to  what,  at  least 
at  first  view,  appears  to  be  arbitrary  rule. 

My  researches  in  the  spirit  world  have  tended  to  con- 
vince me  that  nothing  in  relation  to  sj^irits  and  their  world 
is  impossible,  and  I  here  desire  to  impress  upon  the  mind 
of  the  reader  the  fact  that  few  rules  laid  down  in  this  work 
are  Tsithout  exceptions,  especially  endowed  individuals  and 
special  facts  constantly  presenting  themselves  to  invalidate 
claims  that  may  be  made  for  invariable  rules. 

Also,  in  my  researches,  I  have  constantly  been  impressed 
vdth  the  numerous  unequivocal  proofs  of  the  creative  and 
sustaining  power  of  Deity,  and  step  by  step  I  have  been 
led  to  undoubtingly  believe  that  He,  though  not  in  human 
form,  is  every  where  present,  the  Creator,  Preserver,  and 
Supreme  Controller  of  all  things,  literally  God  in  the  most 
comj)rehensive  sense  of  the  term,  in  Whom  is  all  wisdom, 
and  power,  and  whose  infinite  love  extends  to  all  His 
creatures. 

This  is  the  effect  of  these  investigations  upon  my  mind, 
and  I  am  disposed  to  believe  that  similar  and  more  ex- 


#■ 


10  INTRODUCTION. 

tended  researclies  by  others,  in  tlie  future,  will  lead  all 
true  earnest  Spiritualists  to  the  same  belief,  and  thus  Mod- 
ern Spiritualism  will  be  stamped  with  the  highest  quahty 
and  faculty  of  true  religion,  that  of  correct,  though  neces- 
sarily limited  conceptions  of  God's  character,  of  His  rela- 
tions to  us,  and  of  ours  to  Him. 


THE   SPIRIT  WORLD, 


ITS  LXHABITANTS,   NATURE,   AND  PHILOSOPHY. 


CHAPTER  I. 

The  Spirit  and  Soul.     Death,  the  Birth  of  the  Spirit.     Temporary 
Desertion  of  the  Body  by  the  Spirit. 

THE    SPIEIT    AND    SOUL. 

EmbocTiecT  man  is  a  trinity,  constituted  of  physical  body, 
sjDiiitual  body,  and  soul  or  essence.  Disembodied  man  is 
a  duality,  constituted  of  spiritual  body,  and  soul.  In 
speaking  of  these  it  is  more  conyenient  to  use  the  terms 
body,  spii'it,  and  soul,  and  throughout  this  work  they  are 
most  commonly  thus  designated. 

I  beheye  that  the  spiritual  body,  or  organism,  in  its  en- 
tirety, constitutes  the  mdiyidual  man,  the  soul  or  essence 
being  an  integi'al,  unsegregated  portion  of  the  All-j)er- 
yading  Spirit,  a  spark  of  Deity,  by  yirtue  of  which  man  is 
immortal. 

The  physical  and  spiritual  bodies  I  beheye  to  be  coeyal 
in  origin.  The  earth  is  the  nursery  and  j)rimary  school 
for  both  the  physical  and  spiritual  natures  of  men.     It  is 


12  THE    SPIRITUAL  "BODY    SUBSTANTIAL. 

here  tliey  originate,  and  here  it  is  intended  they  shall  be 
developed,  and  developed  simultaneously  and  equally,  but 
when  premature  death  of  the  physical  body  occurs  the 
sjjiritual  body,  then  translated,  continues  to  grow  in  stature 
and  proportions  the  same  as  if  the  union  had  not  been  pre- 
maturely dissolved. 

The  spiritual  body  is  not  constituted  of  matter  cogni- 
zable bv  the  natural  human  senses,  but  nevertheless  it  is 
constituted  of  matter  in  a  refined  or  sublimated  form,  and 
in  itself  is  substantial.  Electricity  and  magnetism  are  not 
elements,  but  forces,  therefore  the  spiritual  body  is  not 
constituted  of  either  or  both  of  these.  The  substance  of 
wliich  it  is  composed  probably  bears  the  same  relations  to 
the  spirit-world  that  the  physical  body  does  to  the  mate- 
rial, and  force  operates  upon  and  through  both. 

The  question  as  to  the  period  of  gestation  when  it  may 
be  truly  considered  that  the  foetus  becomes  a  living  soul  is 
difficult,  if  not  impossible  to  answer,  but  it  probably  is 
much  earlier  than  is  generally  supposed.  I  have  had  re- 
peated and  convincing  evidence  that  a  foetus  of  the  fourth 
month,  in  one  instance  at  least,  was  endowed  with  im- 
mortal life. 

There  are  human  beings  so  imperfectly  developed,  spirit- 
ually and  mentally,  so  low  in  the  scale  of  creation,  so  de- 
based, that  at  death  they  share  the  fate  of  animals.  With 
this  life  their  existence  terminates. 

There  are  no  such  beings  as  elementaries,  elementals, 
fairies,  elves,  sprites,  gTiomes,  kobolds,  fauns,  satyrs,  or 
demons.  No  such  sub-human  or  semi-human  beings  exist 
in  the  spirit  world.  They  are  solely  creatures  of  the 
imagination,  poetical,  superstitious  fancies. 

Animals  equally  with  man  have  organized  spiritual  bodies, 
but  whilst  with  man  his  spiritual  body  is  so  constituted 
that  it  continues  to  exist  as  an  entity  when  separated  from 


ANIMALS    1IAV1<:    Sl'IJJITUAL    BODIES.  13 

the  pliysicLil,  A\'itli  animals  their  spiritual  bodies,  not  being 
similarly  constituted,  are  at  death  resolved  into  their 
original  spiritual  elements. 

The  structural  substance  of  spirits  in  the  flesh  is  more 
plastic  and  yielding  than  that  of  spirits  out  of  the  flesh, 
and  conforms  readily  to  the  physical  deformities,  such  as 
chib-feet,  curved  spine,  etc.,  but  very  soon  after  the  spirit 
is  born  into  spirit  life  the  sjoiritual  body  acquires  the  per- 
fection and  permanence  of  form  Avhich  afterwards  charac- 
terize it.  AVhen  a  spirit  is  emerging  from  the  mortal  body 
the  spirit  attendants,  if  their  services  are  required,  handle 
the  liberated  parts  with  the  'utmost  delicacy,  and  tender- 
ness, for  until  the  birth  is  accomplished  the  density  of  the 
spiritual  body  is  insufiicient  to  effectually  resist  the  pres- 
sure exerted  in  handling  it,  and  temporary  suffering  would, 
and  sometimes  does  result  from  want  of  proper  care  and 
attention  in  this  respect,  on  the  part  of  inconsiderate  spirit 
fi'iends. 

Contrary  to  my  former  belief  I  find  that  spiritual  limbs 
do  not  project  from  the  stumps  of  amputated  limbs.  It 
appears  that  they  are  retracted  into  the  portions  of  the 
limbs  remaining,  or  where  these  are  entirely  deficient  into 
the  body  itself.  At  my  request  my  instructors  and  other 
of  my  spmt  fi'iends  noticed  all  the  crippled  persons  that 
■  came  under  their  observation,  and  even  intentionally  sought 
them,  and  the  result  was  that  in  no  single  instance  were 
they  able  to  perceive  any  j)ortion  of  a  spiritual  limb  where 
the  physical  hmb  was  wanting.  And  we  will  perceive  that 
it  should  be  thus  when  we  consider  that  a  projecting 
spiiitual  hmb,  a  leg  for  instance,  would  constantly  be  hable 
to  accidents,  attended  mth  more  or  less  temporary  suffer- 
ing to  the  spirit.  Those  instances  in  which  projecting 
spiritual  limbs  have  apparently  been  clairvoyantly  per- 
ceived, may  be  accounted  for  by  supposmg  the  appearan- 


11  LIFE    A    SUCCESSION    OF    DEGREES. 

ces  to  have  been  psycliological  images  of  former  limbs  oc- 
cupying the  places  made  vacant  by  their  loss.  In  the 
experience  of  some  of  the  most  accomplished  mesmerists 
many  instances  have  occurred  in  which  the  images  of 
persons  and  objects  have  been  clairvoyantly  perceived  by 
their  sensitives  in  j)laces  then  vacant,  but  which  had  pre- 
viousty  been  occupied  by  these  persons  and  objects. 

Spirits  rarely  meet  with  accidents,  but  sometimes  these 
occur,  and  when  they  are  severe  they  suffer  more  or  less, 
but  their  sufferings  are  never  protracted  nor  severe.  Their 
persons  are  not  subject  to  the  possibihty  of  mutilation, 
fi^acture,  dislocation  of  limbs,  or  any  permanent  injury. 


DEATH,    THE    BIRTH    OF   THE    SPIRIT. 

"  As  the  outer  life  recedes, 

Inner  worlds  unfold  to  view  ; 
For  thee  bloom  the  fragrant  meads, 
Mantled  o'er  with  crystal  dew. 

"  Angel  friends  thy  soul  embrace  ; 

Angel-life  would  blend  with  thine  ; 
Welcome  to  the  eternal  race, 
To  the  heavenly  muse's  shrine." 

— Harris. 

Life  is  a  succession  of  degrees  ;  the  last  in  this  hfe  and 
the  first  in  the  other  are  as  intimately  related  as  those 
that  precede  and  follow.  The  Jordan  of  death  is  no  dark 
stream,  but  a  shining  river,  over  which  the  good  and  the 
just  are  securely  borne  in  the  arms  of  angels.  Death  robs 
humanity  of  nothing ;  all  that  it  claims  are  the  cast-off 
robes  of  mortahty.  But  death  is  productive  of  one  greg^t 
change,  it  assorts  us  all  and  places  every  man  on  his  own 
proper  footing ;  it  exalts  some  and  debases  others,  and 
never  makes  a  mistake.     Death  is  the  revealer  of  souls.  - 


THE    BIKTII    OF   THE    SPIRIT.  15 

Occasioually  the  spirit  suffers  more  or  less  in  the  act  of 
leaviiii^"  the  body.  INIr.  Owen  told  me  that  he  was  at  one 
time,  not  long  before,  present  at  a  death  scene,  when  the 
si^irit  being  partiall}'  delivered,  and  conscious,  exclaimed, 
"  O  Lord,  deliver  me  out  of  this  body  from  my  pain  and 
suffering ! "  But  such  instances  are  uncommon.  This 
person  w'as  a  young  man,  of  a  material  cast  of  mind,  wholly 
attached  to  this  world,  and  averse  to  leaving  it,  and  who 
had  been  suddenly  stricken  by  the  hand  of  death.  At 
the  time  Mr.  Owen  related  this  circumstance,  only  a  few 
months  after  his  decease,  he  said  he  had  witnessed  two 
other  separations  of  the  spirit  from  the  body,  and  both 
these  were  easily  and  painlessly  accomj)lished.  He  also 
said  that  in  each  of  these  instances  the  process  of  separa- 
tion was  the  same  ;  first  the  head  emerged  from  the  mate- 
rial head,  then  successively,  the  shoulders,  arms,  chest, 
body,  and  lower  hmbs,  the  spirit  as  it  came  into  view  pre- 
-sentmg  its  perfect  form.  The  emergence  of  the  spiritual 
body  was  in  a  horizontal  direction,  in  a  line  with  the  pros- 
trate physical  form,  the  entire  spiritual  person  issuing  from 
the  head  of  the  latter. 

It  matters  not  to  the  departing  spirit  whether  its  body 
Hes  on  cotton,  feathers,  wool,  or  straw.  No  substance  upon 
which  the  body  reposes  can  in  the  slightest  degree  acceler- 
ate or  retard  the  birth  of  the  spirit,  or  influence  it  favor- 
ably or  unfavorably. 

The  moment  a  spirit  has  left  its  body  a  window  should 
be  opened  to  facilitate  its  departure,  otherwise,  in  many 
cases,  this  may  be  delayed  for  so  long  a  time  as  to  cause 
much  inconvenience,  and  possibly  some  suffering,  either  to 
the  new  bom  sj)mt  or  its  anxious  spiiit  friends.  This 
question  of  the  necessity  of  providing  means  of  egTess  had 
been  discussed  at  different  times,  at  our  meetings,  without 
reaching  any  satisfactory  solution,  when  a  spirit  friend  of 


16  FRIENDS    CAN    RENDER    ASSISTANCE. 

Mr.  Owen  invited  him  to  accompany  him  to  the  bedside  of 
a  dying  sister.  He  accepted  the  invitation,  and  after  the 
spirit  had  become  released  from  the  body  its  spirit  friends 
were  unable  to  remove  it  from  the  room  through  the 
walls,  but  were  comj)elled  to  wait  until  a  person  present 
opened  a  window,  when  the  unconscious  spirit  was  borne 
through  it  in  the  arms  of  its  friends. 

Mr.  Owen  is  of  the  opinion  that  new  born  spirits  can- 
not, as  a  rule,  even  when  conscious,  immediately  pass 
through  solid  walls,  and  generally  their  friends  are  unable 
to  carry  unconscious  spirits  through  them.  From  what  he 
has  learned  of  this  subject,  from  his  own  obsei-vation,  and 
from  others  who  have  given  attention  to  it,  he  has  con- 
cluded that  the  great  majority  of  spirits  who  do  not  lose 
consciousness  while  dying  do  so  very  soon  afterward,  and 
while  in  this  condition  their  friends  convey  them  to  their 
spirit  homes,  and  he  urges  in  all  cases  the  propriety  of 
opening  a  window  soon  after  the  spirit  leaves  the  body. 

Those  w^ho  pass  aw^ay  under  the  influence  of  narcotics, 
even  when  their  habits  have  been  strictly  proper,  are  often 
unconscious  of  their  change  for  days,  while  drunkards, 
debauchees,  and  others  whose  spiritual  as  well  as  physical 
systems  have  become  vitiated  and  exhausted  of  vitality 
from  gross  abuse,  frequently  remain  in  an  unconscious 
state  for  weeks,  and  even  months,  it  being  only  by  slow 
degrees  and  the  assiduous  efforts  of  their  spirit  friends 
that  they  are  aroused  to  a  realization  of  the  changed  con- 
ditions of  their  existence. 

It  is  true,  as  said  by  Swedenborg,  that  "  many  spirits 
possessing  very  strong  earthly  affections  cannot  on  their 
arrival  in  the  spiritual  world  beheve  that  they  have  quitted 
the  earth  ;  they  oftepi  remain  a  long  time  in  this  uncertamty." 

The  S23irit  is  born  naked  into  the  next  life,  but  minis- 
tering spirits,  unless  it  be  in  cases  of  sudden  death,  are 


NEW    BORN    SPIRITS    CARED    FOR.  17 

always  present  provided  with  garments  witli  wliicli  to  clothe 
the  emancipated  spirit,  and  not  a  sudden  death  occurs  which 
is  not  immediately  known  in  the  third  or  fourth  heaven  by 
certain  spirits,  whose  duty  it  is  to  immediately  proceed  to 
the  assistance  of  the  new  born  spirit,  provided  with  suita- 
ble raiment.  They  also  understand  the  means  that  are 
best  adapted  to  restore  consciousness,  if  this  be  sus]3ended, 
and  the  strength,  if  exhausted,  and  they  employ  these 
means,  and  as  soon  as  circumstances  permit  they  assist  in 
conveying  the  spirit  to  its  proper  sphere  or  heaven.  Thus 
it  is  that  those  who  die  without  any  spirit  relatives  or 
friends  to  care  for  them  are  aiways  provided  for. 

Upon  our  passing  over  and  first  meeting  our  spirit  friends 
they  have  the  power,  by  an  exercise  of  the  will,  to  ap- 
pear to  us  as  they  appeared  on  earth,  so  that  they  shall 
be  recognized  by  us,  but  soon  after  we  have  reached  our 
sjoirit  homes  they  resume  their  proper  spiritual  appearance, 
and  their  identity  now  having  been  fully  established  in  our 
minds,  no  doubts  of  it  arise  thereafter. 

Until  decomposition  of  the  body  commences,  or  it  is 
placed  on  ice,  or  deposited  in  the  ground,  or  by  some  other 
means  its  lingering  remains  of  magnetic  life  are  extin- 
guished, a  certain  degree  of  sympathy  or  affinity  sometimes 
continues  to  exist  between  the  sj)irit  and  its  cast-off  re- 
mains, but  after  either  of  these  events  takes  place  it  almost 
invariably  ceases,  and  thereafter  no  suffering  can  be  inflict- 
ed on  the  spirit  l)y  any  violence  done  to  its  earthly  remains. 
But  ordinarily  after  the  spirit  has  departed  from  the  body 
it  experiences  no  discomfort  from  any  disposition  or  treat- 
ment of  the  latter,  and  spirits  rarely  feel  any  serious  in- 
terest in  the  c^uestion,  how  their  earthly  bodies  shall  be 
disposed  of. 

Intense  gTief  manifested  by  the  friends  of  a  departing 
spirit  renders  the  transition  more  difficult,  and  more  or 


18  LEAVIXG   TITE    BODY   TEMPORARILY. 

less  painful ;  sometimes  extremely  so.  It  should  never  be 
indulged  in,  or  at  least  in  the  presence  of  the  dying  person. 
Spirits  are  gratified  with  every  mark  of  love  and  affection 
on  the  part  of  their  earthly  friends,  and  many  times  feel 
■\vounded  and  hurt  when  such  sentiments  are  not  manifest- 
ed, but  only  weak,  vain,  and  frivolous  spuits  apj)rove  lavish 
expenditure  on  tombs,  and  monuments  to  theu'  memoiy, 
and  in  those  instances  where  the  sui'^dvors  are  unable  to 
afford  such  expenditure  sensible  spirits  are  grieved  at  the 
injudicious  course  pursued  by  them. 

te:mpoeary  desertion  of  the  body  by  the  spirit. 

Until  December,  1877,  I  was  sceptical  as  to  the  possi- 
bility of  a  spuit  in  the  flesh  temj)orarily  leaving  its  body, 
and  my  spuitual  instructors  shared  my  doubts,  when,  at  a 
seance  at  that  date,  Mr.  Owen  said  he  had  the  j)revious 
night  obtained  knowledge  in  relation  to  a  subject  which 
we  had  frequently  discussed,  and  he  thought  when  I 
learned  the  nature  of  it  it  would  be  as  gratifying  to  me  as 
it  had  been  to  him. 

He  then  proceeded  to  say  that  on  the  j)re^ious  day,  in  a 
conversation  between  him  and  my  father  on  one  side  and 
a  sj)irit  of  intelligence  and  experience  on  the  other,  this 
Cjuestion  was  introduced  by  my  friends,  and  they  said  they 
did  not  believe  it  possible  for  the  spirit  of  a  mortal  to 
leave  its  body  and  return  to  and  re-occupy  it.  The  spirit 
whom  they  addressed  replied  that  they  were  in  error,  and 
pro|)osed  to  make  this  evident  to  them  by  conducting  them 
to  the  presence  of  a  lady  whose  spirit  frequentty  left  the 
body  and  returned  to  it  vvdiile  asleep,  and  suggested  the 
possibility  of  their  being  able  to  obtain  the  e-\ddence  of  the 
truth  of  his  assertion  that  veiy  night.  They  accepted 
the  invitation,  and  about  eleven  o'clock  j)roceeded  to  the 


A    CASE    IN    POINT.  19 

dwelling"  of  tlie  lady,  entered  her  bed-cliamber,  Avhere  they 
found  her  asleep,  and  awaited  events.  Their  conductor  at 
intervals  made  mesmeric  passes  over  and  concentrated  his 
attention  upon  her,  and  in  less  than  an  hour,  to  their  sur- 
prise, the}'  saw  her  spirit  emerge  from  her  body,  and  after 
a  moment  of  aj^parent  indecision  pass  through  the  walls  of 
the  building  and  pursue  a  coiu'se  in  the  direction  of  the 
ocean,  over  which  she  and  the}'  passed  until  she  reached  a 
ship,  when  she  entered  the  cabin,  and  from  thence  a  state- 
room, where  she  bent  over  the  sleeping  form  of  a  young  man. 
Here  she  remained  but  a  single  minute,  when  she  returned 
by  a  direct  course  to  her  des'erted  body,  and  after  a  mo- 
ment's delay  re-entered  it.  My  friends  accompanied  her 
fi'om  the  time  she  left  her  body  until  she  returned,  she  not 
being  conscious  of  their  j)resence.  Her  movements  w^re 
not  as  rapid  as  those  of  spirits  usually  are. 

The  spirit  who  furnished  this  opportunity  for  my  friends 
to  satisfy"  themselves  of  the  truth  of  his  statement,  had  re- 
peatedly  been  a  witness  to  similar  occurrences  on  the  j)art 
of  'the  spirit  of  this  lad}',  in  whom  he  was  interested,  and 
said  that  her  spiiit  always  took  the  same  course  in  its 
flight,  namely,  towards  the  ship,  of  which  it  seems  her  son 
was  first  officer.  Her  sohcitude  on  his  account  attracted 
her  spirit  to  him. 

In  the  few  moments  they  had  to  observe  the  deserted 
body,  they  found  it  to  present  a  perfectly  lifeless  appear- 
ance. It  was  the  opinion  of  their  friend,  and  it  is  now, 
after  obtaining  further  information  from  other  sources, 
their  opinion  also,  that  two  or  three  minutes  are  as  long 
as  a  spnit  can  with  safety  remain  absent  from  its  body, 
and  in  instances  where  people  are  found  dead  in  their  beds 
the  real  cause  frequently  is  that  the  spirits,  having  left 
theu'  bodies  under  such  circumstances,  have  remained  so 
long  absent  fhat  they  find  it  impossible  to  regain  entrance 


20  NOT    OF    COMMOX    OCCURRENCE. 

to  them.  It  is  also  absolutely  necessary  for  tlie  wandering 
spirit  to  keep  its  thoughts  steadily  fixed  on  its  vacant  body, 
so  that  magnetic  relations  may  be  sustained,  and  this  some- 
times is  very  difficult  as  the  mind  of  the  spirit  at  such 
times  is  in  a  dazed,  semi-conscious  state,  in  most  respects 
resembling  that  of  an  ordinary  somnambulist. 

It  is  only  when  the  person  is  asleep,  or  entranced,  that 
the  spirit  is  able  to  leave  the  body,  and  it  is  only  with  per- 
sons possessing  medial  powers  that  it  is  at  all  possible,  and 
even  with  them  it  rarely  occurs.  My  instructors  are  con- 
vinced fi'oni  their  later  researches  in  this  direction,  that  all 
such  excursions  of  spirits  of  mortals  are  limited  to  earth, 
and  that  it  is  not  possible  to  extend  their  visits  to  even  the 
lowest  of  the  heavens. 

When  an  embodied  spirit  temporarily  leaves  its  body  it 
is  generally  assisted  by  its  guardian  spirit,  sometimes  by 
others,  and  a  mantle  or  robe  is  provided  with  which  the 
released  spirit  is  clothed  the  moment  it  emerges  from  the 
body,  and  when  it  is  prepared  to  re-enter  the  garment  is 
removed.  There  is  no  magnetic  line,  visible  to  spiritual 
eyes,  connecting  the  absent  spirit  with  its  body. 


CHAPTEE  n. 

GENERAL  VIEW  OF  THE  HEAVENS. 

"  There  is  a  World  in  space,  a  world  of  mind, 

Of  substance  so  ethereal  that  the  sphere 
Of  its  perfection,  like  a  sonl  enshrined 

In  God's  own  beauty,  shines  in  brightness  clear, 
Invisible  to  men  of  outward  sight." 

By  tlie  term,  spirit-world,  we  mean  the  system  or  series 
of  heavens,  or  zones,  which  are  associated  with  our  planet, 
and  which  revolve  with  it,  both  in  its  diurnal  and  solar 
revolutions,  and  which  are  fixed  in  their  relations  to  it, 
while  the  phrase,  spiritual  world,  comprehends  the  vast 
spiritual  realm  to  which  spirits  from  our  earth  and  from 
all  other  worlds  are  equally  related.  Other  planets  than 
ours,  in  our  solar  system,  also  have  spfrit  worlds,  or  heav- 
ens, encirchng  them,  but  as  we  know  nothing  of  these  it 
will  be  found  more  convenient  and  explicit  for  us  to  restrict 
the  use  of  the  term,  spirit-world,  to  that  immediately  as- 
sociated with  our  earth,  and  in  this  sense  we  have  used  it 
throughout  this  work. 

Many,  perhaps  the  majority  of  spirits  having  never  given 
the  subject  any  consideration,  if  asked,  what  is  the  form  of 
their  world,  would  reply,  that  of  a  globe,  like  the  earth. 
It  is  natiu'al  for  them  to  think  so,  having  in  earth-hfe  been 
taught  that  this  world  is  spherical  in  form,  and  the  heavens 
they  inhabit  presenting  to  their  view  an  appearance  in 
most  respects  similar  to  that  of  the  earth  they  naturally 


22  DISTANCES    OF    THE    HEAVENS. 

conclude,  unless  otherwise  instructed,  that  the  spirit  world 
also  is  a  spiritual  globe.  This  conception  of  the  form  of 
the  spirit-world  is  entirely  erroneous,  it  really  being  con- 
stituted of  a  series  of  spiritual  belts,  or  zones,  one  above 
the  other,  encircling  the  earth  parallel  to  the  equator,  and 
in  width  extending  about  sixty  or  seventy  degrees  north 
and  south  of  the  latter. 

In  the  second  volume  of  my  work.  The  Identity  of  Prim- 
itive Chridianity  and  Modern  Spiritualism,  I  gave  the  dis- 
tances of  the  heavens  or  spheres  from  the  earth,  and  each 
other,  u23on  the  judgment  of  my  spirit  friends,  and  I  then 
said,  "in  assigning  these  respective  distances  to  these 
spheres  my  spirit  friends  desired  me  to  distinctly  under- 
stand that  they  are  necessarily,  to  a  considerable  extent, 
conjectural,  and  hable  to  error."  This  question,  therefore, 
remaining  an  open  one,  they  did  not  cease  their  inquiries 
and  observations  in  this  direction,  and  now,  after  the  lapse 
of  live  years,  they  are  able  to  furnish  me  with  more  exact 
information  in  relation  to  this  subject.  This  information 
was  obtained  by  them  from  records  existing  in  the  spirit- 
world,  which  advanced  and  wise  spirits  regard  as  reliable, 
and  authentic.  I  will  premise  by  saying  that  the  spiritual 
sphere  immediately  surrounding  and  in  contact  with  the 
earth  which  sometimes  is  termed  the  first,  though  not  by 
S]3irits  themselves,  is  not  here  taken  into  account. 

According  to  their  revised  statement,  the  first  sj)here, 
zone,  or  heaven — they  term  all  the  spheres  heavens — is 
distant  from  the  earth  550  miles.  The  second  is  distant 
from  the  first  100  miles,  and  between  each  of  the  others, 
above  the  second  certainly  up  to  the  eighteenth,  the  dis- 
tance is  50  miles.  Of  the  distances  between  the  heavens 
above  this  the  records  make  no  statement.  This  brings  the 
seventh  heaven  within  one  thousand  miles  of  the  earth,  and 
provided  the  distances  between  the  heavens  above  the  eigh- ' 


THE    SPIRIT   WORLD    SUBSTANTIAL.  23 

teeiitli  are  the  same  as  below  it,  tlie  fortieth  lieaven  sliould 
be  between  two  and  three  thousand  miles  from  the  earth. 

At  niY  request,  my  instructors  made  careful  observation 
of  the  temperature  at  ditterent  distances  from  the  earth, 
with  the  following  results.  In  passing  upward  they  found 
the  cold  to  increase  for  a  distance  of  about  ten  miles,  when 
the  temperature  became  stationary  for  perhaps  ninety,  but 
about  twenty-five  miles  beyond  this  it  became  comparatively 
mild,  and  this  temj^erature  continued  until  within  about 
one  hundi'ed  and  fifty  miles  of  the  first  sphere,  when  it 
again  became  intensely  cold,  and  so  continued  until  within 
about  fifty  miles  of  that  sphere,  when  the  temperature 
again  became  mild  and  dehghtful.  They  formed  their 
judgment  of  the  distances  by  noting  and  comparing  the 
time  requii'ed  to  traverse  them. 

It  ma}^  here  be  remarked,  that  in  no  respect  are  my 
spirit  instructors  more  emphatic  and  positive  in  their 
declarations,  than  in  that  of  the  actuality  and  substantiality 
of  their  world.  They  fully  appreciate  the  fact  that  happi- 
ness and  misery  are  more  dependent  on  conditions  than 
locahty,  but  while  acknowledging  this  important  truth  they 
strenuously  insist  upon  the  due  consideration  of  the  col- 
lateral truth,  of  locality  and  substantiality  in  relation  to  the 
spu'it-world,  and  of  the  reality,  objectively  and  subjectively, 
of  life  in  that  world.  It  is  a  real  world  and  its  inhabitants 
are  those  who  have  gone  from  here  with  all  their  instincts, 
affections,  inchnations,  passions,  virtues  and  vices,  aiid 
there  they  congregate  in  cities,  or  dwell  apart  from  these, 
as  they  formerly  did  here,  and  while  none  are  worse  than 
many  among  us,  the  majority  are  better  than  we  are,  and 
are  constantly  progressing  in  that  life.  The  spirit-world  is 
not  an  indefinite  and  indefinable  region  in  space,  but  as 
fixed  and  determined  as  our  own  earth  in  the  solar  system. 
There  we  vrill  hve  active  and  real  lives,  and  have  natural 


24  A   COrNTERPART   OF   THIS. 

and  substantial  homes  to  live  in,  and  tliere  we  will  have  a 
practical  and  joyful  work  to  perform,  wliich  will  be  made 
glorious  in  its  results  if  we  clioose  to  make  it  so.  So 
nearty  does  that  world  in  many  respects  resemble  our  own 
that  many  who  pass  thence,  for  a  time,  are  unable  to  believe 
that  they  have  made  the  transition ;  they  believe  them- 
selves to  be  dreaming.  There  is  nothing  unreal  and  spec- 
tral about  the  spirit  world.  This  world,  with  its  sohd 
mountains,  its  rock-ribbed  coasts,  its  vast  plains  and  vaster 
oceans,  is  not  more  substantial  than  and  not  so  permanent 
and  enduring  in  character  as  all  that  constitutes  that  world, 
and  if  the  concurrent  testimony  of  intelligent  spirits  can 
be  relied  on,  this  in  comparison,  from  their  side,  is  the 
shadowy  land,  theirs  the  real.  Theirs  may  be  said  to  be 
a  substantial  reflection  of  this,  where  is  to  be  found  every- 
thing that  is  natural  to  this  world.  There  are  earth,  rock, 
metallic  veins,  precious  stones,  forests  aboundmg  in  every 
variety  of  trees,  and  indeed  there  are  all  the  conceivable 
varieties  of  mineral  and  vegetable  formations  that  are 
known  to  us.  There  are  also  substances  corresponding  to 
silk,  linen,  cotton,  and  wool,  in  their  natural  conditions,  so 
that  the  proper  skill  and  tools  only  are  necessary  to  con- 
vert them  into  objects  of  use,  and  beauty,  and  this  skill, 
and  these  tools  also,  are  to  be  found  there,  and  the  former 
is  exercised  in  every  conceivable  way. 

The  lower  forms  in  the  scale  of  animal  life  are  not  repre- 
sented there,  no  insects,  reptiles,  etc.,  nor  are  certain  un- 
sightly species  of  vegetation,  but  the  higher  forms  of  ani- 
mal life,  and  most  forms  of  vegetable  life,  together  with 
those  of  the  inorganic  kingdom,  are  there  found,  and 
their  existence  is  as  really  objective  as  corresponding 
forms  of  earth.  Thought  doss  not,  as  declared  by  some, 
take  visible  form  with  spirits  any  more  than  with  us,  and 
all  these  and  other  ol)jects  are  tangible,  substantial  reali- 


A   HEAL    PRACTICAL    AVOKLD.  25 

ties  to  tlie  Si^iritual  senses.  All  oi'  nearly  all  the  proper- 
ties kno\Mi  to  matter  here,  pertain  to  the  refined  matter  or 
substance  of  which  the  s^^irit  world  is  constituted.  There 
attraction  and  repulsion,  gravity,  cohesion,  expansion,  etc., 
operate,  and  there,  as  here,  matter  appears  unde:*  solid, 
Hquid,  and  gaseous  forms.  But  spiritual  substancc^s,  with 
very  few  exceptions,  are  not  subject  to  decompositi  ii,  and 
there  ai-e  no  impui-ities,  nor  offensive  gases,  or  odoi^-i,  aris- 
ing fi'om  this  cause. 

As  to  this  substantial  and  practical  character  of  the  other 
world,  why  should  it  be  objected  to  ?  Surely  this  Avorld  is 
practical  enough,  and  clearly  pi'oves  that  its  Designer's  and 
Creator's  mind  is  mechanical,  and  constructive,  and  as  the 
same  Being  in  His  wisdom  created  both,  and  evidently 
with  the  intention  that  they  should  be  the  abodes  of  men, 
why  should  not  the  other  world,  though  in  a  different  way, 
be  as  substantial,  and  practical,  and  as  well  adapted  to  the 
requii-ements  of  man's  nature  as  this  ?  Man  equally  with 
God  is  wtually  the  same  there  as  here,  and  if  heaven  is  a 
place  where  man's  best,  and  truest,  and  most  natural  de- 
sires are  gratified,  and  his  necessities  provided  for,  it  needs 
must  respond  to  these. 

My  sources  of  information  do  not  favor  the  theory 
of  the  spii'it-world  having  been  formed  by  the  accretion 
of  subhmated  atoms  arising  from  the  earth.  They  are 
unanimous  in  denjdng  that  there  is  any  evidence  of  such 
a  process  being  in  operation  at  the  present  time,  and 
that  there  are  any  indications  that  it  ever  has  been  in 
operation,  and  aside  from  the  conviction  which  their  assu- 
rances bring  to  my  mind,  I  am  unable  to  conceive  its  x>os- 
sibihty  in  view  of  the  fact  that  all  the  heavens  are  equally 
substantial,  the  highest  kno^vn  heaven  being  as  tangible  to 
sx)iritual  sense  as  the  lowest,  a  fact  entirely  inconsistent 
\\-ith  the  theoiy  of  each  heaven,  in  succession,  having  been 
2 


26  HOW    WE    APPEAR   TO    SPIRITS. 

formed  from  the  ascending  sublimated  atoms  of  tlie  heaven 
below  it,  and  consequently  of  its  being  an  outgrowth  of  it. 

Our  senses  are  not  fitted  to  perceive  that  world,  nor  its 
inhabitants,  and  if  we  sometimes  obtain  glimpses  of  either 
the  appearance  is  most  commonly  unreal,  and  spectral,  but 
we  should  remember  that  our  world,  and  ourselves  gen- 
erally aj)pear  equally  phantasmal  to  the  denizens  of  that 
world,  so  they  declare,  and  were  it  not  that  their  former 
experience  in  earth-life  has  taught  them  the  contrary  they 
doubtless  would  beheve  us  to  be  ]3hantoms,  mere  Will  o' 
whisps,  and  our  world  to  be  as  unreal  as  ourselves.  In 
fact  they  would  regard  us  and  our  world  jorecisely  as  the 
majority  of  people  here  regard  them  and  theirs. 

Spirits  sustain  relations  to  the  spirit  world  similar  to 
those  that  mortals  sustain  to  the  material,  and  of  most 
things  that  here  have  expression  in  nature  and  art  the  coun- 
terpart is  there  found,  the  only  apparent  difference  being 
that  everything  in  the  heavens  above  the  third  is  more 
beautiful,  nearer  perfection,  more  admirably  adapted  to 
the  purposes  intended.  Our  earth  is  the  t^^e  of  that 
world.  That  is  the  world  of  causes,  this  of  effects.  That 
world  is  unceasingly  making  its  imj^ress  on  this,  and  from 
thence  are  derived  much  of  our  knoAvledge  and  strength. 
We  take  from  that  world,  not  that  from  this. 


CH.1PTEE   HL 

THE    LOAY   HEAVENS    OR    SPHEKES. 

The  Earth  Sphere.    The  Second  Sphere.    Condition  of  Low  Spirits. 
Means  of  Progression.     Condition  of  Big-oted  Sectarians. 

"  Every  man's  work  shall  be  made  manifest,  for  the  day  shall  declare  it.  *  *  * 
If  any  man's  work  abide  which  he  hath  built,  thereupon  he  shall  receive  a  reward. 
Ic  any  man's  work  shall  be  burned  he  shall  suffer  loss,  but  he  himself  shall  be  saved, 
yet  so  as  by  fire.''    1  Cor.  iii.  13  to  15. 

"  G-od  speaks  through  anguish  in  the  hidden  soul, 
God  speaks  through  sorrow  in  the  human  breast." 

Tlie  S23irit-woiicl  literally  envelops  us,  and  the  surface 
of  oui'  earth,  for  all  practical  pui'j)oses  is  one  of  the  spheres, 
and  the  lowest  of  them,  for  multitudes  of  degTaded  dis- 
embodied spu'its  are  bound  to  it  by  their  gross  natures, 
and  here  continue  to  exist  for  yarious  periods  of  time,  and 
it  may  properly  be  termed  the  earth-sj)here,  while  the 
sphitual  zone  or  sj^here  removed  fi'om  and  nearest  the 
earth  is  termed  by  spirits  the  fii'st  sphere,  or  heaven,  and 
in  the  treatment  of  the  subject  they  ^ill  be  thus  desig'nated. 

But  the  first  sjDhere,  though  the  lowest  in  the  order  of 
aiTangement,  is  not  the  lowest  in  the  order  of  progi-ession, 
for  this  sjDhere  in  the  American  heavens  is  chiefly  apjDro- 
piiated  to  Indian  spuits,  and  really  is  a  heaven,  while  the 
second  sphere  is  the  next  lowest  to  the  earth-sphere  in  the 
order  of  progression.  Sj)iiits  term  all  these  spheres, 
heavens,  the  fii'st  being  according  to  theu'  nomenclature 
the  "  Indian  heaven  "  and  the  second  the  "  heaven  for  low 


23  ALL    SPIRITS    ARE    HUMAN    EI<]INaS. 

wliite  people,  or  v/icked  lieaven,"  but  feeling  a  degree  of 
repugnance  to  terming  tlie  second  sphere  a  lieaven  I 
have  tlirougliout  this  v>"ork  designated  both  the  first  and 
second  heavens  as  spheres,  and  all  above  these  as  heavens. 

From  the  above  it  will  be  perceived  that  the  first  sphere 
is  practically  ignored  in  its  relationship  to  the  white  race, 
and  the  next  step  from  the  earth-sphere,  in  the  order  of 
progression,  is  to  the  second  sphere,  and  I  would  suggest 
that  the  reader  impress  this  arrangement  on  his  mind  be- 
fore 23roceeding  further. 

One  of  the  lessons  that  is  most  difficult  for  novices  in 
Sj^iritualism  to  learn,  and  bear  in  mind,  is  the  fact  that 
spiiits  are  but  human  beings,  neither  specially  created 
angels,  nor  demons,  fallible,  sometimes  weak  and  ignorant, 
and  while  some  are  on  intellectual  and  moral  planes  above 
us,  quite  as  often  they  are  found  to  be  on  planes  below  us. 
There  are  no  demons,  or  devils,  as  these  terms  are  popu- 
larly understood.  There  are  spirits  of  all  grades  of  de- 
pravity and  wickedness,  and  some  of  these  may  justly  be 
regarded  as  demoniacal  in  their  natures,  but  they  are  never- 
theless human  spirits,  and  sooner  or  later  will  enter  the 
paths  of  progression,  and  ultimately  become  purified  and 
exalted  angels.  God's  mercy  embraces  all  His  creatures. 
There  is  not  a  fiend-like  spirit  in  the  lowest  spheres,  or 
hells,  nor  an  angel  in  the  spiritual  realms,  as  far  as  my 
instructors  have  knowledge,  that  has  not  originated,  either 
on  our  earth  or  some  other  celestial  globe. 

The  tendencies  that  lead  to  sin  and  crime  are  but  mani- 
festations of  minds  diseased,  and  the  latter  are  frequently 
associated  with  diseased  bodies  ;  as  these  suffer  from  func- 
tional derangement  so  the  former  do  from  derangement  of 
the  moral  and  spiritual  functions,  and  the  only  remedy  is 
apx^roi^riate  moral  treatment  under  favorable  conditions. 
Sin  and  punishment  are  sowing  and  reaping,  cause  and 


HEAVEN   AND    HELL   ARE    LOCALITIES.  29 

effect,  and  tlie  law  of  compensation  requires  of  every  man 
in  tlie  life  to  come  full  atonement  for  unrepented  ^vi'ongg 
and  none  can  progress,  nor  find  rest,  until  tlie  penalty  has 
been  paid,  either  by  rectifying  the  wrong,  or  making  atone- 
ment by  sincere  rejDentance  and  good  works.  But  strictly 
speaking,  there  is  no  arbitrary  punishment  hereafter,  there 
is  only  necessary  discipline.  Evil  in  its  nature  is  transi- 
tory^, the  good  only  endures  for  ever.  Good  is  the  sub- 
stance of  which  evil  is  only  the  shadow.  Some  people 
when  they  enter  spiiit  hfe  find  themselves  surrounded  with 
desolation ;  they  are  in  af&nity  only  with  such  surround- 
ings, as  the  camel  is  Tvith  the  surroundings  of  the  desert. 
"Condition  accurately  follows  character."  When  at  one 
time  Wesley  was  preaching  he  was  addressed  by  a  drunken 
man  in  the  audience,  who  said :  "I  don't  beHeve  in  heaven, 
Mr.  Wesley."  The  reply  of  the  latter  was,  "In  your  cir- 
cumstances I  don't  se"e  how  you  could." 

It  is  sometimes  said,  even  by  spirits,  that  heaven  and 
hell  are  not  localized.  In  one  sense  this  is  correct,  for 
while  earth-bound  spirits  find  their  hell  on  earth,  and 
others  find  the  second  sphere  in  a  less  degree  hell,  neither 
this  earth  nor  the  second  sphere,  is  in  the  same  sense,  heU 
to  good  spirits  who  may  visit  the  one  or  the  other.  But 
it  is  equally  true  that  this  earth  and  the  second  sphere  are 
locahties,  and  all  spirits  who  are  restricted  to  these  locali- 
ties are  unhappy,  and  it  may  be  said  that  they  are  in  hell, 
and  in  these  two  j)laces  all  unhappy  spirits  are  to  be  found. 
Therefore  as  to  depraved  spirits  hell  is  literally  localized, 
and  while  the  sphere  of  earth  is  hell  to  the  lowest  and  most 
degTaded  spirits  the  influences  which  pervade  it,  when 
these  are  permitted  to  prevail  over  a  man's  moral  nature, 
reduce  him  to  the  level  of  earth-bound,  disembodied  spirits, 
and  he  is  in  hell,  as  they  are,  and  not  only  are  many  mor- 
tals subject  in  greater  or  less  degrees  to  these  influences, 


30  SLOW    PROGRESS    OF    SOME 

bnt  many  spirits  wlio  liave  advanced  to  tlie  tliird  heaven 
and  who  in  this  hfe  were  untruthful,  or  immoral,  when  they 
revisit  the  earth  and  resume  their  former  earthly  conditions 
are  as  untruthful,  or  perhaps  immoral,  as  when  in  the 
flesh,  and  this,  notwithstanding  when  they  are  in  their 
homes  in  the  third  heaven  they  are  free  from  aU  such  fail- 
ings. Good  spirits,  as  a  rule,  are  unable  to  long  remain 
either  on  earth  or  in  the  second  sj)here  without  inconveni- 
ence, they  cannot  successfully  resist  beyond  a  certain  point 
the  depressing  adverse  influences  of  either  place,  while  on 
the  contrary  were  the  lowest  spirit,  with  all  his  imperfec- 
tions, introduced  to  the  realms  of  bliss  he  would  only  find 
his  misery  increased,  and  would  avail  himself  of  the  first 
opportunity  to  return  to  his  own  j)lace,  where  his  surround- 
ings would  be  in  harmony  with  his  own  feehngs,  and  con- 
dition. Heaven  to  him  would  be  a  worse  hell  than  the 
lowest  spiritual  sphere.  Heaven  and  hell  therefore  are 
locahties  as  well  as  conditions. 

There  are  sj)irits  who  in  this  life  were  so  debased,  so 
gross,  so  steeped  in  depravity,  that  they  remain  in  their 
deo-raded  condition  and  continue  to  inhabit  the  lowest 
spheres  for  long  periods  of  time,  for  ages,  and  in  some 
rare  mstances  even  for  centuries.  Thev  have  no  desire  for 
improvement,  and  progression,  and  until  they  experience 
this  desire  their  advancement  is  imj^ossible,  but  in  time, 
remote  though  it  may  be,  this  is  awakened  within  them. 

The  sj)irits  of  misers,  sometimes,  are  bound  to  their 
hoarded  earthly  treasures,  and  they  are  released  fi'om  their 
bondage  only  when  their  wealth  has  become  distributed 
among  or  squandered  by  their  heirs,  and  it  frequently  hap- 
pens that  when  they  are  brought  to  reahze  their  abject 
condition  they  labor  more  strenuously  to  scatter  their 
wealth  than  they  did  to  amass  it,  and  not  unfrequently  with 
success. 


EARTH-BOUND    SPIRITS.  31 

There  are  certain  spirits,  wlio,  altliou^i^-li  they  left  their 
earthly  bodies  years  siuce,  are  persuaded  that  they  still  in- 
lialnt  them.  They  reallv  are  liyinc:  on  the  earth,  and  the  dif- 
ference  in  their  habits,  mode  of  life,  and  surroundings,  is  not 
sntHcient  to  con^ince  them  that  thev  are  no  lon2;er  mortal. 
These  earth-boiuid  spirits  are  generally  on  low  intellectual 
and  moral  planes,  and  placed  as  they  are  they  are  unable 
to  reason  clearly  on  their  situation,  and  perhaps  a  score  or 
more  of  yeai's  may  elapse  before  they  can  be  brought  to 
comprehend  theu*  changed  condition,  and  advance,  even  to 
the  second  sphere. 

Many  earth-bound  spiiits  us'e  their  limbs  only  in  locomo- 
tion, not  possessmg  the  j)ower  to  pass  more  speedily  and 
easily  fi'om  point  to  point,  and  others,  who  really  possess 
the  jDower,  are  unconscious  of  it,  and  do  not  attempt  to 
exercise  it.  Of  coiu'se  all  these  in  time  attain  to  that  state 
in  which  this  power  is  fi*eely  and  fully  exercised. 

The  victim  of  the  murderer,  when  on  a  low  j)lane,  as 
well  as  the  murderer  himself,  is  sometimes  irresistibly 
attracted  to  the  scene  of  the  crime,  or  perhaps  to  the  spot 
where  his  body  is  deposited,  his  last  terrible  experiences 
having  psychologically  bound  him  to  that  locality.  "  My 
bones  must  be  removed  from  their  resting  place  or  my  soul 
must  suffer  continual  torture,"  were  the  words  of  the  spirit 
of  a  murdered  woman,  of  this  low  condition.  In  time  such 
luifortunate  creatures  escape  from  their  thraldom  and  as- 
cend to  the  second  sphere. 

Earth-bound  spiiits  infest  our  pubhc  conveyances,  steam- 
boats, etc.,  they  frequent  the  lowest  quarters  of  our  cities, 
and  low  dance  houses,  hquor  saloons,  brothels,  gambling 
saloons,  etc.,  are  crowded  with  them.  They  subsist  mostly 
on  the  emanations  from  earthly  food.  Restaurants  and 
kitchens,  especially  when  unclean,  are  resorted  to  by  them 
when  hungiy,  they  also  frequent  hotels,  and  private  houses, 


C:^  SPIRITUAL    VAMPIKES. 

where  ricli  and  luxurious  repasts  are  habitually  served,  and 
inliale  the  odors  and  impalpable  elements  arising  from 
these.  Some  attach  themselves  to  gluttonous  persons,  who 
are  mediumistic,  and  are  able  to  abstract  the  more  sub- 
limated and  vitalizing  elements  of  the  food  from  their 
victims  as  fast  as  it  is  swallowed,  and  thus  a  morbid  apj)e- 
tite  is  created  which  impels  the  person  to  continued  and 
extraordinary  efforts  to  satisfy  it.  He  really  is  eating  for 
two  persons,  one  of  whom  is  invisible.  Such  spirits  are 
veritable  vampires.  Liquor  saloons  are  crowded  with  this 
class  of  spirits,  and  not  a  person  who  possesses  medial  power 
in  any  degree,  and  most  persons  possess  it  in  some  degree, 
there  moistens  his  lips  with  wine  or  liquor,  who  is  not  at 
once  obsessed  by  miserable,  degraded  spirits,  and  by  them 
urged — often  irresistibly — to  further  indulgence,  until,  as 
it  frequently  happens,  the  victim  becomes  prostrated  by 
the  demon  of  drunkenness,  with  perhaps  the  obsessing 
spirit  lying  equally  unconscious  and  helpless  at  his  side. 
These  remarks,  slightly  modified,  are  also  apphcable  to 
gambhng  saloons,  and  brothels.  Could  the  frequenters  of 
these  abodes  of  sin  and  evil  have  their  spiritual  eyes 
opened,  as  were  the  eyes  of  the  servant  of  Elisha,  they 
would  rush  with  horror  from  such  scenes,  and  in  their 
subsequent  sleep  they  would  be  tortured  by  dreams  only 
less  horrible  than  the  reality  which  had  been  presented  to 
their  spiritual  sight. 

And  not  only  are  these  earth-bound  spirits  attracted  by 
the  odors  and  emanations  from  our  food,  which  nourish 
their  grosser  natures,  but  another  reason  why  they  fre- 
cjuent  the  scenes  of  their  earthly  life  is  the  necessity,  proba- 
bly not  recognized  by  themselves,  of  obtaining  that  spirit- 
ual or  ^ital  nourishment  which  they  are  deficient  in,  and 
which  they  find  in  the  atmosphere  of  mortals.  This  crav- 
ing of  their  natures  brings  them  into  rapport  with  mortals 


OBSESSION    OF   MOKTALS.  33 

on  tlieii'  ovm  moral  and  spiritual  planes,  and  their  evil  in- 
fluence is  felt,  and  frequently  becomes  manifest,  in  these 
classes  of  persons,  and  many  times  they  are  attracted  and 
attach  themselves  to  persons  on  higher  planes,  v^ho,  though 
not  actually  given  to  e^il  practices,  yet  are  not  earnestly 
opposed  to  them,  and  who  under  the  temptations  of  such 
low  spirits  soon  fall  into  them,  and  are  reduced  to  the  level 
of  their  tempters.  The  fall  of  such  j)ersons  would  fre- 
quently be  prevented,  were  they  to  know  and  realize  that 
they  also  have  good  sj)irit  friends  around  them  Avho  would 
effectually  assist  them  if  they  would  only  welcome  them, 
and  by  their  prayers  and  desires  strengthen  their  hands  so 
that  they  could  put  to  flight  these  dark  and  degraded 
spirits. 

In  those  cases,  also,  which  so  perplex  and  astonish  so- 
ciety, where  men  and  women  of  education  and  refinement 
become  infatuated  with  and  marry  ignorant  and  coarse 
persons,  far  beneath  themselves  socially,  intellectually,  and 
perhaps  morally,  the  exj)lanation  of  the  enigma  frequently 
is  to  be  found  in  the  fact  that  they  are  possessed  of  medial 
power,  and  are  surrounded  by  material  influences,  living 
in  a  spiritually  stagnant,  perhaps  corrupt  atmosphere,  and 
are  obsessed  by  clegTaded  spirits,  whose  gross  impulses 
urge  them  to  efforts  to  promote  a  union,  at  which  if  left 
free  to  think  and  act  the  natural  instincts  of  the  unfortu- 
nate individuals  would  revolt. 

Spuits  of  depraved  natures  who  have  entered  the  spirit- 
world  vdth.  vengeance  in  their  hearts,  sometimes  through 
the  possession  of  strong  mesmeric  power,  and  favored  by 
opportunity,  are  able  to  wreak  it  on  the  objects  of  their 
ha,tred  in  this  hfe.  They  influence  their  victims  to  the 
commission  of  evil  deeds,  to  the  pursuit  of  evil  courses, 
and  to  the  neglect  of  necessary  duties,  and  frequently  ex- 
cite feehngs  of  animosity  m  the  minds  of  persons  possess- 


34  QUAEEELS    AMONG    LOW    SPIEITS. 

ing  latent  medial  power,  and  of  evil  tendencies,  against  tlie 
objects  of  their  dislike,  and  influence  them  to  injure  them 
morally,  socially,  or  ]Decuniarily. 

Our  prisons  and  insane  asylums  are  infested  with  the 
spirits  of  criminals,  and  insane  persons,  who  in  this  life 
were  on  low  moral  planes,  and  the  inmates  of  these  insti- 
tutions are  often  injuriously  influenced  by  them.  For  this 
reason  insane  persons  should  not  be  herded  in  asylums, 
but  should  be  kept  apart  from  each  other,  and  surrounded 
by  people  of  sound  minds,  and  exemplary  morals,  so  that 
the  atmosphere  in  which  they  exist  should  be  favorable  to 
their  recovery,  and  not  retard  it,  as  under  the  present 
asylum  system. 

Quarrels  are  of  frequent  occurrence  among  spirits  in  the 
earth  and  second  s^Dheres,  and  sometimes  they  resort  to 
force,  and  inflict  sufl'ering  on  each  other,  they  being  nearly 
as  sensible  to  pain  from  violence  as  we  are,  but  no  violence 
beyond  that  of  a  blow  can  be  inflicted  by  one  spirit  on 
another,  provided  the  latter  is  disposed  to  escaj}e,  for  be- 
fore the  blow  can  be  repeated  he  can  by  his  volition  place 
himself  beyond  the  reach  of  the  former,  and  he  can  as 
easily  escape  from  the  combined  attacks  of  a  dozen,  for  ill- 
disposed  spirits  have  not  the  power  to  restrain  the  liberty 
of  others.  At  the  worst,  spirits  have  no  power  to  perma- 
nently injure  one  another. 

Mortals  can  frequently  render  important  service  to  un- 
happy, ignorant  spirits.  In  their  miserable  state  they  can 
be  more  favorably  influenced  by  mortals,  on  planes  higher 
than  their  own,  than  by  higher  spirits,  and  they  frequent- 
ly seek  consolation  and  instruction  through  us.  At  many 
circles  for  spirit  manifestation  the  principal  object  of 
the  directing  intelligences  is  to  benefit  poor,  benighted, 
luihappy  spirits,  the  good  of  mortals,  though  constantly 
kept  in  view,  being  secondary.     It  is  thus  at  the  Banner 


HOW    SOIME    AKE    AFFECTED.  35 

of  LiQ-lit  circles  in  Boston,  and  the  members  of  other  cir- 
cles  should  not  object  to  their  time  being  occupied  for 
this  purpose,  for  frequently  some  of  the  best  fruits  which 
are  gathered  at  circles  are  the  knowledge  gained,  and  the 
deep  and  abiding  impressions  made  on  the  minds  of  the 
members  by  mtnessing  the  contrition,  and  listening  to  the 
humble  confessions,  and  subsequent  exj)ressions  of  thank- 
fuhiess  and  jov,  on  the  part  of  unfortunate  and  unhappy 
s^^uits,  who  through  the  means  thus  furnished  are  enabled 
to  take  the  first  step  in  the  path  of  progression.  It  should 
never  be  forgotten  that  spirits  in  the  flesh  can  fi*equently, 
at  the  cost  of  little  time  and  effort,  be  instrumental  in  con- ' 
ferring  inestimable  benefits  on  unhappy  fellow-beings  who 
have  crossed,  what  to  them  has  been,  the  dark  river,  and 
who  fi'om  the  other  side  now  earnestly  implore  the  counsel 
and  encouragement  which  they  derided,  or  disregarded, 
in  this  life. 

Ignorant,  degraded,  earth-boimd  spirits,  who  in  this  life 
were  blind,  deaf,  lame,  or  otherwise  physically  imperfect, 
are  sometimes  afflicted  ui  like  manner,  for  a  time,  in  the 
next  life,  but  when  they  leave  the  earth-sphere  they  be- 
come freed  fi-om  their  infirmities.  Even  consumptives  of 
this  class  sometimes  are  there  afflicted  with  a  cough,  such 
as  they  suffered  from  in  earth-Hfe. 

Earth-bound  spirits  are  not  prohibited  from  visiting  the 
second  sj)here.  It  is  their  affinity  with  earthly  things  that 
holds  them  to  earth.  Some  of  them,  of  the  better  class, 
do  occasionally  visit  that  sphere,  while  others  are  restrained 
fi'om  doing  so  by  lack  of  knowledge,  or  inclination,  or  from 
fear  that  they  may  be  lost  on  the  way. 

Great  numbers  of  spirits  inhabiting  the  second  sphere 
are  but  shghtly  removed,  in  point  of  character  and  condi- 
tion, fi'om  those  in  the  earth-sphere.  These  spend  much 
of  theu'  time  on  earth,  but  there  are  also  those  who  rarely, 


Q 


6  HOW    GOVERNED. 


and  some  wlio  never  return  to  earth.  Some  of  the  latter 
are  afraid  to  take  the  necessary  and  first  step  of  launching 
out  in  space  ;  others  discredit  the  possibility  of  returning, 
and  others,  still,  are  not  in  any  degree  attracted  here ;  for 
feeling  remorse  for  their  past  conduct  and  striving  to  pro- 
gress they  have  no  desire  to  return  to  the  scenes  of  their 
sin  and  folly.  The  most  depraved  and  violent  spirits  in  the 
second  sphere  are  separated  from  the  others,  and  held 
under  surveillance.  They  literally  are  imprisoned,  and  de- 
prived of  the  liberty  which  other  spirits,  less  guilty,  to  a 
certain  extent  enjoy. 

Spirits  in  the  lov/  spheres  are  governed  by  the  psycho- 
logical power  of  certain  spirits  in  the  heavens  above  them, 
who  are  appointed  to  perform  this  duty.  Spirits  in  these 
spheres  require  a  restraining  and  corrective  authority  to  be 
exercised  over  them,  as  do  the  lovfest  classes  of  society 
with  us.  But  there  they  are  governed  with  wisdom,  jus- 
tice, and  kindness,  and  solely  with  the  view  of  elevating 
them  to  higher  moral  and  intellectual  planes,  and  so  perfect 
are  the  means  employed  that  this  object  is  sooner  or  later 
invariably  attained.  The  keenest  suffering  that  spirits  in 
the  second  sphere  experience  is  imposed  by  higher  spirits 
Avith  tlie  viev/  of  exciting  remorse  and  inducing  rej)entance 
for  their  earthly  niisdeeds.  Their  distress  is  wholly  men- 
tal, and  IS  the  result  of  the  exercise  of  psychological  power 
by  these  higher  spirits,  most  commonly  their  former  guar- 
dians, who  by  this  means  impress  their  minds  with  the 
most  vivid  recollections  of  their  sins  and  crimes,  and  they 
cannot  escape  from  the  contemplation  of  these  until  they 
are  brought  to  view  them  in  their  true  character,  as  odious, 
and  abhorrent,  and  have  atoned  for  them  by  humble  and 
sincere  repentance.  All  spirits  in  the  low  spheres  have 
these  mentors,  or  gniides,  w^ho  are  unseen  by  them,  and 
whose  duty  it  is  to  thus  impress  their  minds,  and  my  in- 


MEMOEY   THE    ACCUSING   ANGEL.  37 

structors  have  no  knowledge  of  any  other  spirits  who  pos- 
sess the  power  of  rendering  themselves  invisible  to  others, 
and  these  spirits  can  exercise  this  power  only  in  relation 
to  their  charges. 

Thus  the  guilty  spirit's  accusing  angel  is  memory,  the 
memory  of  earthly  misdeeds,  but  where  by  remorse  and 
rejjentance  the  stains  of  guilt  have  been  washed  away,  the 
remembrance  of  former  sins  becomes  so  obscui'e  that  an 
effort  of  the  mmd  is  required  to  recall  them,  and  it  rarely 
happens  that  any  inchnation  is  experienced  to  do  this,  and 
in  time  the  memory  of  them  becomes  entirely  obliterated. 
The  minds  of  spirits  receive  and  reflect  the  rays  of  spiritual 
light  as  variously  in  character  and  degree  as  material  ob- 
jects do  those  of  the  sun,  and  in  gross  natures  the  deep 
dark  soil  must  be  j)ierced  and  broken  up  by  the  harrow  of 
remorse,  and  repentance,  before  the  soul  can  blossom  with 
reformation,  and  bear  good  fruit. 

IMissionaries  also  are  sent  to  labor  for  the  reformation  of 
spirits  in  the  second  and  earth  spheres,  some  of  them  being 
those  who  have  suffered  injustice  at  their  hands  in  this 
Hfe,  and  to  whom  is  assigned  the  highest  and  noblest  duty 
that  angels  can  perform,  that  of  striving  to  elevate  those 
who  have  wi^onged  them. 

Progi'ession  is  the  grand  law  of  the  spirit-world,  and  al- 
though some  spirits  may  not  take  the  first  step  in  the  path 
of  progression  for  a  long  time,  even  for  ages,  yet  there  can 
be  no  change  for  the  worse.  Retrogression  is  there  un- 
known. The  sufferings  of  the  less  guilty,  and  these  are  in 
the  majonty,  are  rather  negative  than  positive,  and  these 
generally  advance  to  the  third  heaven  within  a  few  years, 
some  even  sooner.  Many  pei'petrators  of  violent  and  bloody 
deeds  are  not  there  held  to  strict  accountability  and  severely 
punished,  on  account  of  their  failing  to  reahze  the  enormity  .^ 
of  their  offenses  at  the  time  of  their  commission,  they  then 


38  coxDrn(3N  of  the  deuxkaed. 

beinof  Yirtually  insane.  John  "Wilkes  Booth,  the  assassin 
of  Lincohi,  was  insane,  and  obsessed  by  depraved  and  vio- 
lent secession  spirits,  and  remained  but  a  brief  time  in  the 
second  sphere.  So  IMr.  Owen,  who  has  fi'ecjuently  met 
him,  as  well  as  IMr.  Lincoln,  in  spnit  hfe,  assures  me.  He 
is  still  known  by  the  name  he  bore  in  earth  life,  and  little 
or  no  stigma  is  attached  to  it  in  the  estimation  of  advanced 
spirits,  they  having  a  clear  understanding  of  the  fact  that 
he  was  not  morally  accountable  for  the  offense.  Spmts  in 
the  second  sphere,  who  here  have  led  infamous  lives,  when 
they  arise  fi'om  that  sphere  and  enter  the  third  heaven, 
have  permission  to  change  their  names,  and  many  avail 
themselves  of  it,  but  the  change  is  not  compulsory.  All 
who  have  no  reason  to  blush  for  their  names  continue  to 
be  kno^vn  by  them  in  all  the  heavens  that  we  know  any- 
thin  <:>•  of. 

The  immediate  future  of  the  drunkard  in  the  next  hfe 
is,  to  a  great  extent,  dependent  on  his  moral  condition  in 
this,  irrespective  of  the  sin  of  intemperance.  Though  all 
drunkards  are  for  a  time  in  that  hfe  unhaj^py  all  do  not 
fare  alike,  for  while  one,  who  durmg  his  whole  hfe  here 
has  been  de]3raved  and  whom  habits  of  drunkenness  has 
only  further  degraded,  may  find  his  abode  for  many  years 
in  the  earthlj^  sjohere,  another,  with  superior  instincts,  with 
a  moral  record  good  excej)ting  only  as  intemperance  may 
have  clouded  it,  may  after  a  brief  stay  in  the  second  sphere, 
thi'ough  the  cleansing  influence  of  remorse  and  repentance, 
and  the  aid  of  kind  angel  ministration,  become  purged  of 
the.  impuiities  the  curse  has  entailed  and  be  permitted  to 
enter  the  third  heaven.  This  may  all  take  place  before  the 
former  has  experienced  the  slightest  regret  for  his  mis- 
spent hfe,  or  the  slightest  desire  for  imj^rovement.  The 
penalty,  greater  or  less,  though  aggravated  by  intemper- 
ance, is  inflicted  mainly  on  account  of  moral  transgression 


EEPENT^iNCE    IN    THIS    LIFE.  39 

in  otlier  respects.  The  same  principle,  or  rule,  determines 
the  grade  of  punisliment,  vaiied  by  the  circumstances  of 
each  case,  aAvarded  to  suicides  and  ordinary  criminals,  and 
even  to  murderers. 

AMiere  death  is  yet  distant  there  is  no  sin  which  cannot 
be  expiated  in  this  hfe  by  earnest  and  sincere  repentance, 
full  and  ample  reparation  for  wrong  committed,  where  this 
is  possible,  the  performance  of  good  works,  and  permanent 
reformation  of  character.  The  dark  record  of  misdeeds, 
thus  atoned  for  in  this  hfe,  is  obhterated  by  the  recording 
angel.  Many  a  darkened  soul  through  these  means,  vfitli 
angelic  assistance,  has  become  qualified,  while  yet  in  the 
iiesh,  for  an  elevated  position  in  the  next  world,  and  re- 
pentance and"  reformation  commenced  even  in  view  of  the 
aj^proach  of  death,  if  earnest  and  sincere,  will  materially 
assist  the  spirit's  progress  in  the  next  life. 

Good  spuits,  fi'om  their  more  elevated  positions,  do  not 
view  oui'  misdeeds  altogether  as  they  are  viewed  by  the 
world.  They  perceive  in  a  clearer  light,  not  onlj  the  actu- 
ating causes,  but  the  more  remote  pre-natal  conditions  and 
influences  that  originally  determined  our  tendencies  and 
inclinations  ;  they  perceive  the  unfavorable  circumstances 
and  tem]3tations  that  surround  us,  and  the  weakness  of 
our  natures,  and  in  a  pitying  and  compassionate  spirit 
allow  for  our  foUies,  and  to  a  certain  extent  even  for  our 
vices,  and  while  recording  in  theu'  memory  our  good  in- 
tentions, and  deeds,  they  constantly  strive  to  forget  the 
wl'ongs  we  have  committed.  TMiile  sometimes  they  are 
compelled  to  mourn  over  our  misdeeds  they  rejoice  and 
are  made  hapj)y  by  our  good  actions.  They  view  all  our 
acts  vrith  sympathetic  eyes^  in  the  hght  of  charity  and  love. 

Those  of  my  readers  who  are  Spuitualists,  perhaps  have 
found  comjoaratively  httle  thus  far  in  these  pages  to  which 


40  THE    WICKED    HEAVEN. 

tliey  cannot  yield,  at  least,  a  qualified  assent,  but  in  the 
description  v^liich  follows  of  the  character  of  the  second 
sphere,  and  the  heavens  above  it,  they  will  have  both  their 
faith  and  patience  severely  taxed.  With  this  hint  of  the 
trials  in  store  for  my  readers  I  will  proceed. 

In  the  second  sphere  of  the  American  heavens,  or  the 
wicked  heaven,  as  it  is  termed  by  the  higher  spirits,  amid 
the  gloom  and  desolation  which  prevail,  are  to  be  found 
cities,  constituted  of  compact  blocks  of  dwellings,  separated 
by  streets  running  at  right  angles ;  in  these  respects  re- 
sembling our  own  cities.  The  dwellings  present  a  dingy, 
forlorn  appearance,  and  suggest  ideas  of  uncleanness,  and 
discomfort,  and  there  are  certain  quarters  of  g'ome  of  these 
cities  in  which  the  dwellings  resemble  our  tenement  houses, 
and  swarm  vfith  spirits,  as  ignorant  and  degraded  as  the 
majority  of  the  same  classes  are  here.  The  streets  present  a 
rough,  neglected,  and  rej)ulsive  appearance,  and  the  atmos- 
phere is  depressing  and  cheerless.  There  are  a  number 
of  these  cities  in  the  second  sjDhere,  and  they  are  situated 
in  the  midst  of  dreary,  barren  plains,  the  desolation  of 
which  is  but  slightly  relieved  by  a  meagre,  stinted  vegeta- 
tion. The  inhabitants  of  these  cities  are  clothed  in  gar- 
ments which  correspond  to  their  degraded  moral,  and  in- 
tellectual conditions,  and  their  unhappy  countenances 
reflect  the  passions,  vices,  and  ignorance  of  their  natures. 
In  the  lowest  quarters  of  these  cities,  where  are  congTC- 
gated  the  lowest  and  most  degraded  of  the  j)opulation,  as 
above  mentioned,  many  of  the  dwellings  swarm  with  ten- 
ants, individuals  and  famihes  hving  promiscuously  in  con- 
fusion, discord,  and  wretchedness,  and  many  of  them  in 
the  practice  of  the  lowest  vices,  and  grossest  sensuality, 
while  the  air  is  j)olluted  with  profane  and  indecent  lan- 
guage. 


ITS    1^,' HABITANTS.  41 

The  food  in  the  second  sphere,  as  in  all  the  heavens 
ahove  it,  is  fi'uit,  but  it  is  of  inferior  quality,  and  restricted 
to  a  few  simple  varieties,  and  with  water  is  apportioned  to 
each  family  and  person  in  quantities  sufiicient  to  merely 
satisfy  the  cra^dngs  of  hunger,  not  to  fully  gratify  their 
desires. 

There  are  other  quarters  of  these  cities  which  are  su- 
perior to  these,  the  streets  being  cleaner,  and  in  better 
condition,  while  the  dwellings  present  a  neater  appearance, 
both  externally  and  internally,  and  their  tenants  are  not 
compelled  to  herd  together  like  cattle,  as  they  do  in  the 
lowest  quarters,  and  they  present  a  better  appearance  every 
way,  being  better  clothed,  better  fed,  more  decent,  more 
inteUigent,  and  less  immoral.  Here  also  are  to  be  found 
flowers,  of  a  few  varieties,  which  the  inhabitants  cultivate  ; 
but  there  are  no  gardens.  The  majority  of  these  people 
have  been  removed  from  the  lowest  quarters,  having  earned 
this  favor  by  an  amendment  of  their  conduct  and  dispo- 
sition.    The}^  have  taken  the  first  step  in  progression. 

There  are  missionaries,  as  before  stated,  among  these 
peoj)le,  sent  from  the  third  and  fourth  heavens,  who  labor 
vdth.  them  and  strive  to  excite  desires  within  them  for 
something  better,  and  higher,  and  who  do  all  they  can  to 
instmct  and  elevate  them,  and  bring  them  out  of  the  dark- 
ness and  ignorance  which  enshroud  their  mmds,  for  the 
great  majority  of  them  are  extremely  ignorant,  and  the 
greatest  obstacle  to  their  progress  and  elevation  is  the  lack 
of  capacity  to  realize  the  depths  of  their  degradation,  and 
it  is  to  this  point  that  the  labors  of  the  missionaries  are 
principally  directed,  and  while  the  majority  of  them  are, 
for  the  time  being,  insensible  to  their  appeals,  and  teach- 
ings, and  treat  them  with  scorn  and  derision,  on  the  other 
hand  the  labors  of  the  missionaries  are  constantly  rewarded 
with  success  in  bringing  others  into  the  light,  so  that  they 


42  THE    CITIES    AKE   ENCLOSED. 

are  able  to  \iew  themselves  traly,  or  at  least  partially  as 
tliey  are,  and  as  soon  as  their  repentance  has  worked  refor- 
mation in  any  considerable  degree  their  teachers  report 
their  improvement  to  -  the  proper  authorities,  and  permis- 
sion is  accorded  them  to  remove,  first  to  better  quarters 
of  the  cities,  and  then,  if  their  improvement  continues, 
in  due  time  they  are  permitted  to  advance  to  the  third 
heaven. 

All  the  cities  in  the  second  sphere  are  enclosed  by  walls 
which,  strange  to  say,  to  all  spirits  are  impassable,  and 
there  are  gates,  constantly  guarded  by  spirits  who  are 
somewhat  more  advanced  and  intelligent  than  the  mhabi- 
tants,  upon  whom  are  imposed  the  duties  of  wardens,  in 
expiation  of  former  sins.  But  the  inhabitants,  with  some 
exceptions,  are  permitted  to  fi'eely  pass  in  and  oat  of  these 
gates,  and  make  excursions  into  the  surrounding  country, 
but  they  find  httle  enjoyment  in  these  visits  as  all  without 
is  a  barren  wilderness.  The  most  of  them  also  are  at 
liberty  to  visit  the  earth  whenever  they  choose,  and  many 
avail  themselves  of  the  permission,  while  j)erhaps  the  ma- 
jority do  not.  Their  course  to  earth  is  by  an  avenue,  or 
passage  way,  through  the  first  or  Indian  sphere,  but  they 
j)erceive  nothing  of  this  sphere  while  passing  through  it, 
their  view  being  limited  by  the  walls  which  bound  this 
I)assage  way  on  each  side. 

The  country  immediately  surrounding  all  these  cities  in 
the  second  sphere  is  a  mlderness  of  barren  plains,  with 
here  and  there  scrubby  trees  and  stinted,  unsightly  shrub- 
bery, not  a  stream  of  water,  though  j^erhaps  here  and  there 
a  stagnant  pool,  not  an  animal  of  any  species,  it  is  indeed 
the  picture  of  desolation,  a  poverty  stricken  region  in  the 
truest  sense  of  the  words.  A  few  scattered  huts  are  to  be 
seen,  some  of  them  only  partially  elevated  above  the  sur- 
face of  the  ground,  the  occupants  of  which  vegetate,  as 


DESOLATION    OF    THE    COUNTRY.  43 

tlier  formerly  did  on  eartli,  aud  A^iio  continue  tliis  miser- 
able  existence  until,  througli  tlie  efforts  of  kind  and  self- 
sacrificing  missionaiy  spiiits,  aspirations  for  something 
higher  and  better  ai-e  implanted  in  their  minds. 

As  to  the  broad  coiuitry,  more  remote  from  the  cities, 
this  is  of  the  same  general  character,  and  multitudes  of 
poor  unhap23Y  spirits,  in  tattered,  wretched  garments,  are 
scattered  over  it,  some  li\4ng  in  huts,  like  those  just  men- 
tioned, others  in  the  chffs  and  ledges  of  rocks,  and  others 
stiU  in  cavities  in  the  earth.  Multitudes  of  other  discon- 
tented, restless  beings,  mthout  definite  motive  or  object, 
constantly  wander  over  these  desolate  regions,  apj)roaching 
and  ascending  in  succession  every  elevated  spot,  with  vague 
hopes  that  fi-om  its  summit  some  object  or  scene  of  a  more 
cheerful  character  may  meet  their  gaze,  and  each  time  only 
to  meet  vdth  soiTowful  disappointment.  On  every  hand 
are  the  same  sterihty  and  desolation,  while  sombre,  leaden 
clouds  overs]3read  these  dismal  regions  and  effectually  ex- 
clude every  du'ect  ray  of  the  glorious  orb  which,  instinc- 
tively, they  know  is  shedduig  its  mellow  hght  on  hapj^ier 
beings  in  the  heavens  above  them. 

My  instiTictors  have  discovered  six  divisions  of  the  sec- 
ond sphere  ;  the  first  being  the  abode  of  the  ignorant  and 
degraded  ;  the  second,  of  those  who  are  inteUigent  and 
cultivated,  but  whose  natures  are  to  a  considerable  extent 
depraved ;  the  third,  of  those  who  possessing  intelligence 
and  refinement,  and  being  more  inclined  to  do  right  than 
wi'ong,  have  yet  from  weakness  of  character,  and  force  of 
cu'cumstances,  been  led  into  sin  and  crime ;  the  fourth,  a 
division  approj^riated  to  the  spuits  of  ignorant  and  de- 
graded American  XegToes  ;  the  fifth,  the  abode  of  ignorant 
and  bigoted  Eoman  Cathohcs,  and  the  sixth,  the  j^lace  set 
apart  for  bigoted  and  intolerant  Protestants,  and  my  in- 
stiiictors  have  reasons  for  behe^ing  that  there  are  still  other 


44  THE    "hells       of    SWEDENBOEG. 

divisions  wliicli  tliey  liave  not  yet  discovered.  These,  col- 
lectively, constitute  tlie  "  hells  "  of  Swedenborg. 

The  first  of  the  above  mentioned  divisions,  being  the 
abode  of  ignorant  and  degraded  spirits,  we  have  already 
described,  the  second,  the  abode  of  intellectual  and  culti- 
vated but  more  or  less  depraved  spirits,  differs  from  the 
former  in  respect  to  the  dwellings  and  streets  in  the  cities 
being  superior  to  those  in  the  best  quarters  of  the  cities 
of  that  division,  while  the  adjacent  country  is  of  the  same 
desolate  character,  and  in  all  other  repjpects  the  resem- 
blance is  complete.  Here  also  missionaries  from  higher 
heavens  are  to  be  found  striving  to  impress  the  minds 
of  these  morally  darkened  souls  with  a  sense  of  their 
errors,  and  deficiencies,  and  to  cause  them  to  realize  that 
their  dearest  friends  in  the  heavens  above  are  anxiously, 
yet  hopefully,  awaiting  them,  so  that  repentance  and 
reformation  may  follow.  But  their  friends,  unless  it 
be  for  sj)ecial  reasons,  are  not  permitted  to  visit  them, 
this  also  being  true  of  all  other  spirits  in  the  second 
sphere, 

Mr.  Owen  visited  this  division,  as  he  had  previously 
visited  the  first,  and  was  exceedingly  interested  in  what  he 
observed,  and  also  in  what  he  learned  from  his  guide. 
All  the  spirits  he  there  met  were  intelligent,  and  all  evinced 
cultivation  and  refinement  in  greater  or  less  degrees. 
Among  them  were  lawyers,  physicians,  clergymen,  mer- 
chants, etc.,  and  accomplished  and  refined  ladies.  Though 
they  were  all  at  liberty  to  revisit  the  earth  he  was  told  by 
all  he  conversed  with,  about  twenty,  that  they  had  little  or 
no  desire  to  do  so,  and  rarely  or  never  availed  themselves  of 
the  privilege. 

The  general  character  of  the  third  division  of  the  second 
si)here  is  similar  to  that  of  the  second,  and  of  the  fourth  I 
have  learned  nothing  but  the  fact  of  its  existence,  and  its 


EIUOTEI)    tJATIIOLICS.  45 

appropriation  to  degraded  American  Negroes.     Tlie  fifth 
and  sixtli  divisions  we  will  now  proceed  to  describe. 

"  Were  one  world  in  the  universe  a  hell, 
Were  one  soul  in  the  universe  a  fiend, 
Damned  hopelessly  to  everlasting  pain, 
'Twould  be  the  torturing  atom  that  inflames 
The  vision.     Every  world  and  every  sphere 
"Would  weep  in  woful  sympathy  with  wo. 
The  consciousness  of  all  created  life 

.  Would  yearn  and  grieve  and  anguish.     God  Himself, 
AMio,  in  the  universal  consciousness 
Dwells  throned  and  radiant,'  would  receive  no  joy. 
But  only  grief,  from  His  fair  universe." — Harris. 

CONDITION  OF  BIGOTED  SECTAEIANS. 

Sects  are  nominally  perpetuated  in  the  American  heavens 
tip  to  the  seventh,  but  not  the  sectarian  spirit,  and  all  the 
principal  sects,  excepting  the  Roman  Cathohc,  have  their 
churches  in  those  heavens,  but  there  are  no  distinctively 
Eoman  Catholic  churches  above  the  third.  In  the  heavens 
of  Catholic  countries  there  are  Cathohc  churches  in  all  the 
heavens  but  the  lowest,  at  least  up  to  the  eighth.  Of  those 
Cathohcs  who  go  to  the  American  heavens  the  more  liberal, 
inteUigent,  and  moral  at  once  enter  the  thml,  while  the 
bigoted  and  ignorant  go  to  the  second  sphere,  the  same  as 
Protestants  on  the  same  low  planes,  but  they  do  not  asso- 
ciate in  either  of  these  heavens  with  the  latter,  for  in  the 
second  sphere  there  is  a  city  and  district  of  country  sur- 
rounding it  knov/n  as  Purgatory,  and  all  bigoted  or  other- 
wise wicked  Catholics  who  enter  that  sphere  go  to  this 
place.  There  are  priests  among  them,  as  there  are  Protes- 
tant clerg-jTnen  among  others  in  the  same  sphere. 

The  majority  of  these,  upon  their  ariival,  are  assigned 
to  the  lowest  quarters  of  the  city,  where  they  remain  until 


46  PUKGATORY. 

tlirougli  the  labors  of  missionaries  from  higher  heavens 
they  become  in  some  degree  divested  of  their  intolerance, 
and  bigotry,  and  in  other  respects  have  improved,  when 
they  are  j)ermitted  to  remove  to  better  quarters  of  the  city, 
and  here  they  remain  until  iliej  have  become  completely 
purged  of  their  religious  intolerance,  when  they  are  per- 
mitted to  go  either  to  the  heavens  of  their  native  countries, 
if  they  are  foreigners,  or  enter  the  third  of  the  American 
heavens,  if  they  prefer  to  do  so.  All  bigoted  Catholics, 
foreign  and  native,  who  die  in  this  country  go  to  this  pur- 
gatory in  the  second  sphere,  and  those  among  them  who 
from  there  enter  the  third  American  heaven,  together  with 
those  who  directly  enter  it  after  death,  advance  no  higher 
until  their  belief  in  the  dogmas,  rites,  and  ceremonies  of 
their  Chui'ch  has  become  nearly  or  quite  eradicated  from 
their  minds.  In  the  purgatory  of  the  second  sphere  are 
to  be  found  churches,  chapels,  monasteries,  and  monastic 
orders,  nunneries,  etc.,  as  here,  and  the  adoration  of  the  Vir- 
gin and  a  host  of  saints,  together  with  the  observance  of 
fasting  and  holy-days  are  there  perpetuated.  Papal  infalli- 
bility, the  efficacy  of  mass  and  confession,  are  as  essentially 
dogmas  there  as  here.  In  the  third  American  heaven 
Catholic  churches  and  chapels  also  are  to  be  found  but  no 
monasteries,  nor  nunneries,  and  most  of  the  external  forms 
of  Catholic  worship  are  there  perpetuated,  but  their  observ- 
ance is,  by  the  majority,  more  nominal  than  real,  reason 
having  obtained  the  ascendency  over  blind  faith.  They  are 
learning  that  dogmas  and  creeds  are  onty  bars  to  progression. 
In  the  Irish  heavens  the  first,  second,  and  third,  are  low, 
and  there  are  no  Roman  Catholic  churches  in  either  of 
them,  but  when  spirits  in  these  spheres  advance  to  the 
foui'th,  or  first  real  heaven,  they  there  find  churches,  and 
rajDidly  progress,  and  in  the  heavens  above  the  fourth,  are 
also  to  be  fomid  churches,  but  they  are  divested  of  their 


BIGOTED    PEOTESTANTS.  47 

idolatrous  emblems  and  practices,  and  the  worship  is  no 
longer  to  the  virgin,  and  saints,  but  to  God,  and  both 
priests  and  people  are  hberal  and  intelligent. 

Bigoted  and  intolerant  Protestants  when  they  enter  the 
spirit-world  are  also  imprisoned  in  the  second,  sphere,  and 
under  similar  conditions,  and  the  means  taken  to  enlighten 
them  and  to  eradicate  from  their  minds  bigotry,  and  intol- 
erance, are  also  similar.  In  that  sphere  are  multitudes  of 
this  class,  all  the  orthodox  Protestant  sects  being  liberally 
represented.  These  are  associated  in  societies  and  con- 
duct their  religious  meetino-s  under  the  same  forms,  and  in 
the  same  spiiit,  and  with  'the  same  zeal  as  when  here. 
They  are  there  as  anxious  to  make  converts  and  as  thor- 
oughly  convinced  that  they,  exclusively,  are  in  possession 
of  the  truth,  and  that  all  others  are  in  error  as  ever  they 
were,  and  as  here,  they  are  yet  proscriptive  and  intolerant 
of  those  who  are  unable  to  view  religion  and  morality  in 
the  light  that  they  do. 

Many  of  these  continue  to  cherish  their  erroneous  ideas 
and  to  exhibit  an  un-Christian  spirit  for  long  periods  of 
time,  and  with  some,  even  scores  of  years  may  elapse  be- 
fore their  eyes  become  opened  to  the  truth.  They  con- 
tinue to  believe  that  all  are  deluded  but  themselves.  They 
are  ever  searching  for  the  anthropomorj^hic  Jehovah,  and 
theii'  personal  Saviour,  and  impatient,  even  indignant,  when 
higher  and  wiser  spirits  endeavor  to  enhghten  their  minds 
on  the  subject.  Some  of  these  are  existing  in  constant 
dread  of  the  approaching  judgment  day,  when  they  may 
be  consigned  to  eternal  misery,  and  with  heaven  within 
their  grasp  they  are  sorrowful  and  wretched. 

"  They  know  not  what  they  do,  they  think  the  thought 
Some  narrow  bigot  has  imparted  them ; 
All  their  essential  nature  lies  asleep  ; 
The  real  man  is  dormant  as  the  grave." 


48  TKUTII    COMES    TO   ALL. 

Principally  tlirougli  the  labors  of  angelic  missionaries 
these  unfortmiates  in  time  are  brought  to  the  light,  and 
'  advance  to  the  third  heaven,  and  there  remain  until  they 
become  entirely  divested  of  the  remains  of  the  sectarian 
spirit,  for  above  the  third  heaven  this  spirit  is  unknown,  and 
denominational  distinctions,  although  among  Protestants 
still  j^reserved,  lose  all  their  significance.  Eabid  sectari- 
anism is  known  only  on  earth  and  in  the  second  sphere. 
Ill  the  seventh  heaven  the  remaining  mere  shadow  of  secta- 
rianism disapj^ears,  and  S23irits  once  bigoted  and  enslaved 
by  the  chains  of  rehgious  error  are  there  emancipated  and 
free. 

' '  Religion  then  shall  be 
Another  name  for  Love. " 

The  foregoing  remarks  apply  equally  to  the  bigoted  and 
intolerant  clergyman  and  those  of  his  flock  whoin  he  may 
have  led  astray  by  his  false  teachings,  but  in  the  third  of 
the  Eiighsh  heavens  there  is  a  locality  to  which  bigoted 
clergymen  and  other  educated  bigots  are  assigned.  They 
enter  and  are  compelled  to  remain  there  until  their  minds 
become  more  enlightened,  when  they  are  at  liberty  to 
mingle  with  more  intelligent  and  liberal  spirits.  The  ob- 
ject in  compelling  them  to  thus  associate  is,  that  they  may 
gradually  be  brought  to  perceive  how  absurd  and  false  the 
narrow  opinions  of  their  associates  are,  and  through  this 
means,  and  in  this  hght,  be  led  to  dispassionately  view  and 
weigh  their  own  narrow  and  prejudiced  opinions,  and  re- 
nounce them. 


CHAPTEE  IV. 


THE    HIGHER    HEAVENS. 


The  Indian  Heavens.     Description  of  the  Higher  Heavens,     The 
Negro  Heavens.     Mr.  Owen's  visit  to  the  Higher  Heavens. 


THE   INDL.\N    HEAVENS. 

"  All  are  but  parts  of  one  stupendous  whole, 
Whose  body  nature  is,  and  God  the  soul." 

In  numerical  order,  the  first,  or  Indian  heaven,  is  low, 
but  in  respect  to  character  it  is  entitled  to  rank  among  the 
higher  heavens,  and  this  chapter  is  therefore  the  appro- 
priate place  for  a  brief  description  of  that  heaven, 

"  Where  no  white  man  robs  the  Indian ; 
Where  no  more  the  sun  grows  dim  ; 
Where  the  warriors  and  the  maidens 
Chant  no  more  the  funeral  hymn. 

"  In  that  land  where  stars  are  brighter, 
Where  the  moonbeams  softly  fall, 
And  the  great  Manito's  blessing 
Like  the  sunlight  's  over  all. 

"  There  the  Indian  holds  his  council, 
And  his  thoughts  grow  great  and  strong, 
As  the  angels  teach  forgiveness 
For  the  white  man's  fearful  wrong. 
3 


50  CONDITION    OF   THE    INDIANS. 

"  Here  his  tomahawk  and  arrows 

Rest  beneath  your  wigwams  grand  ;         ^ 
There  his  soul  drinks  in  the  wisdom 
Of  the  glorious  spirit-land." — ■Spirit. 

That  portion  of  tlie  first  sphere  which  overspreads  North 
America  is  exclusively  appropriated  to  the  Indian  tribes, 
and  its  scenery,  and  general  appearance,  are  as  natural 
as  those  of  earth,  and  far  more  beautiful,  its  surface  be- 
ing diversified  with  grand  forests,  hills,  and  even  moun- 
tains, extensive  plains,  over  which  roam  herds  of  deer, 
charming  meadows,  and  lovely  lakes,  and  rivers.  The  In- 
dian there  lives  in  his  wigwam  with  his  squaw  and  papooses, 
has  his  canoe,  bow  and  arrows,  his  horse  and  dog,  and 
chases  the  deer,  as  he  formerly  did  here,  the  only  difference 
being,  that,  whereas  when  here  he  hunted  from  necessity, 
there  he  engages  in  the  chase  for  sport,  with  no  intention 
of  destroying  life,  and  without  the  ability  to  do  so  if  he 
were  so  disposed. 

Most  of  the  tribes  there  live  in  close  proximity  to  each 
other,  the  distance  between  some  of  them  not  being  more 
than  half  a  mile.  Each  tribe  has  its  own  forests,  lakes, 
and  streams,  and  those  of  one  tribe  connect  with  those  of 
another,  so  that  in  their  canoes  they  are  able  to  pass  readily 
into  each  other's  territory,  while  the  forests  being  easily 
traversed,  they  can  accomplish  the  same  purpose  through 
them.  The  most  perfect  peace  and  harmony  exist  between 
them,  and  they  constantly  visit  and  associate,  and  fre- 
quently engage  in  friendly  contests  on  the  lakes  and 
streams  in  racing  their  canoes,  and  on  land  in  shooting 
arrows  at  marks,  running,  leaping,  and  in  racing  their 
horses. 

Social  intercourse,  of  which  such  amusements  are  con- 
spicuous features,  together  with  the  consciousness  of  being 
forever  released  from  the  cares  and  anxieties  arising  from 


THEIR    OJiDKR    OF    rROGRKSSION".  51 

the  white  man's  oppression  and  wrong,  and  the  earthlj'' 
struggle  for  existence,  constitute  the  Indian's  chief  sources 
of  hajjpiness  in  this,  his  first  heaven.  His  tastes  yet  re- 
main simple, 

"  To  be,  couteuts  bis  natural  desire, 

He  asks  no  angel's  wiug.  no  seraph's  fire, 
But  thinks,  admitted  to  that  equal  sky, 
His  faithful  dog  shall  bear  him  company." 

In  advancing  to  higher  heavens  his  desires  multipl}"  in 
the  ratio  that  his  knowledge  increases. 

But  it  must  not  be  supposed  that  the  homes  of  the  In- 
dians embrace  all  of  the  first  zone,  or  sphere,  for  this  ex- 
tends equall}^  over  Eui'ope,  Asia,  Africa,  Australia,  etc., 
constituting  spiritual  continents  corresponding  to  those  of 
eai'th,  separated  by  spiritual  oceans,  and  seas,  these  also 
coiTesponding  to  the  earthly  Atlantic,  Pacific,  and  Indian 
oceans,  and  Mediterranean,  Baltic,  Black,  etc.,  seas. 

There  is  no  low  sphere,  or  "wicked  lieaA^en,"  for  the  In- 
dians, and  Mr.  Owen  ascertained  that  they  advance,  not 
successively  fi'om  heaven  to  heaven  as  we  do,  but  two 
heavens  at  a  time,  from  the  first  up  to  the  thirteenth,  and 
fi'om  thence,  successive^,  to  the  foui'teenth,  fifteenth,  and 
sixteenth,  where  they  become  blended  with  the  whites. 
Mr.  Owen  risited  theu*  heavens  from  the  first  to  the  ninth. 
They  were  all  perfectly  natural,  and  the  latter  w^as  w^on- 
drously  beautiful  and  attractive,  and  he  admii'ed  it  equally 
"VNith  the  highest  American  heaven  he  had  seen.  The  scen- 
ery, including  landscapes,  lakes,  and  rivers,  is  enchanting. 
The  wig-Avams  and  canoes  of  the  Indians,  apparently,  were 
constructed  of  bark,  ornamentally  fashioned,  and  beauti- 
fiilly  caiwed,  and  their  garments  and  trappings  were 
strikingly  elegant  and  imj)osing.  Personally  they  were 
dignified  and  noble,  and  every  lineament  of  their  features 


52  THE    THIRD    HEAVEN. 

reflected  the  native  truthfulness  of  their  characters.  Their 
comj^lexions  in  this  heaven  were  much  Hghter  in  color 
than  those  of  Indians  here. 

Mr.  Owen  there  met  and  conversed  with  Ked  Jacket, 
formerly  chief  of  the  Senecas,  who  died  in  1830.  Mr. 
Owen  was  told  by  his  guide  that  the  two  Indians  who  con- 
trol our  medium  will  ascend  dii'ectly  to  that  heaven  when 
their  mission  with  him  is  ended. 

DESCEIPTION    OF    THE   HIGHEE   HEAVENS. 

In  the  third  American  heaven  the  cities  are  not  alto- 
gether without  attractions,  the  dwellings,  in  apj^earance, 
being  equal  to  the  average  of  buildings  in  earthly  cities, 
the  streets  smooth,  and  clean,  flowers,  trees,  shrubbery, 
etc.,  are  j)lentiful,  and  the  air  is  clear  and  exhilaratmg. 
Fruits,  of  good  quality,  in  considerable  variety  are  ob- 
tainable in  abundance.  The  adjacent  country  also  is  mod- 
erately attractive.  There  are  many  small  farms  in  this 
heaven,  with  suitable  dwellings,  and  outhouses,  the  former 
being  furnished  with  all  the  implements  necessary  to  their 
cultivation,  as  Avell  as  with  horses  and  wagons,  cows,  dogs, 
and  fowls,  and  numerous  roads  intersect  the  country,  and 
lakes  and  rivers  are  scattered  over  it.  Spirits  in  the  third 
heaven,  in  a  general  sense,  are  in  harmony  with  each  other, 
and  their  surroundings,  but  many  of  their  desires  are  not 
gratified,  nor  can  they  be  until  they  have  advanced  to  the 
fourth  heaven. 

Ill  the  cities  of  the  fourth  heaven  there  are  no  compact 
blocks  of  buildings,  and  comparatively  few  intersecting 
streets.  The  houses,  or  homes  as  they  are  termed,  are 
situated  on  spacious  and  beautiful  avenues,  which  at  long 
distances,  of  a  half  mile  or  more,  are  intersected  by  roads, 
or   drives,    equally   tasteful   and   beautiful.      Horses   and 


THE    FOUirrn    HEAVEN.  53 

A'eliicles  are  confined  to  these  roads,  and  the  latter,  in  their 
general  characteristics,  resemble  our  own  finest  drives, 
only  they  are  perfect  in  all  that  possibly  can  be  conceived 
as  necessar}"  to  perfection.  The  avenues  upon  which  the 
homes  are  situated,  are  not  bounded  by  sidewalks,  but 
their  entire  area  is  a  surface  of  silken  moss,  of  a  beautiful 
mellow  green  hue,  and  soft  and  luxurious  to  the  tread  as 
the  richest  carpet. 

The  dwellings  in  this  heaven  are  situated  in  the  midst 
of  spacious  plots  of  ground,  in  which  gardens  are  conspic- 
uous, and  in  which  are  always  blooming  flowers  of  every 
species  that  is  knoT\T.i  on  earth,  together  with  many  varieties 
that  are  here  unknown.  Shrubbery,  vines,  trees,  and  grass 
combine  with  the  flowers  to  render  perfect  the  surround- 
ings of  these  beautiful,  yet  natural  sj)irit  homes.  The  dwel- 
lings in  these  parts  of  the  heaven  are  all  of  the  same 
general  style,  and  proj)ortions,  but  their  colors  vary  ac- 
cording to  the  tastes  of  the  occupants.  They  are  con- 
structed entirely  of  wood,  and  every  dwelhng  is  artistically 
and  elegantly  caiwed,  and  otherwise  ornamented,  and  all 
have  porticoes  and  observatories.  These  mansions  will  be 
more  fully  described  in  the  next  chapter. 

The  foregoing  is  a  brief  description  of  those  parts  of  the 
foui'th  heaven  which  in  their  general  character  most  nearly 
resemble  cities,  but  other  parts,  and  these  by  far  the  most 
extensive,  present  very  different,  though  equally  charming 
aspects,  and  have  few  features  in  common  with  cities,  but 
on  the  contrary  all  the  best  characteristics  of  the  country. 
Here  the  dwellings  are  ecjually  elegant  and  commodious, 
but  of  various  styles,  perfectly  adapted  to  and  in  harmony 
with  the  picturesque  and  beautiful  scenery.  Lakes,  rivers, 
and  smaller  streams  abound,  and  the  names  of  some  of 
these  are  borrowed  from  our  own  lakes,  and  rivers  ;  for 
instance,  a  certain  lake  is  known  as  Lake  Chamj^lain,  a 


64:  THE   PREVAILING    CONDITIONS. 

certain  river  as  tlie  Hudson,  etc.     But  there  are  no  locali- 
ties, bearing  the  nanies  of  any  of  our  cities,  or  towns. 

To  all  sj)irits  the  heavens  above  them  are  as  invisible  as 
the}^  are  to  us.  The  celestial  vault  appears  to  them  as  it 
does  to  us,  only  more  glorious  and  grand.  For  them  also 
our  sun  and  moon  rise,  and  set,  the  former  casting  its 
shadow,  and  the  latter  presenting  its  different  phases  as 
we  perceive  them.  The  same  stars  that  gem  our  heavens 
are  brilliant  ui  theirs.  The  scope  of  vision  of  spirits  in 
the  heavens  is  more  extensive  than  ours  in  our  atmosjDhere, 
while  in  our  atmosphere  the  range  of  vision  of  most  of  them 
is  exceedingly  limited.  The  temperature  of  the  heavens, 
excepting  those  regions  directly  above  the  equator,  where 
it  is  considerably  warmer,  and  those  in  the  extreme  north 
and  south,  where  it  is  correspondingly  colder,  is  delightful, 
and  unvarying.  Storms  and  boisterous  winds  are  un- 
known, but  from  fleecy  clouds  frequently  descend  gentle 
showers,  and  balmy,  delicious  breezes  ever  prevail.  In  the 
lower  heavens,  as  said  above,  there  are  various  climates. 
The  heavens  nearest  the  polar  regions  of  the  earth  are  the 
heavens  of  the  inhabitants  of  those  regions.  The  first  in 
numerical  order  of  these  is  cold,  with  snow  and  ice,  and 
they  have  their  reindeer,  dogs  and  sledges,  and  are  clothed 
in  what  resemble  furs.  The  natives  of  the  tropics,  on  the 
other  hand,  in  their  lower  heavens  enjoy  a  tropical  chmate, 
but  in  these  extreme  heavens  the  chmate  is  shorn  of  its 
severity,  it  being  only  sufficiently  cold  or  warm  to  render 
it  agreeable  to  the  inhabitants.  Each  successive  heaven  in 
the  ascending  order  of  the  natives  of  the  Arctic  regions,  and 
of  the  tropics  approximates  nearer  in  temperature  and 
general  character  to  our  own,  until,  in  the  higher  heavens 
the  temperature  becomes  like  that  of  our  heavens,  and  the 
scenery,  homes,  etc.,  assume  an  appearance  similar  to  that 
in  our  heavens. 


NATION ALrni:s  exist.  55 

Tlic  jDredominant  features  of  all  countries  as  well  as  the 
cliaracteristics  of  their  inhabitants  are  represented  in  the 
different  heavens.  There  the  Chinese  have  their  temples 
and  pagodas,  canals  and  bridges ;  the  Venetians  their 
cities  of  the  sea,  every  street  of  which  is  a  crystal  river, 
ahve  and  gay  with  beautiful  gondolas.  The  Ai'abs  there 
on  steeds  fleet  as  the  wind,  course  deserts  of  glistening 
sand.  The  African  negro  there  finds  the  counterpart  of 
his  native  jungle,  and  a  modified  tropical  climate,  while 
the  native  of  the  In-j^jcrborean  regions,  as  before  said,  in  his 
sledge,  drawn  by  reindeer,  or  dogs,  glides  over  snow,  as 
real,  and  pure,  and  beautiful'  as  that  to  which  he  had  been 
accustomed  in  his  native  land. 

National  distinctions  and  boundaries  exist  in  the  heavens, 
as  here.  There  are  American,  Enghsh,  French,  German,  etc., 
divisions,  or  territories  in  each  zone,  these  being  situated  in 
relation  to  each  other  as  the  respective  countries  are  here, 
but  it  is  only  in  the  first  sphere,  or  zone,  that  the  conti- 
nents are  separated  by  oceans,  and  seas,  those  in  the 
heavens  above  that,  being  merely  geographical  divisions  of 
the  expanded  surface  of  those  heavens.  Each  country  is 
in  gTeater  or  less  degree  marked  by  the  characteristics  of 
the  country  on  earth  of  which  it  is  a  counterpart,  the  same 
language  being  spoken,  the  same  personal  habits  and  tastes 
j^revaihng,  and  even  the  same  styles  of  architecture  are  in 
the  main  reproduced.  LangTiage  there,  in  its  character 
and  uses,  is  precise^  what  it  is  here.  An  American  there 
is  still  an  American,  an  Enghshman  an  Englishman,  a 
German  a  Gennan,  an  Indian  an  Indian,  and  a  Negro  is 
there  still  a  negTO,  although  Indians  and  Negi'oes,  as  they 
progress,  constantly  assimilate  in  appearance  and  charac- 
ter to  the  white  race. 

The  first  of  the  European  heavens,  and  presumably  of  all 
heavens  excepting  the  American,  is  the  lowest,  or  wicked 


56  THE    HEAVENS    COMPARED. 

sphere,  and  is  on  a  plane  witli  the  second  of  the  American 
heavens,  while  the  second  sphere  of  those  heavens  is  superior 
to  the  first.  In  the  first  and  second  of  the  British  heavens 
there  is  no  spiritual  England,  Scotland,  Wales,  or  Ireland, 
but  all  these  exist  in  the  heavens  above  these,  where  there 
are  also  spiritual  Londons,  Edinburghs,  Dublins,  etc.,  to- 
gether with  smaller  tovTis,  and  villages.  The  first  six  of 
most  of  the  European  heavens  are  superior  in  character  to 
the  corresponding  American  heavens,  especially  in  works 
of  art,  but  in  the  heavens  immediately  above  these  the  su- 
periority is  less  marked,  and  in  still  higher  heavens  the 
American  are  in  all  respects  equal  to  the  European  heav- 
ens, if  not  superior  to  them.  In  the  lower  heavens,  as  a 
rule,  Americans  progress  as  much  m  three  or  four  years 
as  the  majority  of  Europeans  do  in  ten.  This  is  attribut- 
able to  our  active,  energetic,  and  inquisitive  natures,  but 
in  the  higher  heavens  these  advantages  are  lost. 

Americans  who  retain  their  love  of  their  native  countrv, 
dying  abroad,  go  to  the  American  heavens.  Foreigners, 
(excej^ting  certain  Roman  Cathohcs,  as  elsewhere  ex]3lained,) 
dying  in  America,  whose  attachment  to  their  native  coun- 
try exceeds  that  which  they  feel  for  this,  go  to  the  heavens 
of  their  o^vn  country,  otherwise  they  go  to  the  American 
heavens.  Americans  and  foreigners  who  have  intermarried 
are  permitted  to  go  either  to  the  American  or  foreign 
heavens,  as  they  prefer.  Sometimes  such  parties  are  at- 
tracted to  their  resj)ective  relatives,  and  they  accordingly 
make  their  homes  with  them,  but  if  they  still  are  attracted 
to  each  other  they  are  at  liberty  to  visit,  and  have  every 
facility  for  visiting  and  enjoying  each  other's  society  as 
freely  as  they  desire,  and  in  time  they  become  permanently 
reunited. 


COXDITIOX    OF   NEGKO    SriKITS.  57 


THE   NEGRO    HEAVENS. 

In  certain  of  the  American  lieavens  there  are  districts,  or 
locahties,  set  aj^art  for  American  Negroes.  The  latter  are 
subject  to  the  laws  of  progression,  as  all  others  are.  As 
they  advance  they  assume  a  lighter  color.  As  a  rule,  mu- 
lattoes,  in  whom  the  negro  blood  predominates  go  to  the 
negro  heavens,  while  others,  in  w^hom  that  of  the  white  race 
j)redominates,  share  w^ith  the  latter  their  heavens,  and  des- 
tiny.    But  in  truth  tlie  destmy  of  both  races  is  the  same. 

]\Ii\  Owen  and  my  father,  at  my  request,  made  American 
negTO  spirits  and  their  heavens  a  subject  of  special  investi- 
gation, and  with  this  object  in  view"  repeatedly  visited  them. 
They  found  the  majority  of  the  negro  S23irits,  in  their  low- 
est sjDhere,  to  be  as  black  as  the  majority  of  our  negroes, 
but  in  their  third  heaven  they  were  considerably  lighter  in 
color,  with  modified  and  improved  features,  but  still  the 
ma;;ority  of  them  were  unmistakably  negroes.  Their  lowest 
sphere  is  the  second,  the  same  as  that  of  the  whites,  they 
being  allotted  a  division  of  it,  while  the  most  degraded 
among  them  are  earth-bound,  and  associate  with  white 
spii'its  on  that  plane.  From  the  second  sphere  they  ad- 
vance to  the  third,  but  after  that  their  progress  is  not  like 
oui'S  from  heaven  to  heaven  in  numerical  order,  but  like 
that  of  the  American  Indians,  ascending  from  the  third  to 
the  fifth,  thence  to  the  seventh,  and  thus  upwards  by 
alternate  heavens  until  they  reach  the  thirteenth,  from 
whence  they  advance  successively  to  the  fourteenth,  fif- 
teenth, and  sixteenth,  and  there  all  distinctions  between 
them  and  white  spirits  cease  to  exist,  they  then  having 
become  as  white,  beautiful,  refined,  and  intellectual  as 
these.  Many  of  them  m  the  heavens  above  the  third  are 
permitted  to  visit  the  heavens  of  the  whites  on  the  same 
3* 


58  MEANS    OF    COMMUNICATION. 

planes.  Those  among  them  who  formerly  were  slaves,  or 
servants,  to  white  people,  go,  like  all  others  of  their  race, 
to  their  own  heavens,  but  when  they  have  advanced  above 
the  third  heaven  they  are  permitted,  if  they  desire  to  do 
so,  and  their  former  masters  or  employers  also  desire  it,  to 
join  the  latter  and  resume  their  former  relations  in  a  modi- 
fied form  and  advance  with  them. 


ME.  Owen's  visit  to  the  higher  heavens. 

Spirits  pass  from  one  heaven  to  another  by  means  of 
capacious  avenues,  or  causeways,  which  extend  from  each 
heaven  to  the  next  above.  These  afford  means  of  commu- 
nication between  the  different  heavens,  and  are  usually 
thronged  with  spirits,  ascending  and  descending,  and  upon 
which  also  horses  and  vehicles  pass  upwards  and  down- 
wards. The  upper  extremities  of  these  avenues  penetrate 
the  foundational,  or  basic  structure,  of  the  heavens,  that 
which  corresponds  to  our  terra  Jirma,  but  which  there  is 
quite  limited  in  thickness,  and  then  open  upon  the  upper 
surface,  where  gates  are  j^laced  which  are  constantly  guard- 
ed by  spirit-wardens.  There  are  many  of  these  avenues  of 
communication  connecting  each  heaven  with  the  next  above 
and  below  it.  Those  extending  from  the  second  heaven  to 
the  third  are  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles  in  length, 
while  the  length  of  those  in  the  heavens  above  the  third 
does  not  exceed  seventy-five  miles.  Mr.  Owen  said  he 
could  pass  over  the  former  with  his  horses  in  an  hour. 

Li  visiting  another  heaven  for  the  first  time  a  guide  ac- 
companies the  visitor,  but  a  pass  is  alwa3^s  required,  and 
this  must  be  shown  at  every  gate  by  which  he  enters  or 
leaves.  These  passes  are  usually  obtained  from  the  war- 
dens of  their  own  heavens,  they  having  permission  to  issue 
certain  numbers  daily.     The  passes  for  visiting  the  second 


A   DISTIXGUISIIED    VISITOK.  50 

and  Iiuiian  spheres  are  obtained  from  the  wardens  at  the 
g'ates  of  the  third  heaven,  and  all  persons  whose  object  in 
visiting  those  spheres  is  commendable  can  obtain  them, 
but  they  are  i:)rohibited  from  visiting  friends  who  may  be 
in  the  second  sphere,  as  no  communication  is  ordinarily 
permitted  with  these. 

October  27,  1877 — quoting  from  my  note-book — Mr. 
Owen  informed  me  that  a  few  days  before,  while  seated  in 
the  portico  of  his  mansion,  in  the  fourth  heaven,  a  stranger, 
of  noble  and  commanding  presence,  approached  and  ad- 
di'essing  him  inquired  if  he  was  Robert  Dale  Owen.  Upon 
his  rephdng  in  the  affirmative,  and  inviting  the  stranger  to 
be  seated,  the  latter  stated  that  his  home  was  in  the  thirty- 
second  heaven,  and  the  object  of  his  visit  was  to  meet  Mr. 
Owen,  but  he  was  reticent  as  to  his  motives  beyond  this, 
and  ]\Ii'.  Owen  thought  he  had  some  special  object  in  view 
which  he  was  not  disposed  to  make  known.  In  the  course 
of  conversation  ]Mi\  Owen  alluded  to  his  frequent  visits  to 
earth,  and  his  intercourse  with  me,  through  our  medium, 
and  the  visitor  immediately  became  interested  in  the  sub- 
ject, and  asked  many  questions  in  relation  to  it,  and  ex- 
pressed his  astonishment  at  the  possibility  of  JVIr.  Owen 
being  able  to  thus  communicate  with  mortals. 

His-  conversation  and  bearing  greatly  impressed  Mr. 
Owen,  evincing  as  they  did  higher  degrees  of  intellectuality, 
cultui'e,  and  refinement,  than  he  had  ever  before  knov^^n 
any  individual  to  possess.  He  informed  him  that  in  earth- 
life  he  had  been  an  Englishman,  and  had  been  in  sjoirit- 
life  more  than  a  century.  He  said  that  there  were  heavens 
above  his  own,  the  thirty-second,  and  that  each  successive 
heaven  was  more  beautiful  than  the  one  below.  Mr.  Owen 
remarked  to  me  that  this  was  inconceivable  by  him,  for 
although  he  knew  that  the  heavens  up  to  the  sixth,  this 


60  HIS   BRIEF    HISTORY. 

being  the  highest  he  had  then  visited,  increased  in  beauty, 
yet  he  could  not  imagine  how  those  above  that  could  excel 
it.     He  promised  to  again  visit  Mr.  Owen  in  a  few  days. 

Three  days  after  this  the  same  spirit  again  visited  Mr. 
Owen,  and  inquired  if  he  was  disposed  to  accept  a  mission. 
He  did  not  inform  the  latter  of  the  nature  of  the  proposed 
work,  but  IVIr.  Owen  declined  to  undei-take  it,  stating  that 
he  ah*eady  v/as  engaged  in  assisting  me  in  mine. 

From  this  time  the  visits  of  this  spirit  to  Mr.  Owen  were 
fi^equent  and  regular,  averaging  about  three  times  a  week, 
and  at  one  of  these  he  informed  Mr.  Owen  that  in  earth- 
life  he  bore  the  name  of  Charles  Stevens,  and  bears  it  now 
in  spirit-life.  He  had  no  distinct  remembrance  of  the 
period  of  time  he  had  been  in  the  spirit-world,  but  beheved 
it  to  be  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  years.  He  remem- 
bered that  he  was  born  in  England,  and  at  an  early  age 
emigrated  to  America,  married  an  American  lady,  became 
identified  with  his  adopted  country,  and  when  he  passed 
awav  he  entered  the  American  heavens,  w^here  he  has 
always  remained  and  is  now  living  with  his  wife  and 
two  daughters.  He  said  he  was  not  permitted  to  visit 
heavens  lower  than  his  own  apparelled  as  he  usually  is  in 
his  own  heaven,  but  previous  to  descending  is  obliged  to 
robe  himself  Hke  the  spirits  in  the  heavens  he  proposes 
to  visit,  and  consequently  he  does  not  then  appear  in  the 
resplendence  that  characterizes  him,  and  all  others,  in  his 
heaven. 

Mr.  Ovv^en  invited  this  sj)irit,  Mr.  Stevens,  to  accompany 
him  to  earth  to  witness  the  method  of  communicating 
through  our  medium,  and  he  re|)lied  that  it  would  afford 
him  great  pleasure  to  do  so,  and  he  would  request  the 
necessary  permission.  The  day  following  he  returned, 
according  to  his  promise,  and  to  Mr.  Owen's  disappoint- 
ment stated  that  his  request  had  been  denied,  and  the  in- 


THE    NUMBER    OF    THE    HEAVENS.  01 

terdictioii  Mgaiust  liis  descending'  below  the  fourth  heaven 
remfiiued  m  force. 

He  knows  of  eight  heavens  above  his,  but  his  knowledge 
of  them  is  quite  limited.  He  also  has  learned  that  there 
are  heavens  above  the  fortieth.  When  spirits  reach  the 
thirtieth  heaven  they  are  no  longer  permitted  to  visit  the 
earth,  and  when  they  reach  the  fortieth  they  are  rarely  per- 
mitted to  visit  any  heaven  below  the  thirty-second.  The 
fifteenth  is  the  Golden  heaven,  and  the  Capital  of  all  the 
heavens  below  it.  The  thirty-fifth  is  another  Golden  heaven, 
and  the  caj)ital  of  all  below  it,  down  to  the  fifteenth,  and 
somewhere  above  the  fortieth  he  has  heard  that  there  is 
still  another  capital,  and  Golden  heaven. 

I  would  here  remark  that  all  the  information  in  these 
pages  respecting  the  heavens  above  the  fifteenth  was  de- 
rived fi'om  this  spirit,  Mr.  Stevens,  through  Mr.  Owen,  as 
was  also  much  of  that  respecting  the  heavens  between  the 
sixth  and  fifteenth. 

Early  in  December,  1877,  Mr.  Owen  informed  me  that 
Mr.  Stevens  had  notified  him  that  he  had  received  permis- 
sion to  conduct  him  on  a  ^isit  to  the  different  heavens  up 
to  and  including  the  fifteenth,  his  own  home  then  being  in 
the  fifth.  Accordingly,  on  the  tenth  of  that  month,  under 
j\Ii\  Stevens'  guidance,  he  visited  the  sixth  heaven  and  suc- 
cessively the  others  until  they  reached  the  fourteenth.  He 
found  each  heaven  to  be  more  beautiful  than  that  below, 
but  all  were  of  the  same  general  character,  and  equally 
natui^al.  In  the  fourteenth  both  he  and  his  gniide  were 
furnished  with  scarlet  satin  robes,  trimmed  with  gold  lace, 
and  golden  sandals  for  their  feet,  decorated  with  rubies, 
and  for  their  heads  golden  crowns,  gemmed  with  diamonds, 
rubies,  and  sapphires,  which  shone  with  the  lustre  of  the 
stars.  ^Tien  thus  arrayed  they  were  admitted  to  the  fif- 
teenth heaven. 


62  Mli.    OWEN    VISITS    IIIGHEK   HEAVENS. 

Here  lie  found  a  lieaven,  in  splendor,  exceeding  anything 
wliich  liis  imagination  had  j)reviously  conceived.  The 
mansions,  or  homes,  were  superbly  beautiful,  and  upon 
entering  one  of  them,  it  being  the  home  of  a  family  with 
whom  his  guide  was  acquainted,  he  found  the  vestibule 
draped  with  satin,  interwoven  with  gold,  and  the  apart- 
ments corres^^ondingly  furnished,  and  the  walls  and  ceil- 
ings traced  in  beautiful  gossamer-like  designs,  and  deli- 
cately carved  and  otherwise  ornamented. 

The  Capitol,  or  edifice  in  which  the  Congress  of  wise  and 
beneficent  spirits  of  this  and  higher  heavens  meet  to  con- 
sider and  decide  important  questions,  relating  to  the  inter- 
ests of  spirits  in  that  and  the  lower  heavens,  was  of  pure, 
white,  semi-transparent  marble,  and  its  stateliness,  magnifi- 
cence, and  beauty  were  indescribable,  while  its  surround- 
ings were  correspondingly  imposing  and  beautiful. 

There  were  lovely  and  attractive  parks,  the  trees,  shrub- 
bery, grass,  and  flowers  of  which  excelled  anything  of  the 
kind  that  Mr.  Owen  had  seen  in  the  heavens  below,  golden 
fountains,  with  interior  surfaces  of  burnished  silver,  from 
which  ascended  streams  and  jets  of  purest  water,  glisten- 
ing in  the  light  like  hquid  crystal,  the  streams  comming- 
Hng  in  the  air  and  assuming  beautiful  and  graceful  forms 
ere  they  descended  into  the  fountain.  There  were  innu- 
merable birds,  of  many  species,  of  resplendent  plumage, 
and  these  filled  the  air  with  their  melody.  Beside  these, 
there  were  graceful  and  beautiful  deer,  which  permitted 
the  utmost  familiarity,  and  lastly,  there  were  horses  of 
such  symmetrical  proportions,  and  perfect  grace  and  beauty, 
that  Mr.  Owen  said  he  would  not  attempt  to  describe 
them.  Some  of  these  were  ridden  and  others  driven  be- 
fore elegant  chariots,  carriages,  and  other  vehicles  of  two 
and  four  wheels,  beautifully  fashioned  and  carved,  and 
ornamented  with  gold. 


HIS    DKSCRII'TION    OF    TIIKM.  63 

Tliere  were  superb  drives,  wiiicli  appeared  to  be  formed 
of  fine,  perfectly  clean,  gratel,  where  tlirongli  the  day  and 
e:ir!y  evening  multitudes  of  both  sexes  throng  to  enjoy 
themselves  in  riding  and  driving,  the  whole  presenting  a 
scene  enchanting  beyond  conception,  and  wonderfully  at- 
tractive and  exhilarating.  By  the  favor  of  the  friend, 
above  mentioned,  of  Mr.  Stevens,  Mr.  Owen  enjoyed  the 
pleasure  of  a  drive  of  about  five  miles  on  one  of  these  ele- 
gant roads,  which  was  bordered  with  trees,  most  of  them 
loaded  with  luscious  fruit,  and  shrubbery,  and  flowers, 
while  charming  meadows,  and  hills,  and  dales  spread  on 
each  side  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach.  The  scenery  was 
diversified  with  streams  and  lakes  of  crystal  purity,  and  on 
some  of  the  former,  and  all  of  the  latter,  he  noticed  many 
persons  in  boats,  sailing  and  rowing.  Language,  he  de- 
clared, could  not  do  justice  to  the  picture,  and  the  most 
■sivid  imagination  could  not  conceive  the  perfection  of  its 
beautv  and  loveliness. 

The  onlv  animals  to  be  found  there,  he  was  informed, 
were  those  above  mentioned,  namely,  horses,  deer,  and 
bii'ds,  together  with  fish  in  the  rivers  and  lakes. 

The  spirits,  male  and  female,  in  this  heaven,  are  fully  as 
beautiful  and  perfect  as  angels  are  popularly  supposed  to 
be,  their  beauty  surpassing  any  possible  conception  of 
oiu's,  and  to  IMr.  Owen  they  all -appeared  to  be  equally 
beautiful.  He  had  observed  when. ascending  from  the  fifth 
to  this,  the  Golden  heaven,  that  in  each,  successively,  the 
beauty  of  the  inhabitants  increased,  thus  establishing  in 
his  mind  the  rule  that  the  more  advanced  the  spirit  the 
more  resplendent  the  beauty.  The  rol^es  of  both  male  and 
female  spiiits  in  the  Golden  heaven  were  of  scarlet  satin, 
trimmed  with  gold  lace,  like  that  which  he  then  wore. 
All,  hkewise,  wore  cro^vns  like  his,  but  those  of  the  female 
spirits  were  of  smaller  dimensions,  more  like  coronets. 


64:  GOVERNMENT  IN  THE  HEAVENS. 

The  fifteenth  is  the  only  capital  or  golden  heaven  below 
the  thirty-fifth,  which  also  is  a  Oolclen  heaven.  His  gTiide, 
whose  home,  as  before  remarked,  was  in  the  thirtv-second 
heaven,  informed  him  that  the  heavens  between  the  fif- 
teenth and  his  own  present  the  same  general  appearance 
as  those  immediately  below  the  fifteenth,  and  are  but  little 
superior  to  them,  but  each  differs  in  certain  respects  from 
all  others.  There  are  rivers,  and  smaller  streams,  and 
lakes  in  all  the  heavens,  abounding  in  fish,  and  boats  pro- 
pelled by  sails  and  oars  glide  over  their  surfaces.  Golden 
crowns  are  worn  by  all  male  sj)irits,  and  smaller  crowns, 
or  coronets,  by  all  female  spirits  in  the  fifteenth  and  higher 
heavens. 

Mr.  Owen's  guide  told  him  that  he  had  never  known  or 
heard  of  any  person  beside  him  being  permitted  to  visit 
the  Golden  heaven,  unless  in  the  regular  order  of  progres- 
sion. My  father,,  notwithstanding  he  has  been  in  the  spirit- 
world  more  than  fifty  years,  and  is  associated  with  Mr. 
Owen  in  his  labors,  was  not  permitted  to  accompany  him. 

There  are  no  governments  in  the  spirit-world  corre- 
sponding to  our  municipal,  and  other  local  governments, 
but  a  congress  assembles  from  time  to  time  in  the  Ca23ital, 
or  fifteenth,  or  Golden  heaven,  for  the  purj)ose  of  discuss- 
ing and  adopting  measures  for  the  good  of  all  below  that 
heaven.  It  is  constituted  of  spirits  delegated  from  that 
and  higher  heavens.  Washington,  Jefferson,  John  Quincy 
Adams,  Lincohi,  and  certain  other  of  our  former  presidents, 
and  other  statesmen,  are  members  of  this  congress.  All 
measures  decreed  by  it  are  enforced  through  the  silent 
agencies  employed,  and  spirits  in  the  heavens  below  ac- 
quiesce in  the  action  of  their  wise  and  good  legislators. 
There  are  no  published  codes  of  lav/,  but  all  laws  and  rules 
enacted  are  recorded  in  the  fifteenth  heaven. 


PLANETARY    SPIRITS.  C)0 

Spirits  rarely  disobey  orders  from  tlie  higher  heavens, 
but  when  these  are  disregarded,  or  wilfully  violated,  the 
oftender  is  compelled,  as  a  punishment,  to  descend  to  a 
lower  heaven,  where  he  remains  until  such  time  as  he  has 
become  penitent  and  submissive.  If  a  spirit,  while  visiting 
the  earth,  should  reveal  to  mortals  forbidden  secrets  the 
oflence  would  immediately  become  known  to  sj^irits  in 
authorit}',  and  the  offender  would  be  prohibited  fi'om 
again  \isiting  the  earth,  and  perhaj^s,  in  addition,  he 
would  be  degraded  to  a  lower  heaven. 

As  to  governing,  planetary  sj^irits,  there  is  this  degree 
of  truth  in  this  ancient  belief ;  a  spiritual  hierarchy  does 
exist  in  the  higher  heavens,  and  there  are  certain  exalted 
spirits  of  transcendant  capacity  and  wisdom,  who  passed 
fi'om  earth  many  ages  since,  and  who  are  j^re-eminently 
qualified  to  du'ect  and  control.  To  such  lofty  intelligences 
otherwise,  but  less  higiily  qualified  spirits,  defer,  and  on 
important  questions  relating  to  the  present  and  future 
weKare  of  the  race,  both  in  the  heavens  and  on  earth,  their 
o]3inions  usually  determine  the  course  of  action  to  be  pur- 
sued. 

There  are  cities  and  towns  in  every  heaven,  at  least  up  to 
the  fortieth.  These  were  j)lanned  by  spirits,  and  built  by 
the  labor  of  their  hands,  but  the  means  by  which  the 
grounds  were  ornamented  with  trees,  shrubbery,  vines, 
flowers,  and  gTass,  is  different,  and  to  us  nearly  incredible. 
My  instnictors  say  that  the  boundaries  of  the  plots  or  en- 
closiu'es  having  been  established,  buildings  erected,  and 
paths  laid  out  by  manual  labor,  it  is  then  only  necessary 
to  clearly  conceive  the  varieties  of  vegetation,  the  propor- 
tion of  each  variety  desired,  and  the  order  of  arrangement, 
and  then  to  will,  or  earnestly  wish  for  it,  and  within  a  day 
or  two  it  makes  its  appearance,  and  within  a  week  or  ten 


66  A    STORY    CONFIRMED. 

days,  at  the  most,  it  attains  its  full  growtli  and  perfection, 
the  trees,  if  fruit-bearing,  abounding  in  ripe  fruit,  and  the 
floAvering  shrubs  and  vines  in  full  bearing,  and  all  pre- 
senting the  appearance  of  having  been  in  existence  for  a 
long  period  of  time.  Similar  means  are  foUowed  by  similar 
results  whenever  they  are  emplo^^ed. 

Among  the  many  statements  in  this  volume  perhaps 
none  will  challenge  the  faith  and  test  the  patience  of  the 
reader  hke  the  following. 

Nov.  1,  1877,  the  Indian  controller  of  the  medium  in- 
formed me  that  a  day  or  two  previous  a  steamboat  made 
its  appearance  on  a  lake  in  the  Indian  country,  and  a  large 
number  of  his  tribe,  the  Winnebago,  received  invitations 
to  sail  on  her.  Soon  after  the  boat  started  it  attained  such 
a  rate  of  speed  that  many  of  the  Indians  became  alarmed 
and  left  it,  and  soon  the  boiler  exploded,  scattering  the  re- 
maining Indians  together  with  the  white  spirits  in  every 
direction,  and  many  of  them  suffered  for  a  brief  time 
severely.  He  described  the  boat  as  being  m  every  respect 
similar  to  our  steamboats,  vdth  furnace,  boiler,  and  ma- 
chinery, the  fuel  being  wood,  procured  from  the  forests. 

The  next  day  after  I  had  been  told  the  above  story  I  had 
a  conversation  with  other  sjoirit  friends,  Mr,  Ov/en  among 
them,  and  they  confirmed  what  the  Indian  had  said,  and 
added  that  the  boat  was  crowded,  principally,  with  Indians, 
who  w^ere  having  a  merry  time,  while  the  shores  of  the 
lake  were  lined  with  others  who  were  cheering  those  on 
board,  when  suddenly  the  explosion  occurred,  and  the 
Indians  were  hurled  by  its  force  in  every  direction,  at  first 
creating  consternation,  then  amusement  in  the  minds  of 
the  spectators.  Some  of  the  Indians  thus  violently  pro- 
jected into  the  air,  suffered  for  a  time,  but  they  were  aU 
more  frightened  than  hurt,  and  soon  recovered,  and  joined 


THE    SECOND    STEAMBOxlT.  67 

tlie  otliers  in  makino-  merry  over  tlie  details  of  tlie  accident. 
The  wreck  cuui^'lit  lire  and  was  consumed.  The  cause  of 
the  catastrophe  was  an  excessive  pressure  of  steam,  this 
being  the  lirst  steamboat  built  in  the  American  heavens, 
and  this  the  trial  trip,  the  engineer  was  necessarily  de- 
ficient in  the  experience  without  which  there  was  no  safety 
for  the  boat. 

My  friends  assure  me  that  for  some  years  past  there 
have  been  steamboats,  and  even  steamships,  in  the  waters 
of  the  Enghsh  heavens.  There  are  also  workshops  in  those 
heavens,  where  the  machinery  for  these  vessels  is  nianu- 
lictured,  and  the  machinerv'  for  this  boat  was  obtained 
there.  The  timber  was  j)i'ocured  from  the  forests  in  the 
first,  or  Indian  heaven,  and  this  boat  was  built  there. 
They  also  stated  that  the  spirits  who  built  this  boat  were 
preparing  to  construct  another  in  its  place. 

On  the  27th  of  the  following  month,  December,  my 
fiiends  informed  me  that  the  second  steamboat,  beinof 
completed,  was  on  the  previous  day  launched,  and  sailed 
on  its  trial  trip.  There  were  many  guests  on  board  from 
the  different  heavens  below  the  eighth,  and  among  them 
were  some  Indians.  When  saihng  near  the  banks  of  the 
lake  Indians,  on  horses,  amused  themselves  by  testing  the 
speed  of  their  animals  in  competition  with  that  of  the 
steamer,  and  the  latter,  with  its  passengers,  was  greeted 
with  loud  huzzas  from  those  on  shore,  and  her  steam- 
whistle  responded  to  the  welcoming  cheers.  A  grand 
entertainment  was  given  on  board. 

On  the  spiritual  Atlantic  Ocean,  in  the  first  sphere,  there 
are  a  few  ships,  and  many  yachts,  and  other  small  craft, 
while  in  the  thu-d  of  the  English  heavens  there  are  a 
number  of  steamers  on  the  lakes,  and  rivers.  In  that 
heaven  there  are  also  two  or  three  railways. 


CHAPTEE  V. 

THE   HIGHER   HEAVENS — Continued. 
Mansions,  G-arments,  Ornaments.     Employments, 

HEAVENLY   MANSIONS    OR   HOMES. 

"  In  my  Father's  house  there  are  many  mansions ;  if  it  were  not  so  I  would  have 
told  you." — John  xlv.  2. 

If  Orthodox  Cliristians  were  asked  whether  they  beheve 
that  there  are  temples  in  heaven  in  which  to  worship  the 
Snj)reme  Being,  the  majority  of  them  would  find  no  diffi- 
culty in  replying  in  the  affirmative,  and  again,  if  they  should 
be  asked  whether  they  beheve  that  there  are  mansions 
there,  as  Jesus  declared  there  were,  and  as  we  believe  there 
are,  suitable  for  individual  and  family  comfort  and  enjoy- 
ment, would  not  this  question  be  regarded  as  equally  rea- 
sonable ?  The  fact  is,  if  we  admit  the  existence  of  heaven, 
and  people  it  with  human  beings,  we  must  go  further,  and 
provide  in  a  rational  manner  for  their  comfort  and  hapj^iness. 

There  are  indeed  magnificent  temples  in  the  American 
and  English  heavens,  and  grand  cathedrals  in  certain  of 
the  European,  with  the  most  inspiring  and  soul-ravishing 
music  resounding  through  their  naves  and  aisles,  with 
ministers  and  priests  ministering  to  the  religious  needs  of 
their  flocks,  and  eloquently  proclaiming  the  loftiest  and 
purest  truths,  fi'ee  from  all  the  admixture  of  error  that 
here,  so  often,  misleads  and  fetters  the  soul. 


MANSIONS.  69 

In  each  heaven  the  dwelling's,  or  homes,  m  regard  to 
styles  of  ai'chitectiu'e  and  general  appearance,  ditfer  from 
those  in  the  heavens  above,  and  below,  but  in  the  cities 
there  is  a  general  resemblance  between  all  dwellings  or 
homes  in  the  same  heaven,  except  as  to  color.  In  the 
suburbs  of  the  cities  the}"  vary  in  style,  as  they  also  do  in 
the  countrv.  Thev  are  successively  more  beautiful  as  we 
ascend.  These  mansions  are  ready  provided  in  the  heavens, 
and  upon  the  entrance  of  spirits  they  are  conducted  by 
giiides  to  their  respective  habitations.  All  spirits  in  the 
higher  heavens  are  in  such  perfect  harmony  with  their  sur- 
roundings that  they  have  no  desire  for  anything  different. 
These  mansions  have  previously  been  occupied,  and  become 
vacant  fi'om  their  occupants  having  advanced  to  higher 
heavens. 

To  each  mansion  in  the  heavens  above  the  third,  as  be- 
fore said,  is  attached  a  beautiful  garden,  in  which  perpetu- 
ally bloom  flowers  resplendent  in  colors,  of  countless  hues, 
and  of  exquisitely  beautiful  and  dehcate  forms,  and  of 
every  conceivable  variety,  while  the  grounds  are  laid  out 
in  the  most  artistic  and  pleasing  manner  and  intersected 
by  charming  walks.  Flowers  in  these  celestial  gardens, 
unhke  those  of  earth,  never  wither  and  fade  while  they  re- 
main unplucked,  and  yet  buds  and  blossoms  in  all  their 
various  stages  of  grow^th  are  found  on  the  same  branches, 
and  on  the  fruit-bearing  trees  and  \ines  are  constantly  to 
be  found  buds,  blossoms,  and  ripened  fruit. 

AU  the  pubhc  buildings,  temples,  theatres,  halls,  and  all 
the  dwelhngs  or  homes  m  the  different  heavens  are  the 
products  of  the  skill  and  labor  of  human  spuits.  The 
mansions  are  aU  constructed  of  wood,  no  stone  being  used 
in  their  formation,  but  in  the  higher  heavens  stone  is  em- 
ployed in  the  constniction  of  public  buildings,  and  in  the 
fifteenth  heaven  the  capitol  is  constmcted  exclusively  of 


To  FURNITUIiE. 

white  marble,  of  wonderful  piiritj^  and  beauty.  For  tlie  in- 
terior of  tlieir  mansions,  or  homes,  walnut,  rosewood,  maple, 
mahogany,  etc.,  are  used,  and  these  woods,  there  far  more 
beautiful  than  here,  are  wrought  with  surpassing  skill  by 
the  hands  of  sj)irit  artisans,  while  the  ceilings  and  walls,  as 
before  stated,  are  frequently  elegantly  frescoed,  and  deli- 
cately traced,  and  carved,  and  otherwise  ornamented. 
Work  of  this  kind  is  there  accomplished  far  more  rapidly, 
and  with  less  effort  than  it  is  here. 

The  furniture  of  the  habitations  in  the  second  sphere  is 
scanty  and  of  the  plainest  description,  corresponding  to  the 
dweUings.  In  the  third  heaven,  the  dwellings  being  supe- 
rior to  those  below,  the  character  and  quality  of  the  furni- 
ture are  correspondingly  better,  but  yet  much  inferior  to 
that  in  the  heaven  above.  From  here  the  furniture,  like 
the  mansions  in  each  successively  ascending  heaven,  is  more 
elegant.  It  is  constructed  of  beautiful  woods,  of  various 
patterns  and  styles,  elegantly  carved  and  ornamented,  and 
upholstered  in  fabrics  of  the  richest  description.  In  the 
sixth  heaven  the  furniture  is  gilded  and  burnished.  The 
floors  of  these  homes  are  covered  with  rich  and  velvety 
car^^ets,  wrought  in  beautiful  patterns  and  colors.  Their 
homes  are  also  furnished  with  clocks,  and  watches  are  in 
common  use  with  them,  and  are  frequently  carried  on  their 
persons.  My  instructors,  when  with  me,  are  never  at  a 
loss  for  the  time,  as  I  have  frequently  satisfied  myself  by 
their  answers  to  my  questions  as  to  the  hour,  their  time 
nearly  according  with  my  own.  At  night  they  repose  on 
beds  or  couches  as  we  do.  The  coverings  of  these  are  of 
beautiful  materials  and  colors,  and  elegantly  wrought  in 
figures  of  various  designs.  Upon  retiring  at  night  they 
exchange  the  garments  they  have  worn  through  the  day  for 
sleej)ing  robes. 


r 


MR.  owen's  IIo:^[E.  71 

]\Ii'.  Owen's  description  of  liis  own  liome,  wliile  in  tlio 
fourth  heaven,  was  as  follows. 

"  On  the  main  Hoor  of  my  home  there  is  a  parlor,  a 
small  libraiy  Avell  stored  with  books,  a  study,  and  dining 
room.  Each  room  is  diHerentty  furnished,  hut  the  frame- 
work of  all  the  furniture  is  of  choice  woods  wrought  into 
elegant  forms,  and  artistically  and  beautifully  carved,  and 
polished.  That  of  the  parlor  is  upholstered  with  a  sub- 
stance, or  what  you  w^ould  term  a  material,  in  some  re- 
spects resembling  velvet,  but  the  nap  is  of  greater  length, 
and  very  soft  and  beautiful.  The  floors  are  covered  with 
carpets,  so  soft  and  luxurious'  that  in  treading  upon  them 
the  feet  are  partially  buried  in  their  velvety  fleece,  and  the 
patterns  and  colors  are  exquisitely  beautiful.  The  win- 
dows are  fiirnished  with  silk  and  lace  curtains,  both  elabo- 
rately woven  and  embroidered  in  elegant  patterns.  The 
dining  room  is  furnished  in  a  plainer  manner,  more  in  the 
style  of  your  dining  rooms,  while  the  furniture  of  the  other 
rooms  on  that  floor,  partakes  of  the  character  both  of 
the  parlor  and  dining  room,  and  is  strictly  adapted  to  the 
uses  and  enjoyments  to  which  those  rooms  are  respectively 
a^^propriated.  The  second  floor  is  arranged  for  sleeping 
apartments,  and  we  have  no  floor  above  this. 

Meals  are  served  in  the  dining  room  morning,  noon, 
and  evening.  These  consist  exclusively  of  fruit,  of  which 
we  usually  have  on  our  table  twenty  or  more  varieties. 
The  drinks  are  principally  water  and  wines,  the  latter  of 
various  kinds,  unfermented,  and  of  delicious  taste  and 
flavor.  We  have  two  female  servants  m  our  household. 
They  were  in  the  second,  or  wicked  heaven,  and  having  the 
alternative  offered  them  to  longer  remain  there  and  slowly 
progress,  or  to  act  in  the  capacity  of  servants  to  us,  in  the 
fourth  heaven,  and  progress  with  us,  they  chose  the  latter 
course.     But  it  must  not  be  supposed  that  in  the  relation 


72  HIS    SERVANTS. 

tlie}"  bear  to  the  family  tliere  is  any  sense  of  degradation, 
or  of  inferiority,  other  than  that  which  arises  from  the  con- 
sciousness of  their  comparative  ignorance,  a  consciousness 
which  we  all  feel  in  the  presence  of  those  who  are  wiser 
and  more  advanced  than  ourselves,  but  which  fails  to  cause 
a  single  regret,  for  we  know  that  if  we  strive  to  attain  it 
we  shall  in  time  occupy  as  exalted  a  position,  in  all  re- 
spects, as  they  now  do.  Their  service  is  entirely  volun- 
tary, and  for  this  we  endeavor  to  compensate  them  by 
improving  every  opportunity  to  instruct  them  in  any 
knowledge  we  may  possess,  and  in  which  they  may  be  de- 
ficient. They  are  regarded  by  us  more  as  wards  than  ser- 
vants, and  in  morahty  and  virtue  jjerhaps  they  are  now  our 
equals,  and  if  they  were  to  leave  us  at  this  time  they 
would  remain  in  our  heaven,  the  only  disadvantage  to 
them  being  that  they  would  not  hereafter  j)rogress  as  rap- 
idl}^  as  they  will  by  remaining  with  us.  Beside  our  per- 
sonal influence  over  them  for  good,  they  are  greatly  benefit- 
ed by  contact  with  and  observation  of  the  society  tha.t  daily 
gathers  at  our  home,  and  as  we  advance  to  higher  heavens 
they  are  thus,  at  each  successive  step  in  progression,  better 
qualified  to  meet  its  requirements,  until  at  a  period  of 
time,  not  very  distant,  they  will  become  so  advanced  mor- 
ally, intellectually,  and  even  socially,  that  they  will  no 
longer  feel  a  sense  of  dependence,  but  will  be  able  to  act 
independently,  and  then  their  equahty  will  be  gladly  recog- 
nized by  us.  They  will  then  have  outstripped  those  of 
their  fiiends  from  whom  they  parted  in  the  second  sphere, 
and  been  rewarded  for  the  services  they  have  rendered  us." 
Mr.  Owen  added,  that  every  family  in  the  fourth  and 
higher  heavens  that  desires  to  have  servants  from  the  sec- 
ond sphere  are  privileged  to  have  them,  and  multitudes, 
there,  are  only  too  happy  to  assume  such  humble  positions 
on  such  terms. 


PAINTING    AND   ARCHITECTURE.  73 

Paintings,  far  excelling  in  merit  any  of  tlie  productions 
of  the  great  masters  on  earth,  abound  in  the  heavens,  and 
in  the  spiritual  Romes,  Florences,  Bolognes,  Venices, 
Dresdens,  etc.,  there  are  magnificent  galleries,  in  which 
are  to  be  found  numerous  works  of  these  same  great  mas- 
ters, executed  by  them  in  spirit  life.  ^ 

In  the  French  heavens  the  lowest  spiritual  Paris  is  in 
the  foiu'th  heaven.  In  the  heavens  above  this  there  are 
other  cities  of  the  same  name.  The  styles  of  architecture 
ill  the  S3  cities,  and  in  the  French  heavens  generally,  as  also 
in  the  German,  and  other  heavens,  partake  of  the  character 
of  the  architecture  in  the  countries  on  earth  of  which  they 
are  spiritual  counterparts,  only  there  it  is  indescribably 
gi'ander  and  more  imposing.  But  in  the  spiritual  Homes 
the  temples,  palaces,  mansions,  etc.,  generally  excel  those 
of  all  other  cities,  being  gTand  and  stately  beyond  descrip- 
tion. There  are  spiritual  Romes  in  the  Italian  heavens 
fi'om  the  third,  at  least  to  the  seventh. 

It  has  been  said  that  v,"hen  spirits  change  their  habita- 
tions and  have  no  fui^ther  use  for  them,  or  other  objects 
pertaining  to  them,  their  habitations  and  these  objects, 
through  the  exercise  of  their  will-force  disappear.  This  is 
an  error,  as  spirits  have  neither  the  inclination  nor  power 
to  destroy  anything,  nor  do  they  become  dissatisfied  mth 
an}i;hing  they  possess,  for  they  have  nothing  which  they 
do  not  desu'e.  It  is  only  when  they  pass  to  higher  heavens 
that  they  come  into  possession  of  new  and  different  objects, 
excepting  as  elsewhere  explained,  and  in  each  heaven  there 
is  to  be  found  precisely  what  is  best  adapted  to  their  wants 
and  desires. 

The  onlv  sense  in  wliich  our  cfood  deeds  contribute  to 
the  building  up  of  our  spiritual  mansions,  is  by  quahfying 
us  for  higher  heavens,  and  more  beautiful  homes. 
4 


'4:  SPIRITS    LOVE    THE    BEAUTIFUL. 


GAEMENTS,    ORNAMENTS,    AND    OTHER   OBJECTS. 


"For  all  TTiiJigs  are  Yours." 

The  love  of  the  beautiful  is  a  natural  sentiment  of  our 
spiritual  natures,  and  the  admiration  of  and  desire  for  beau- 
tiful raiment  is  therefore  a  legitimate  taste,  and  it  is  right 
to  gi'atify  it  when  it  can  be  properly  done.  AVith  all  good 
spirits,  male  and  female,  this  taste  is  active,  and  the  means 
of  its  gTatification  are  ampl}^  provided  and  placed  within 
the  reach  of  all.  But  the  love  of  fine  raiment  is  never  a 
passion  Avith  the  inhabitants  of  the  heavens,  and  a  spirit  of 
rivahy  is  never  excited  by  the  selfish  desii-es  of  one  to 
make  a  richer  and  finer  display  than  another.  The  utmost 
desires  of  all  are  gratified,  for  all  desu'es  of  happy  spiiits 
are  proper  and  just,  and  are  never  actuated  by  selfishness, 
this,  the  basis  of  all  sinfulness,  having  been  eliminated 
from  their  natures.  Nothing  that  one  happy  spirit  j)osses- 
ses  is  ever  coveted  by  another. 

The  garments  of  S23irits  in  certain  respects  are  different 
in  each  heaven,  each  having  a  certain  predominant  color,  or 
shade  of  color,  especially  characteristic  of  it,  and  there  are 
also  certain  differences,  although  in  some  instances  shght, 
in  the  styles  and  forms  of  garments.  Thus  to  higher 
spirits  the  raiment  of  others  in  the  heavens  below  them  is 
indicative  of  their  grade  and  condition.  To  a  considerable 
extent  the  garments  of  spirits  in  the  heavens  of  different 
nationahties  partake  of  the  character  of  the  garments  of 
people  in  the  corresj)onding  coiuitries  on  earth.  Spiritual 
garments  are  made  from  textile  fabrics,  and  both  these  and 
the  garments  are  the  products  of  spirit  skill  and  labor. 

In  the  heavens  from  the  third  to  the  eighth  males  com- 
monly di^ess  as  we  do,  in  coat,  vest,  trousers,  and  hats,  the 


GAKM1':XTS    OF    SPIRITS.  75 

Last  being  soft  and  pliable,  Avitli  sandals  for  tlieir  feet. 
They  also  at  times,  and  especially  in  tlieir  liomes,  array 
tlieniselves  in  wliite  loose  robes,  tliese  frequently  being 
ornamented  witli  colored  trimmings.  Sometimes  wlien 
\isiting  tlie  etii'tli  in  summer,  they  are  dressed  in  white, 
but  more  commonly  in  dark  clothing.  Mr.  Owen,  my 
father,  and  other  male  fiiends  usually  wear  garments  of 
dark  colors,  the  material  being  much  like  our  cloth  in  sub- 
stance, texture,  and  appearance,  and  of  the  prevaihng 
fashions  of  earth,  sHghtly  modified  according  to  taste. 

Young  children  are  clothed  in  accordance  with  tlieir  own 
tastes,  under  the  direction'  of  their  parents  or  guardians. 
Young  females  fi-om  the  age  of  fifteen  to  twenty  years 
clothe  themselves  exclusively  in  white  robes,  not  being 
j)ermitted  to  wear  colored  garments.  They  usually  adorn 
their  persons  with  wreaths  of  flowers,  these  most  commonly 
encii'cle  their  shoulders  and  droop  and  are  festooned  low 
over  the  skrrts  of  their  robes.  They  also  wear  smaller 
^-reaths,  of  still  more  clehcate  flowers  encircling  their  heads. 
Theu'  hail',  like  that  of  all  females,  is  left  free  to  fall  over 
their  shoulders. 

Female  spirits  above  the  age  of  twenty  years  are  at  lib- 
erty to  dress  as  they  please,  in  garments  of  various  colors 
and  styles,  but  the  great  majority  of  them  dress  in  flowing 
and  gi'aceful  robes,  with  the  waist  simply  encircled  with  a 
loose  gu'dle  or  belt,  but  all  ornament  their  robes  with  rib- 
bons and  flowers.  They  wear  no  other  head  coverings 
than  veils,  and  these  are  of  beautiful  materials  and  patterns, 
and  of  most  exquisite  workmanship.  They  universally 
adorn  their  heads  with  flowers.  Like  the  males,  they  wear 
sandals. 

The  garments  of  both  male  and  female  spirits  are  always 
found  in  their  homes,  ready  prepared  for  them  when 
they  enter  them.     Tlieir  tastes  in  the  choice  of  garments 


76  EVERY   DESIRE    GRATIFIED. 

are  always  anticipated,  and  the  latter  are  of  every  color, 
texture,  and  style  tliey  can  desire.  Tlieir  garments  never 
wear  out  nor  become  soiled.  Whenever  they  are  qnpJi- 
fied  to  advance  to  a  higher  heaven  garments  from  that 
heaven  are  brought  to  them,  in  which  they  army  them- 
selves, they  not  being  permitted  to  take  with  them  any- 
thing whatever  from  one  heaven  to  another,  everything  in 
any  heaven  belonging  exclusively  to  that  heaven.  In  their 
new  homes  they  also  find  every  other  thing  which  they  can 
j)0ssibly  desire,  including  jewelry,  and  other  ornaments. 
The  jewelry  is  of  gold  and  silver  and  j)recious  stones,  and 
far  excels  any  that  wealth  can  command  on  earth,  and  all 
good  spirits  can  obtain  it  in  abundance.  All  these  things 
are  made  by  skilful  sj)irit  artists,  whose  highest  enjoyment 
for  a  season,  is  in  being  employed  in  their  production. 


EMPLOYMENTS    OF    SPIRITS.       MEANS    OF    SUPPLYING    OTHER   WANTS. 

Good  spirits  obtain  everything  they  desire.  The  desire 
and  the  need  are  inseparable,  the  one  cannot  exist  without 
the  other. 

In  aU  the  heavens  above  the  third,  the  student  will  find 
books,  paper,  pens,  ink,  pencils,  etc.,  which  he  can  obtain 
without  cost,  and  with  only  the  trouble  of  asking  for  them, 
for  as  many  spirits  desire  these  things,  these  Avants,  like  all 
others,  are  abundantly  supplied.  And  yet  a  sj^irit  of 
hmited  intelligence  when  communicating  through  a  me- 
dium, if  asked  whether  these  things  are  to  be  found  in  the 
heavens,  probably  would  reply  No,  and  honestly  too,  not 
havuig  desired,  or  seen  them,  or  j^erhaps  not  havmg  ad- 
vanced sufficiently  to  obtain  them. 

Musical  instruments  of  every  conceivable  kind  are  easily 
obtainable  there,  perfect  in  tone,  form,  and  finish.     There 


HOAV    OBJECTS    ARE    OBTAINED,  77 

are  various  kinds  of  wheeled  veliicles  in  the  heavens  above 
the  third,  and  in  each  heaven  successively,  they  are  more 
elea'ant  and  qTaceful  than  in  the  heaven  below.  Thev  never 
wear  out,  or  require  repairing,  or  become  tarnished  by 
time  and  use.  It  is  the  same  with  the  dwellings,  furni- 
ture, garments,  ornaments,  and  all  other  objects.  Photog- 
raphers are  there  engaged  in  the  practice  of  their  art,  and 
photographs  are  there  nearly  as  common  as  here.  The 
chemist  there  can  obtain  acids,  allvalies,  salts,  and  all  other 
chemical  substances  corresponding  to  those  on  earth,  to- 
gether with  all  the  utensils,  instruments,  and  other  appa- 
ratus that  go  to  make  up  the  furniture  of  a  laboratory,  and 
is  thus  able  to  repeat  every  experiment  and  reproduce 
every  result  that  is  possible  with  chemists  here,  and  spirit 
chemists  are  constantly  engaged  in  experimenting,  and 
they  fi'equently  make  discoveries,  the  knowledge  of  which 
sooner  or  later  is  communicated,  generally  by  impression, 
to  oui'  chemists. 

The  chemicals,  metals,  tools,  machinery,  etc.,  required 
in  the  American  heavens^  are  procured  fi'om  the  European 
heavens,  mostly  from  the  English.  There  is  an  of&ce  in 
each  American  heaven  where,  upon  application,  anything 
of  this  character  w^ill  be  obtained  from  the  proper  Eu- 
ropean heaven.  When  a  certain  object,  as  a  book,  an 
instrument,  ornament,  utensil,  etc.,  is  desired,  application 
is  raade  to  a  repository  of  such  articles,  a  w^arehouse,  it 
might  be  termed,  and  soon  thereafter,  perhaps  the  next 
day,  the  object  desired  is  brought  by  a  messenger  to  the 
applicant's  home.  There  are  such  repositories  in  all  the 
heavens  above  the  thii'd.  Their  wines  also  are  obtained  in 
this  manner. 

Allien  jMi\  Owen,  upon  his  passing  away,  entered  the 
thii'd  heaven  he  found  in  his  new  home  a  small  collection 
of  books,  which  constituted  a  part  of  its  furniture.     When 


YS  BOOKS    AND   JOURNALS. 

lie  entered  the  fourth  he  found  a  larger  collection,  and 
upon  his  entering  the  fifth  heaven  he  found  in  his  home  a 
fine  hbrary,  among  the  books  being  elegant  copies  of  all 
his  own  works.  In  the  sixth  heaven  he  found  a  still  larger 
and  more  elegant  Hbrary,  with  books  still  more  tastefully 
and  elegantly  bound,  and  lettered.  Here  again  he  found 
copies  of  liis  own  works.  Wlien  books,  not  in  his  library, 
are  desired,  he  applies  to  the  repository  of  books  in  his 
heaven,  and  they  are  always  sent  to  him,  and  usually  within 
twenty-four  hours.  He  is  not  permitted  to  enter  this  re- 
pository, but  makes  his  request  at  the  entrance. 

All  of  our  spiritualist  journals  are  republished  in  the 
fourth  heaven,  and  copies  are  sent  to  all  who  desire  them, 
almost  immediately  after  the  originals  are  issued  here.  By 
this  means  Mr.  Owen  perused  an  article  of  mine,  which 
had  been  published  in  one  of  our  journals,  before  I  had 
received  the  copy  containing  it,  and  discussed  with  me  its 
principal  points.  And  not  only  private  but  pubUc  libra- 
ries abound  in  the  spirit-world,  and  connected  with  the 
latter,  in  the  lower  American  and  English  heavens,  are 
reading  rooms,  w^hich  are  supplied  with  copies  of  all  the 
spiritualist  journals,  together  mth  some  of  the  principal 
daily  and  weekly  newspapers,  and  quarterly  and  monthly 
magazines  published  in  these  two  countries.  In  the  pub- 
lic libraries  in  the  American  heavens,  there  are  no  records, 
or  accounts  of  former  and  extinct  races,  for  the  obvious 
reason  that  these  heavens  have  not,  at  least  for  unknown 
ages,  been  inhabited  by  others  than  Indians.  But  records, 
covermg  the  four  centuries  since  America  was  discovered, 
are  to  be  found  there.  In  the  libraries  of  certain  of  the 
European  and  Asiatic  heavens  records  exist  of  the  princi- 
pal events  and  occurrences  which  have  taken  place  in  those 
countries  for  thousands  of  j^ears. 

There  are  at  least  a  score  of  spirits  daily  engaged  in  the 


TUE    MANUFACTURING    IlEAVP^N.  79 

National  Libraiy  iu  Wasliingion  in  copying  such  books  as 
may  be  of  interest  to  spirits  in  tlieii'  world.  Tliose,  who 
ai-e  thus  engaged,  are  endowed  T\dtli  the  faculty  of  reading 
closed  books  ^^ith  amazing  facility.  By  an  effort  of  the 
will,  a  psychological  process,  they  are  able  to  evolve  or 
produce  so  as  to  be  clearly  represented  to  their  minds, 
exact  copies  of  the  successive  j^ages  of  a  book.  The  posi- 
tion of  the  book,  or  whether  it  be  open  or  closed,  is  of  no 
consequence,  pro^sided  it  be  externally  wholly  or  partially 
exposed  to  view.  In  this  way  these,  or  other  spirits,  ob- 
tain copies  of  oui-  Spirituahst  and  secular  journals. 

For  a  long  time  my  instructors  were  unable  to  learn 
where  the  fui-niture,  garments,  etc.,  in  use  m  the  heavens 
were  manufactured.  No  one  was  able  to  inform  them  un- 
til j\lr.  Owen  inquii'ed  of  the  spirit  from  the  thirty-second 
heaven,  ]VIi\  Stevens,  and  fi'om  him  he  learned,  much  to 
his  sui-prise,  that  the  Eighteenth  heaven  is  known  ia  the 
heavens  above  it  as  "  The  Manufacturing  Heaven."  Here 
the  dwellings  and  pubhc  buildings  for  the  heavens  below, 
are  wrought  in  j)arts,  and  sections,  and  made  ready  for 
erection,  and  then  transported  to  the  heavens  where  they 
are  needed,  and  there  they  are  put  together  by  spirit  me- 
chanics. Here  also  furniture,  garments,  jewelry,  books, 
and  nearly  everything  that  is  needed'  in  the  heavens  are 
manufactui'ed.  In  the  seventeenth  heaven  are  the  homes 
of  the  artisans  who  labor  in  their  vocations  in  the  eigh- 
teenth. Many  of  them  have  their  famihes  with  them,  and 
their  seK  sacrificing  spirit,  manifested  in  the  devotion  of 
theii'  skill  and  labor  to  the  promotion  of  the  comfort  and 
happiness  of  others,  is  rewarded,  not  only  by  their  own 
rapid  advancement,  but  also  by  that  of  their  families,  whose 
weKai'e  is  as  dear  to  them  as  their  own.  And  then  their 
labors  ai'e  not  of  long  continuance  ;  a  fevf  years  and  they 


80  EMPLOYMENTS    OF    SPIRITS. 


o 


advance  to  still  higher  heavens,  while  others  from  lower 
heavens  supply  their  places.  We  thus  perceive  that  good 
spirits  are  not  engaged  exclusively  in  religious,  or  even  in- 
tellectual occuj^ations,  but  on  the  contrary  the  diversity  of 
em^^loyments  with  them  is  nearly  as  great  as  with  us,  but 
the  efforts  of  all  are  directed  to  the  best  good,  either  of  in- 
dividuals or  of  the  whole. 

It  should  be  a  source  of  gratification,  at  least  to  young 
people,  to  learn  that  they  will  not  be  constantly  engaged 
in  devotional  exercises.  Spirits  use  their  minds,  their 
hands,  and  limbs,  as  we  do  ;  they  plan  and  execute,  walk, 
ride,  drive,  sail  on  the  rivers  and  lakes,  interchange  visits, 
fi'equent  the  theatres,  attend  lectures,  and  places  of  wor- 
ship, read  and  write,  eat,  drink,  sing  and  dance,  have  their 
social  gatherings,  such  as  parties,  picnics,  excursions  by 
land  and  water,  and  otherwise  enjoy  themselves,  and  in 
addition,  are  able  to  transport  themselves  from  place  to 
place,  from  one  lieaven  to  another,  and  to  earth,  and  ad- 
vanced spirits  are  even  able  with  the  speed  of  lightning  to 
wing  their  flight  from  this  planet  to  another,  without  ex- 
haustion, and  with  httle  effort. 

The  intellect  of  itself  cannot  apjDrehend  these  things. 
Iles23ecting  them,  God  has  made  our  hearts  wiser  than  our 
heads,  and  the  head  would  be  wiser  than  it  is  if  it  were  al- 
ways to  consult  the  heart  in  such  matters. 

In  compliance  with  my  request  that  she  would  describe 
her  usual  daily  occupations,  a  highly  intelligent  spirit  friend 
in  the  fourth  heaven  with  whom  I  frequently  communicate 
said : 

"When  I  arise  in  the  morning  I  perform  my  ablutions, 
then  exercise  by  walking  in  the  garden  and  vicinity  of  my 
home,  return  and  make  my  morning  repast  of  fruits,  en- 
gage in  conversation,  read,  write,  or  embroider,  or  engage 


IN    MANY    KESPECTS    LIKE    OUR    OWN.  81 

in  any  other  occupation,  or  amusement,  that  may  interest 
me.  Often,  in  comj^any  Avitli  others,  sometimes  alone,  I 
sail  on  the  lakes,  or  rivers.  For  this  purpose  we  have 
boats  of  various  sizes  and  forms,  all  beautiful,  and  some 
exquisitely  so,  and  they  glide  through  the  crystal  waters 
with  very  little  eftbrt  on  our  part,  while  others  are  pro- 
pelled by  sails.  ^Ye  frequently  make  uj^  parties  for  excur- 
sions on  the  water,  and  into  the  country,  and  visit  remark- 
able and  beautiful  objects,  and  places,  and  often  numbers 
of  friends  of  both  sexes  assemble  at  the  homes  of  certain 
of  them  for  social  enjoyment.  At  these  parties,  for  they 
are  precisely  such,  we  amuse  ourselves,  and  are  entertained 
Tvdth  refreshments,  these  consisting  exclusively  of  various 
fi'uits,  and  unfermentecl  mnes,  and  other  drinks,  and  the 
scene  is  enlivened  with  music  and  dancing. 

We  also  often  assemble  for  instruction  in  public  halls, 
and  listen  to  addresses,  lectures,  orations,  etc.,  and  some- 
times to  humorous  lectures  and  exhibitions,  and  the 
auditors  sometimes  manifest  their  appreciation  of  the  sub- 
ject, and  theii'  enjoyment  of  the  occasion,  by  uproarious 
hilarity." 

Another  spiiit,  that  of  my  father,  to  whom  I  read  the 
above  descrij)tion,  corroborated  it,  and  added  : 

"  Our  employments  are  as  human  and  natural  as  yours  ; 
such  as  would  engage  your  attention  were  you  Hving  in  a 
beautiful  and  j)erfect,  yet  natural  world,  where  all  were 
harmony  and  happiness,  where  the  cares,  the  sorrows,  the 
dark  misfortunes  and  temptations  of  your  lives  were  un- 
known, and  where,  from  the  perfection  of  your  natures  you 
would  be  capable  of  fully  and  perfectly  enjoying  your  sur- 
roundings. We  have  none  but  proper  and  commendable 
desires,  and  all  these  find  full  and  perfect  gratification. 
We  roam  over  beautiful  meadows,  and  romantic  roads, 
wander  along  the  banks  of  lovely  rivers  and  lakes,  through 


82  TEMPLES,  HALLS  AND  THEATRES. 

grand  parks  and  forests,  and  amid  scenery  beautiful, 
attractive,  and  varied  beyond  description,  or  even  mortal 
conception.  We  have  noble  and  beautiful  homes,  with 
convenient,  spacious  apartments,  elegantly  furnished.  We 
have  inviting  grassy  lav^ns,  luxuriant  flowering  vines,  shrub- 
bery, ornamental  and  fruit-bearing  trees,  and  lovely  gar- 
dens, these  abounding  with  exquisitely  beautiful  flowers, 
of  dehghtful  perfume  and  endless  in  variety  of  form  and 
color. 

We  have  grand  public  halls,  where  discourses  are  de- 
hvered  by  wise  and  noble  spirits,  temples,  where  the  truth 
alone  is  proclaimed,  and  magnificent  theatres,  where  in- 
struction and  amusement  are  combined,  and  which  are 
frequented  at  times  by  all.  We  also  have  opera  houses, 
where  the  finest  and  grandest  operas  are  performed,  and 
concerts,  both  of  vocal  and  instrumental  music  are  common 
with  us.  There  are  public  and  private  libraries,  in  which 
are  to  be  found  the  works  of  sj)irit  authors,  and  also  books 
which  are  copies  or  spiritual  reprints  of  the  best  earthly 
authors,  and  sometimes  these  spiritual  copies  are  obtainable 
by  us  before  the  original  works  are  published  in  your 
world,  each  chapter  being  copied  by  spuit  experts  as  it  is 
completed  by  your  writers. 

We  frequently  visit  earthly  friends  and  places,  and  still 
more  frequently  spirit  friends  in  our  own  heavens,  or  those 
below  ours,  and  much  of  our  time  is  thus  employed,  and 
we  have  the  power  to  visit  foreign  heavens,  and  many  avail 
themselves  of  this  privilege  and  visit  old  friends  in  those 
heavens,  or  friends  whom  they  have  made  in  their  visits 
there,  while  the  principal  object  of  the  visits  of  others  is  to 
observe  and  take  note  of  what  is  there  to  be  seen. 

Not  only  are  there  theatres  and  opera  houses  in  all  the 
heavens  above  the  third,  but  in  the  fourth  and  fifth  there 
also  are  circuses. 


HUNTING   AND   FISHING.  83 

IMi*.  Owen  assures  me  that  lie  frequentl}'"  engages  in 
trout  fishing,  in  the  streams,  and  angles  for  larger  fish  in 
the  lakes,  fish  abounding  in  both,  and  enjoys  the  sjoort 
even  more  keenly  than  he  ever  did  on  earth.  As  spirits 
are  not  permitted  to,  and  in  fact  cannot  destroy  hfe,  after 
cat  chin"'  the  fish  they  detach  them  from  the  hook,  and  re- 
turn  them  to  the  water.  He  says  the  fish  do  not  sujffer 
pain  from  being  hooked.  Spirits  sometimes  hunt  game  in 
the  fields  and  forests.  They  have  fowling  pieces  and  rifles, 
constructed  on  the  principle  of  oui*  air-guns.  Shot  and 
bullets  are  used,  but  no  injury  is  inflicted  by  them.  The 
discharge  is  attended  with  a  report,  which  startles  the 
game,  and  causes  it  to  run  or  fly  away.  As  a  rule,  lads 
enjoy  this  sport  more  than  their  elders. 

Billiai'd  tables  are  almost  as  commonly  in  use  there  as 
here. 

In  riding,  males  use  saddles  and  bridles ;  females  use 
saddles  only.  The  latter  guide  their  horses  by  touching 
them  on  the  sides  of  the  neck,  and  by  speaking  to  them. 
The  Indians  have  exceptionally  fleet  horses,  and  with  them 
chase  deer,  and  use  them  for  the  other  purposes  for  which 
they  formerly  used  horses  on  earth,  including  racing,  and 
they  enjoy  this  sport  as  keenly  as  when  they  engaged  in  it 
on  their  native  plains,  but  in  spirit-life  they  have  for  this 
pui"23ose  beautiful  wide  avenues,  bordered  with  trees,  shrub- 
bery, and  flowers,  and  extending  thi'ough  a  country  equally 
beautiful.  My  Indian  fiiends  tell  me  that  they  pasture 
their  horses  in  meadows,  and  these  know  their  masters  and 
are  obedient  to  their  call.  In  liding  they  use  no  saddles 
or  bridles  but  guide  their  animals  with  their  hands,  the 
least  motion  of  which  is  understood,  their  horses,  like  their 
dogs  and  other  animals,  being  far  more  intelligent  than 
ours.  Many  Indians,  and  esj)ecially  squaws,  in  sx^iiit-life 
retain  their  earthly  tastes  for  basket-making  and  exercise 


84  FAKMS    IN    THE    HEAVENS. 

great  skill  in  the  construction  of  tliese  objects,  fashioning 
them  mto  beautiful  forms  and  combining  the  various  colors 
so  as  to  present  very  pleasing  effects  to  the  eye.  They 
also  construct  canoes  of  bark,  -with  like  skill  and  taste. 
They  procure  the  materials  for  both  then-  baskets  and  ca- 
noes from  the  forests. 

In  all  the  heavens  from  the  third,  at  least  up  to  the  four- 
teenth, there  are  small  farms  of  eight  or  ten  acres  each. 
These  are  occupied  and  cultivated  by  such  spmts  as  are 
most  happy  when  engaged  in  the  cultivation  of  the  soil. 
On  these  farms  are  suitable  and  beautiful  dwellings,  and 
they  are  stocked  with  horses,  cows,  dogs,  and  domestic 
fowl,  and  deer  are  to  be  found  on  some  of  them.  Birds 
here,  as  everywhere  in  the  heavens  above  the  second,  are 
numerous. 

There  are  many  spirits  with  talents  for  invention  who  are 
constantly  employed  in  devising  new  methods  of  accom- 
phshing  known  objects,  or  methods  of  accomphshing  ob- 
jects which  in  themselves  are  new.  The  majority  of  impor- 
tant inventions  are  thus  first  discovered  in  the  si3irit-world, 
and  from  thence  are  imj)ressed  on  the  minds  of  medially 
endowed  uidividuals  on  earth.  In  most  instances  after  an 
invention  is  perfected  in  the  spirit-world  a  spiritual  model 
of  it  is  brought  to  earth,  and  here  sufficiently  materiahzed 
to  test  it  under  earthly  conditions. 

Spirit  mechanics  have  tools  and  imjDlements  of  every  de- 
scription, and  by  their  labor  they  accomplish  as  much  in 
one  day  as  a  mortal,  equally  skiUful  and  correspondingly 
employed,  can  in  a  week. 


"  There  are  celestial  fruits  that  round  their  orbs 
To  perfect  ripeness  in  the  light  that  streams 
From  the  diffusive  sphere  of  Deity, 
And  angels  feed  upon  them  and  grow  wise." 


SPIRITS  ki:quike  sustenance.  85 

The  si3iritnal  bod}'  requires  sustenance  for  its  mainten- 
ance equally  Avith  the  eartlity.  All  spirits,  excei:)ting  those 
who  are  eai'th-bound,  derive  their  sustenance  from  fruit, 
but  the  latter  ai-e  dependent  upon  the  emanations  of  earthly 
food  and  animal  substances,  toQ'ether  A^ith  the  sustaininir 
elements  Avhich  they  absorb  from  certain  mortals  with 
whom  they  are  able  to  come  into  rapport.  This  necessity 
of  the  most  degl'aded  spirits  is  the  origin  of  the  custom 
which  was  prevalent  among  certain  ancient  nations,  and 
equally  obtains  to-day  among  the  Chinese,  of  offering 
cooked  meats  and  other  kinds  of  food  on  the  graves  of  de- 
parted friends.  It  is  also  ^  the  origin  of  the  religious  rite 
of  human  and  animal  sacrifice. 

All,  excepting  this  class  of  spirits,  eat,  drink,  and  digest 
theii'  food  as  when  they  were  in  earth  life.  The  fruit  which 
constitutes  theii'  food  is  of  every  conceivable  variety,  in- 
cluding graj)e3,  berries,  etc.,  and  although  their  princijjal 
di'ink  is  water  yet  they  have  other  drinks,  among  which 
are  "seines  made  fi'om  the  unfermented  juice  of  grapes. 
In  addition  to  these  fruits  the  Indians  have  a  vege- 
table, in  appearance  Hke  the  yam,  which  they  sometimes 
boil  and  eat.  As  nothing  in  the  spirit-world  which  has 
life  can  be  deprived  of  it,  animal  food  in  any  form  is  un- 
known. 

Many  of  the  best  songs  of  earth  originated  in  the  spirit- 
world,  and  have  '  been  communicated  to  mortals,  while 
many  originating  here  are  sung  in  heaven.  The  popular 
songs,  "Sweet  By  and  By"  and  "Best  for  the  Weary" 
originated  there,  and  are  as  great  favorites  there  as 
here.  But  Solomon's  Songs  are  neither  sung  nor  chanted 
there. 

Meetings  for  conference  and  discussion  are  common. 
Moral,  rehgious,  and  occasionally  even  certain  of  our  j)oliti- 
cal  questions  are  there  considered.     These  meetings  are 


86  MEDIUMS    RETAIN    THEIR    POWER. 

held  in  pubKc  halls,  temples,  and  theatres.  The  orders 
of  Masonry  and  Odd-Fellowship  are  perpetuated  there, 
lodges  existing  throughout  the  lower  heavens. 

Medial  j)ower  primarily  pertains  to  the  spiritual  nature, 
certain  material  elements  and  the  vital  forces  of  the  physical 
organism  being  tributary  to  its  exercise,  and  the  spirit  is 
not  divested  of  this  power  in  the  next  life,  but  most  com- 
monly it  continues  to  be  exercised  there,  only  it  is  there 
exercised  in  connection  with  some  earthly  medium,  and 
thus  the  medium  here  more  frequently  than  otherwise 
continues  to  be  a  medium  there  for  a  certain  time,  and 
from  his  medial  experiences  in  this  life  he  in  the  next  is 
enabled  to  exercise  his  powers  more  efficiently  than  he 
otherwise  would. 

Many  intelligent  spirits  note  the  changes  and  progress 
of  earthly  events  with  interest,  and  take  part  in  all  move- 
ments for  the  promotion  of  the  best  interests  of  mankind 
here  below.  The  labors  of  our  earth-life,  where  they  have 
been  directed  to  noble  objects  and  aims,  will  there  be  con- 
tinued, in  view,  either  of  the  same  ends  or  of  others  equally, 
perhaps  more  important.  It  is  natural  for  men  to  dehght 
in  knowledge,  and  to  take  pleasure  in  applying  it.  A 
skiUful  architect  or  mechanic,  if  in  a  normal  condition 
physically  and  mentally,  finds,  perhaps,  his  highest  enjoy- 
ment in  the  exercise  of  his  special  talents,  and  upon  his 
translation  to  spirit-life  he  will  still  possess  the  same 
talents,  and  for  a  time,  at  least,  the  same  tastes  and  habits, 
and  he  will  avail  himself  of  opportunities  to  exercise  his 
talents  in  that  world  where  all  the  conditions  are  so  much 
more  favorable,  and  the  rewards  of  labor,  though  of  a  dif- 
ferent character,  so  much  more  satisfactory  and  abundant. 
But  it  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  he  will  always  be  satisfied 
to  thus  labor,  on  the  contrary,  through  his  labors  for  the 
good  of  others  he  will  after  a  time  advance  to  higher  en- 


HOW  spiRrrs  are  e:mi'loyed.  87 

jovments,  aiid  otliers  will  succeed  liim  in  the  employments 
he  has  relinquished. 

Neither  do  all  skillful  mechanics  and  others  there,  even 
temporarily,  employ  themselves  as  they  did  in  earth-life  ; 
it  is  entirely  optional  with  them  whether  they  do  or  not, 
and  mam^  are  attracted  to  other  occupations.  It  is  the 
same  with  all  others  who  are  differently  endowed  in  re- 
spect to  talents  and  tastes.  All  good  spirits  not  only  de- 
rive pleasure  fi'om  the  simple  exercise  of  their  special 
talents  but  this  pleasure  is  enhanced  by  a  lively  sense  of 
the  hapj)iness  others  derive  from  the  fi'uits  of  their  labors, 
eA*en  as  they  in  tui'n  are  benefited  by  the  labors  of  others. 

The  above  remarks  are  equally  true  of  the  artist,  physi- 
cian, la^Awer,  clergyman,  teacher,  and  business  man,  they 
also  still  possessing  the  talents  and  tastes  which  charac- 
terized them  when  here,  and  these  also  are  most  commonly 
exercised  there.  The  true  artist  there  transfers  to  im- 
perishable canvas  his  ideals  of  grace  and  beauty,  ideals 
which  transcend  anything  which  in  earth-life  his  imagina- 
tion had  conceived.  The  physician  may  seek  to  impress 
the  minds  of  mortals  with  higher  and  more  important 
truths  relating  to  the  heahng  art  than  those  which  he  re- 
alized in  the  flesh,  and  thus  be  able,  though  indirectly,  to 
continue  his  work  of  alleviating  earthly  sickness  and  suf- 
fering. The  lawyer,  if  his  soul  has  been  in  his  profession, 
will  there  search  into  and  endeavor  to  acquire  knowledge 
of  spiritual  laws,  and  principles,  and  perhaps  return  to 
earth  to  impress  receptive  legal  minds  with  the  knowledge 
he  has  obtained.  The  earnest,  sincere,  and  spiritually  en- 
hghtened  clerg^Tiian  will  there  find  congenial  employment 
in  preaching  a  better,  purer,  and  more  rational  religion 
than  he  here  ever  comprehended,  to  the  ignorant  and  de- 
graded dwellers  in  the  second  sphere,  while  at  the  same 
time  he  may  find  his  highest,  though  it  may  be  melancholy 


88  EMPLOYMENTS    CONGENIAL. 

satisfaction,  in  sometimes  returning  to  earth  and  here 
laboring'  to  eradicate  some  of  the  dark  errors  which  he  has 
engTafted  in  the  minds  of  his  fellow  men.  The  teacher 
will  generally  pursue  his  earthly  vocation  for  a  period  of 
time,  the  office  of  teacher  there  being  not  only  a  necessary 
but  a  highly  honorable  one.  The  talents  of  the  business 
man  Avill  not  lie  idle,  for  there  he  will  be  employed,  not  in 
trade  and  barter,  and  the  accumulation  of  wealth,  as  here, 
but  in  dealing  with  spiritual  things,  in  gathering  spiritual 
knowledge,  and  exchanging  his  material  notions  and  errors 
for  heavenly  treasures,  which  he  wiU  dispense  with  a  liberal 
hand  to  those  whose  needs  demand  the  exercise  of  his 
charity  and  love.  Neither  is  the  statesman  without  con- 
genial emj)loyment,  for  he  there  has  a  field  more  extensive 
than  any  here,  in  wliich  he  finds  unlimited  facihties  for  re- 
search, and  observation,  for  the  true  principles  of  political 
science  are  there  understood  and  aj)]3hed,  and  systems  of 
government,  based  on  the  highest  wisdom,  are  in  operation, 
to  which  all  associations  and  individuals  are  subject. 

Many  scientists  after  passing  to  the  next  life  continue 
their  researches  there,  where  they  find,  within  easy  reach, 
all  the  means  necessary  for  their  prosecution,  and  which 
are  known  to  scientists  here.  They  have  their  societies 
and  meetings  where  questions  of  interest  to  them  are  dis- 
cussed, but  scientific  subjects  do  not  occupy  the  attention 
of  American  sj)mts  to  the  extent  they  do  those  in  the  Eng- 
lish, French,  and  German  heavens.  But  a  scientist  like 
Huxley,  or  Tindall,  for  instance,  does  not  ordinarily  in 
spirit-life  possess  as  clear  and  distinct  a  memory  of  his 
special  knowledge  as  he  possessed  on  earth,  and  as  his 
mind  for  so  long  a  period  has  been  absorbed  in  the  pursuit 
of  this  knowledge  he  is  apt  to  seek  to  exercise  it  there  in 
the  same  direction,  and  perhaps,  meeting  with  disappoint- 
ment, from  the  above  cause,  he  turns  to  eai'th  and  mortal 


ALL    CAN    ACQUIRE    EDUCATION.  89 

life  aL»"aiu,  and  here  endeavors  to  find  some  medially  en- 
dowed  brother  scientist  with  whom  he  may  be  able  to  come 
into  rapport,  and  through  him  continue  the  studies  and 
researches  which  death  interrupted.  This  employment  for 
a  time  renders  him  contented,  but  sooner  or  later  he  be- 
comes more  sensible  of  heavenly  attractions,  and  less  re- 
gardful of  earthly,  and  turns  his  attention  in  that  direc- 
tion, and  bidding  farewell  to  earth  he  thenceforth  exercises 
his  talents  in  congenial  and,  perhaps,  corresponding  pur- 
suits in  his  own  world. 

Those  who  have  here  received  but  a  meagre  education 
will  there  have  opportunities'  of  remedying  their  deficien- 
cies in  this  respect,  as  there  are  colleges,  open  to  both 
sexes,  the  methods  of  instruction  being  principally  by  illus- 
trated lectures. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE   HIGHER   HEAVENS — Continued. 

Sunday  Observance.     Titles  and  Names.     Personal  Appearance  of 
Spirits.     Language.     Prevision.     The  Insane  in  Spirit  Life. 

SUNDAY    OBSERVANCE. 

The  observance  of  Sunday  as  a  day  of  rest  from  labor 
and  for  recuperation  of  the  forces  of  mind  and  body,  and 
for  rehgious  and  moral  improvement,  is  interwoven  with 
European  and  American  society,  and  the  day  is  variously 
observed  according  to  the  views  of  its  nature  and  require- 
ments, but  to  all  it  is  a  day  distinct  from  other s^  and  were 
its  observance  to  be  abrogated  the  most  strenuous  o]Dpo- 
sers  of  its  religious  character  would  have  reason  to  regret 
it  equall}^  with  its  most  rigid  observers,  and  in  the  hfe  be- 
yond it  will  still  be  regarded  as  conducive  to  our  well- 
being,  and  happiness,  and  in  fact  its  observance  is  there 
perpetuated. 

In  the  American  heavens  above  the  second  the  day  is 
generally  regarded,  not  as  sacred  in  any  sense,  but  as  a  day 
convenient  and  appropriate  for  the  performance  of  and  at- 
tendance on  religious  services,  and  theatres  and  other 
places  of  amusement  on  that  day  are  closed,  but  those  who 
may  be  disinclined  to  attend  religious  services  frequently 
hsten  to  lectures,  or  addresses,  on  moral  and  other  useful 
subjects,  or  quietly  enjoy  themselves  in  their  homes,  gar- 


MANNER    OF    OIJSKKVANCE.  91 

dens,  and  the  fields,  in  sailing  on  tlie  lakes  and  rivers, 
promenade,  visit  friends,  etc.,  and  generally  conduct  them- 
selves as  most  sensible  and  well-bred  people  here  do  on 
that  day. 

The  ser^dces  in  the  temples — all  places  of  worship  in  the 
heavens  above  the  third  are  termed  temples — are  simple 
in  character,  being  as  nearly  as  possible  free  from  form  and 
ceremony,  and  all  truly  religious  and  moral  truths  are 
proper  subjects  for  consideration.  Dogmatic  and  credal 
articles  of  behef  find  no  place  or  favor  in  the  heavens 
above  the  third,  and  are  ignored  in  these  services. 

Even  to  those  who  in  this'  life  have  been  materialists 
Simday  there  becomes  a  day  of  quiet  moral  and  intellect- 
ual enjoyment,  for  the  noblest,  and  wisest,  and  best  of 
earth's  teachers  are  there  to  instruct  their  fellow-men,  and 
expoimd  important  truths,  some  of  which  they  have  learned 
from  observation  and  experience  in  spirit-life,  and  others, 
mth  which  their  minds  are  inspired,  are  derived  from  ex- 
alted angehc,  perhaps  Deific  sources. 

Sunday,  in  the  American  heavens,  is  the  only  day  which 
is  invested  with  a  pubhc  character.  There  are  no  holidays, 
nor  pubhc  celebration  of  anniversaries. 

TITLES    AKD   NAMES    IN    THE    HEAVENS. 

"  How  loved,  how  honorVl  once  avails  thee  not, 
To  whom  related,  or  by  whom  begot." 

The  record  of  a  good  life  is  there  of  greater  value  and 
commands  more  respect  than  the  earthly  reputation  of  a 
monarch.  The  king  and  his  subject,  the  lord  and  the  peas- 
ant, the  rich  and  the  poor  are  there  equal,  or,  quite  as 
often  as  otherwise,  the  subject  is  above  his  king,  the  ]3eas- 
ant  above  his  lord,  and  the  beggar  above  the  Dives  who 
spurned  him. 


02  EARTHLY  NAMES  PERPETUATED. 

Spirits  are  known  by  the  names  they  bore  in  earth-life, 
and  they  address  each  other  by  these  names.  The  appel- 
lations, Mr.  and  Mrs.,  are  prefixed  to  proj)er  names,  as 
they  are  here,  and  higher  earthly  titles  in  the  lower  Eu- 
ropean heavens  are  frequently  perpetuated  for  a  time,  but 
soon  their  use  is  discontinued.  Among  relatives  our  terms 
expressive  of  degrees  of  relationship  are  familiarly  em- 
ployed, as  also  are  given  or  Christian  names  among  inti- 
mate friends. 

But  there  are  exceptions  to  the  rule  that  spirits  are 
known  by  the  names  they  bore  while  here,  for  spirits  who 
have  on  earth  led  infamous  hves,  and  who  necessarily  are 
on  the  loAvest  planes  of  the  earth,  or  second  sphere,  the 
"hells"  of  Swedenborg,  when  they  have  there  expiated 
their  crimes  and  are  prepared  to  ascend  to  the  third  heaven 
frequently  have  other  names  substituted  for  those  which 
they  hitherto  have  borne,  the  new  names  being  expressive 
or  symbolical  of  their  better,  and  now  dominant  traits  of 
character,  and  these  names  they  are  thereafter  known  by, 
and  those  spirits  who  were  acquainted  with  them  in  earth 
life  are  prohibited  from  addressmg  them  by  their  former 
titles  or  names.  Good  and  pure  spirits,  whose  earthly 
hves  have  been  above  reproach,  would  shrink  from  contact 
with  a  Nero,  or  Jeffreys,  even  though  they  should  meet  him 
as  a  saint  in  heaven.  Any  approach  to  one  who  had  once 
borne  such  a  character  would  be  dictated  by  a  sense  of 
duty,  not  inchnation,  for  spuits  are  yet  human  in  their 
traits  of  character. 

With  children,  who  pass  over  at  an  age  when  they  have 
a  knowledge  of  their  Christian  names,  these  are  generally 
perpetuated  there,  but  when  infants  grow  up  in  spirit  life 
they  are  permitted,  at  a  pro23er  age,  to  adopt  any  Chiistian 
names  they  choose,  but  their  choice  is  often  influenced  by 
the  opinions  of  their  guardians. 


EARTHLY    TITLES.  93 

Eartlily  distinctiou  and  fame,  unless  based  on  sterling 
worth,  are  of  little  acconnt  there.  Many  of  the  reputations 
of  eminent  and  distinguished  men  are  fictitious,  or  ill- 
deserved,  and  such  have  no  standing  there,  while  all  recog- 
nize and  honor  the  reputation  that  has  been  earned  by 
labors  for  the  good  of  mankind.  Such  characters  as  those 
of  Socrates,  Plato,  Jesus,  Wesley,  Wilberforce,  Howard, 
Washington,  FrankHn,  and  Lincohi,  are  as  highly  appre- 
ciated and  honored,  and  their  eminence  as  generally  recog- 
nized there,  as  here,  while  man}"  great  men,  great  in  eartlily 
estimation,  are  there  little  indeed. 

In  the  lower  European  heavens  earthl}'  titles  are  to  some 
extent  recognized,  but  not  in  the  higher.  A  monarch,  in 
the  higher  of  those  heavens,  would  not  receive  homage,  or 
be  addressed  by  his  earthly  titles,  even  by  the  most  humble 
of  his  former  subjects,  and  he  would  there  command  no 
higher  nor  more  general  respect  than  the  latter  simply  on 
account  of  his  former  exalted  position.  Neither  would  it 
be  agreeable  to  him  to  receive  homage  or  be  addressed  by 
his  former  titles.  When  other  titled  persons  of  less  dis- 
tinction pass  over  with  good  records  they  are  there,  for  a 
time  only,  addressed  by  their  titles,  but  these  are  only  sub- 
stitutes for  their  proper  names.  A  nobleman  Avould  be 
addressed  as  Duke, 'or  Lord,  but  not  as  "Your  Grace,"  or 
"Lordship,"  nor  would  a  monarch,  even  in  the  lower 
heavens,  be  commonly  addressed  as  "Your  Majesty."  A 
few  admirers  and  others,  who  yet  continued  to  be  inflii- 
enced  by  the  feelings  of  awe  and  respect  with  which  they 
had  formerly  regarded  royalty,  would  continue  to  emj)loy 
the  same  forms  of  speech  when  addressing  members  of  a 
royal  family,  but  in  time  even  they  would  cease  to  address 
them  in  such  terms,  which  savor  of  flattery  and  servihty. 


\ 


94  THE    AGES    THAT    SPIRITS    APPEAR. 


THE   PERSONAL   APPEARANCE    OF    SPIRITS. 

Eternal  youth  is  the  heritage  of  the  soul.  It  is  said  that 
Washington  Irving,  when  a  young  man,  loved  Matilda 
Hoffman,  and  that  she  died  early,  and  that  true  to  her 
memory  and  his  only  love  he  never  married,  and  in  a  pri- 
vate di'awer  after  his  death  was  found  her  miniature,  and 
a  lock  of  her  hair.  To  a  fiiend  he  said  :  "  She  died  in  the 
beauty  of  youth,  and  to  me  she  will  always  be  young  and 
beautiful."  He  here  had  an  intuitive  perception  of  the 
truth  that  in  the  glory  of  youth  and  beauty  she  would  wel- 
come him  to  the  bright  world  beyond.  She  was  as  true  to 
his  memory  as  he  was  to  hers,  for  the  constancy  of  a  mor- 
tal's love  can  never  excel  that  of  an  angel's. 

In  the  heavens  males  appear  to  be  of  the  age  of  about 
twenty-eight  to  thirty  years,  and  females  about  twenty-five. 
No  spirits  bear  the  appearance  of  advanced  age  to  other 
spirits.  The  reverend,  gray-bearded  ajopearance,  which 
some  spirits  present  when  they  render  themselves  visible 
to  us  thi'ough  the  processes  of  materialization,  is  only  as- 
sumed for  purposes  of  identification. 

Personal  characteristics  are  as  distinctly,  though  not  as 

extremely  marked  in  the  spirit-world  as  they  are  with  us, 

/but  all  who  have  lived  proper  lives  here,  as  also  those  who 

/  have  become  purified  and  elevated  by  repentance,  are  more 

/  beautiful  than  they  were  in  the  flesh,  and  as  they  progress  in 

purity  and  wisdom  they  constantly  become  more  beautiful. 

Ungainly  and  ugly  people  are  no  longer  so  when  they 
have  attained  the  foui'th  heaven,  and  as  they  advance  they 
steadily  become  more  beautiful.  The  features  of  spirits, 
in  degree,  continue  to  be  as  distinctively  characteristic  as 
they  were  here,  but  each  feature  in  time  becomes  a  perfect 
type  of  the  class  of  features  to  which  it  belongs. 


NO    SPIRIT    DWARFS    NOR    GIANTS.  95 

Altliougli  there  ai'e  no  spirits  who  are  extremely  short, 
or  tall,  yet  in  both  these  respects  there  are  degrees  of  dif- 
ference. Certain  spirits  are  taller  or  shorter,  stouter  or 
more  slender,  than  others,  so  that  it  is  proper  to  say  of 
certain  spirits  that  they  are  tall  or  short,  stout  or  slim, 
but,  as  just  remarked,  not  in  the  extreme.  The  compara- 
tive stature  of  males  and  females  is  about  the  same  as  in 
earth-life.  From  what  has  been  said  it  follows  that  there 
are  no  spirit  dwarfs,  nor  giants,  neither  are  there  any  de- 
formed spirits,  excepting  the  comparatively  few  whose 
earthly  deformities  are  temporarily  perpetuated  in  the 
earth  sphei'e,  and  who  are  elsewhere  described.  The  em- 
bodied spirits  of  dwarfs  and  giants  are  contracted  or  ex- 
panded to  the  proportions  of  the  material  body,  but  when 
such  spirits  are  released  by  the  death  of  the  latter  they  as- 
sume normal  proportions.  This  is  in  conformity  with  a 
natui'al  spiiitual  law.  Dwarfs,  like  little  Minnie  Warren, 
and  Tom  Thumb,  when  they  pass  away — the  former  is  now 
in  sj^iiit-life — assume  the  full  stature  and  projjortions  of 
ordinary  men  and  women.  All  spirits  upon  their  entrance 
to  the  tMrd  heaven  are  permitted  to  determine  their  sta- 
ture. Once  determined  it  remains  permanently  fixed.  The 
majority  of  spirits  however  do  not  avail  themselves  of  this 
permission,  being  .satisfied  with  their  natural  stature. 

The  complexions  of  sj^irits  differ  as  with  us.  In  the 
same  heavens  are  to  be  found  light,  and  dark,  and  inter- 
mediate complexions,  and  hair  of  all  shades  of  color,  in- 
cluding red.  The  negroes,  in  the  lowest  of  their  spheres, 
are  as  black  as  they  were  on  earth,  but  as  elsewhere  stated, 
they  become  hghter  in  color  as  they  progress.  When 
spmts  reach  the  fourth  heaven  should  they  earnestly  and 
definitely  desu-e  changes  in  the  color  or  hue  of  their  hair 
the  changes  will  accordingly  be  made  mthout  the  observ- 
ance of  any  conditions,  or  taking  any  other  measures  on 


96  APPEARANCE    REPRESENTS    CONDITION. 

their  part  to  produce  the  desired  results.  The  changes  are 
wrought  by  a  power,  which,  to  them,  is  shrouded  in  mj^stery. 

Some  male  sjoirits  wear  beards,  others  do  not.  Some 
also  wear  side  whiskers,  and  moustaches.  With  each, 
taste  determines  the  form.  They  do  not  shave,  nor  trim 
their  beards.  They  have  only  to  intently  desire  that  these 
shall  assume  a  certain  appearance  and  the  desire  is  grati- 
fied. The  change  generally  occurs  at  night,  when  they 
are  asleep:).  Should  they  desire  to  have  no  beard  their  de- 
sire in  this  respect  is  also  gratified. 

The  personal  appearance  of  spirits,  in  a  general  sense, 
represents  their  condition,  good  spirits  appearing  bright, 
and  happy,  and  beautiful,  while  those  on  low  planes  ap- 
pear the  reverse.  These  are  darker,  appear  unhappy,  their 
countenances  indicate  evil  thoughts,  and  passions,  and  their 
garments  invariably  correspond  in  appearance  to  their 
condition,  being  shabby,  and  mean,  often  actually  torn 
and  ragged.  They  avoid  good  spirits,  when  possible,  and, 
as  a  rule,  equally  avoid  their  resorts  on  earth.  But  the 
different  grades  of  good  spirits  are  not  readily  distinguished 
except  by  their  raiment,  neither  is  it  possible  to  accurately 
classify  the  bad  by  their  appearance.  The  higher  spirits, 
when  perceived  by  mortals  clairvoyantly,  sometimes  ap- 
pear of  a  brightness  which  might  without  exaggeration  be 
termed  dazzling,  but  they  do  not  thus  actually  appear  to 
each  other. 

There  are  no  such  appearances  as  halos,  or  spheres  of 
light,  surrounding  the  heads  of  spirits.  Neither  are  there 
personal  atmospheres  surrounding  spirits,  visible  to  each 
other. 

LANGUAGE   IN    THE    HEAVENS. 

Spirits  can  no  more  communicate  with  each  other  with- 
out the  use  of  speech  than  we  can,  and  two  spirits  of  dif- 


MANY     LANGUAGES    IN    HEAVEN.  97 

ferent  nationalities  meeting,  and  not  understanding  the 
language  of  each  other,  Avoald  labor  under  as  many  diffi- 
culties in  attempting  to  comnumicate  as  they  would  in  the 
flesh. 

Swedenborg  in  his  Heaven  and  Hell,  ^  236,  says  that 
there  is  but  one  lani2iiao'e  used  throuoiiout  heaven.  This 
is  an  error,  for  as  many  languages  are  spoken  there  as  on 
earth,  nationalities  and  languages  in  all  the  heavens  that 
T\'e  have  any  knowledge  of,  being  as  positive  and  distinct 
facts  there  as  here,  but  in  the  higher  heavens  there  is 
reason  to  believe  that  there  is  a  steady  approximation  to 
unity  of  language,  while  at  the  same  time  strictly  national 
traits,  habits,  and  feelings  fade,  and  ultimately  disappear. 

There  ai'e  two  w^ays  in  which  the  knowledge  of  languages, 
other  than  their  own,  may  become  useful  to  spirits  ;  first,  in 
visiting  the  inhabitants  and  exploring  the  heavens  of  other 
nationahties,  and  searching  therr  libraries  and  records  ; 
and  second,  in  communicating  through  mediums  here 
with  foreigners.  For  any  other  than  these  purjDoses  such 
knowledge  is  of  little  or  no  service  in  the  heavens. 


PEEVISION    OF    SPIRITS. 

Foreknowledge  of  earthly  events  is  dependent  on  a  fac- 
ulty possessed  by  comparatively  few  spirits,  the  great 
majority  of  them  being  quite  as  ignorant  of  events  in  the 
futui'e  as  we  are.  But  certain  spirits  are  endowed  with 
the  faculty  of  precision,  and  these  are  to  be  found  in  all 
the  heavens  above  the  third,  while  in  the  highest  heavens 
there  are  advanced  spmts  who  are  endowed  in  an  eminent 
degree  with  the  gift  of  clairvoyance,  so  that  they  are  able 
to  directly  and  plainly  perceive  whatever  they  desire  in  re- 
lation to  eartlily  events  and  cii'cumstances  in  the  present, 
5 


98  PREVISION    UNCOI^IMON. 

and  in  the  future,  and  they  either  of  themselves,  or  in  as- 
sociation with  others,  perhaps  still  more  exalted,  largely 
influence  and  even  determine  the  course  and  character  of 
many  earthly  human  events,  always  exercising  their  power 
for  the  attainment  of  important  and  worthy  objects. 

But  it  is  only  of  those  in  the  lower  heavens  that  we  have 
any  definite  knowledge  as  to  their  power  of  divination,  I 
know  of  one  spirit,  now  in  the  ninth  heaven,  who  is  gifted 
with  the  faculty  of  perceiving  future  earthly  events,  and 
his  prevision  is  ordinarily  Hmited  to  a  period  of  three  years. 
He  also  is  unable,  except  on  rare  occasions,  to  perceive 
the  precise  times  of  the  occurrence  of  the  events  he  pre- 
dicts. He  perceives  that  certain  events  will  or  wiU  not 
take  place  within  the  period  of  time  to  which  his  prevision 
is  Hmited.  But  there  are  other  spirit  seers  in  these  heav- 
ens whose  clairvoyance  penetrates  the  future  to  a  greater 
extent,  and  who  are  able  to  foresee  the  precise  times  at 
which  more  distant  events  will  occur. 

My  communication  with  this  prescient  spirit  has  been 
exclusively  through  one  of  my  mstructors,  Mr.  Bernard, 
and  the  latter's  account  of  the  way  in  VN^hich  the  desired 
information  is  obtained  may  interest  some  of  my  readers, 
as  it  certainly  did  me.  Mr.  Bernard  says  that  when  he 
desires  knowledge  relating  to  the  future  he  visits  Mr. 
Puixly,  at  his  home,  in  the  ninth  heaven  where  the  latter 
has  a  large  room,  which  he  terms  his  sitting  room,  and 
which  is  devoted  to  such  purposes.  Here  both  become 
seated,  Mr.  Purdy  in  a  chair  w^hich  he  invariably  occu- 
pies when  he  attempts  to  divine  the  future,  and  after  a  few 
moments  of  silence  he  becomes  unconscious,  apparently 
passing  into  a  gentle  slumber,  when  he  is  in  a  condition  to 
impart  information  upon  the  subject  ]3resented,  replying  to 
any  questions  relating  to  that  subject,  but  to  none  relating 
to  any  other,   and  when  these  questions  have  been  an- 


A    SE^mCE   IN   THE   HEAVENS.  99 

swered  lie  resumes  his  former  natural  state,  and  then  re- 
members nothing  whatever  that  has  been  said  during  his 
entrancement.  Although  only  one  subject  may  be  consid- 
ered at  one  seance,  a  second  seance  may  succeed  the  first 
after  a  brief  interval  of  time,  when  another  subject  may  be 
presented  for  consideration. 

My  Spiritualist  readers  will  readily  recognize  this  as  a 
desciiption  of  a  seance  with  an  entranced  clairvoyant,  such 
a  seance  as  most  Spirituahsts  have  frequently  participated 
in,  and  w^e  laiow  that  the  intelligence  back  of  the  earthly 
cLiii'voyant  medium  is  a  disembodied  spiiit,  but  who,  or 
what,  is  the  intelligence  back  of  this  clairvoyant  spirit  ?  It 
is  a  stai'tling  question,  or  at  least  was  and  is  to  me,  and  at 
some  future  time  will  be  fui'ther  considered. 

It  is  a  law  of  spirit  life  that  when  good  spirits  earnestly 
desire  particular  gifts,  the  exercise  of  which  wiU  conduce 
to  their  own  happiness,  or  that  of  others,  and  to  the  ac- 
comphshment  of  worthy  and  iiseful  purposes,  such  desires 
shall  be  gTatified.  In  whatever  pursuits  such  spirits  may 
engage,  if  these  be  laudable  and  useful,  powers  are  con- 
ferred which  assist  in  the  attainment  of  the  objects  desu'ed, 
the  faculties  employed  are  strengthened,  and  developed, 
and  sometimes  even  new  faculties  seem  to  be  bestowed. 
Thus  prevision,  clau-yoyance,  and  psychological  and  healing 
power  when  exercised  by  such  spirits,  for  good  purposes, 
are  wonderfully  developed.  This  is  strikingly  illustrated 
in  the  cases  of  guardian  spuits,  who,  when  appointed  to 
their  offices  are  alwaj^s  endowed  with  the  power  of  per- 
ceiving every  thought,  and  hearing  every  word  uttered  by 
their  w^ards,  and  in  addition  to  this,  of  frequently  foresee- 
ing events  relating  to  them  in  the  immediate  future.  Many 
people  here  are  sadly  deficient  in  a  capacity  for  music,  poe- 
try, or  painting,  but  if  there  they  earnestly  covet  any  one  or 
all  of  these  talents  they  w^ill  be  developed  in  them,  and  some- 


100  MORTAL    CAPABILITIES    FORESEEN. 

times  witli  amazing  rapidity,  to  the  astonislimeut  of  them- 
selves and  others.  Musical  and  poetical  harmony  not  only 
perv^ade  the  soul  of  ever}^  li^^PPJ  spirit,  but  all  such  spirits 
are  able  to  give  expression  to  their  feehngs  and  sentiments 
through  voices  and  instruments  that  faithfully  reflect  the 
inward  beauty  and  purity  of  theu'  souls. 

The  j)recise  times  of  the  deaths,  or  recovery  fi'om  disease 
of  persons,  have  m  many  instances  been  predicted  by  them- 
selves. These  persons  are  always  sensitives,  or  mediums, 
and  the  sources  of  the  information  are  clairvoyant  spirits, 
most  commonly  the  guardians  of  the  persons,  whose  minds 
they  impress  with  tliis  knowledge,  or,  as  is  often  the  case, 
whose  organs  of  speech  they  control  to  give  utterance  to  the 
prediction.  Similar  information  concerning  the  future  of 
others  sometimes  comes  through  professional  medimns, 
from  like  sources.  What  are  termed,  presentiments,  are 
generally  warnings  or  intimations  of  something  to  occui'  in 
the  future  impressed  on  the  mind  by  gTiardian  spii'its. 

That  the  future  capabilities  of  every  important,  human 
instiTiment  for  good  are  distinctly  foreseen  by  certain  ad- 
vanced inteUigences,  and  that  such  individuals  are  carefully 
guarded  and  guided,  I  am  well  convinced,  not  only  from 
the  assurances  of  my  invisible  instructors,  but  also  from 
independent  conclusions.  Whatever  free  moral  agency 
may  be  to  others,  to  them,  excepting  within  exceedingly 
circumscribed  hmits,  it  hardly  exists.  They  are  instru- 
ments for  the  accomphshment  of  ends,  and  if  these  ends 
be  important,  interests,  objects,  and  individuals  that  are 
obstacles  to  their  attamment  are  sacrificed,  and  even  the 
temporal  comfort  and  hajopiness  of  the  mstrument  himself 
sometimes  are  subjected  to  the  same  fate.  But  in  the  latter 
event  he  is  richly  compensated  in  the  next  life  for  all  his 
sufferings  and  disappointments  in  this. 


WHAT    SPIRITS    ARE    INSANE.  "  101 


THE    INSANE    IN    SPIRIT    LIFE. 


There  are,  properly  speaking,  no  insane  spirits  except 
those  in  the  earth-sj)here  and  who  previous  to  their  insanity 
were  degraded  spiritually,  and  morally.  These  frequently 
continue,  in  some  degree,  insane  for  a  considerable  period 
of  time,  their  spiritual  condition  not  being  favorable  to 
their  restoration,  and  here  they  are  often  attracted  to 
mortals  with  like  tendencies,  whom  they  obsess,  and 
throuf^'h  whom  they  ventilate  their  own  disordered  fan- 
cies,  or  even  worse,  impel  to  acts  of  violence.  Persons 
on  higher  planes  who  enter  the  spirit-world  insane  are  at 
once  conducted  to"  the  thu'd  heaven.  These,  most  com- 
monly, are  not  permitted  to  revisit  the  earth,  for  should 
they  do  so  they,  in  a  gTeater  or  less  degree,  would  resume 
then-  former  msane  condition  and  feelings,  and  should 
they  then  come  into  relations  with  insane  mortals,  or  with 
mediums,  then-  insanity  would  return  in  full  force,  and 
might  be  manifested  through  these  channels  injurious- 
ly. But  individuals  of  this  class,  whose  former  insanity 
was  of  a  harmless  character,  are  sometimes  permitted 
to  return,  and  thi'ough  mediums  they  sometimes  proclaim 
themselves  to  be  Jes.us,  Paul,  Socrates,  or  Julius  Csesar,  or 
some  other  celebrity,  or  perhaps  even  God  Himself.  There 
are  infirmaries  in  the  second  and  third  heavens  for  those 
who  have  died  insane,  and  all  such,  excepting  the  most  de- 
graded, are  conveyed  directly  to  one  of  these,  as  also  are 
all  idiots  and  imbeciles.  The  insane  very  soon  recover 
their  reason,  but  idiots  require  j^rotracted  treatment  to  de- 
velop their  dormant  faculties,  but  under  the  kind  ministra- 
tions of  the  angels  they  steadily  progress,  and  in  time  reach 
the  plane  of  average  intelligence,  and  sometimes  outstrip 
originally  brighter  minds. 


102  SPIRITUAL    BODY    INDESTRUCTIBLE. 

When  a  person  is  bloT^ii  into  fragments  by  an  explosion, 
caused  by  nitro-giycerine,  steam,  or  gunpowder,  his  spiritual 
body  is  not  disintegTated  or  torn  asunder  as  his  material 
body  is,  and  although  it  be  utterly  prostrated  and  helpless 
its  integrity  yet  remains,  and  it  is  conveyed  in  the  arms 
of  sympathizing  spirit  friends  to  one  of  these  infirmaries, 
where  it  is  tenderly  cared  for  until  it  is  fully  restored. 
The  treatment  consists  of  rest,  magnetism,  and  proper 
nourishment.  The  worst  cases  generally  soon  recover. 
These  infirmaries  are  to  be  found  only  in  the  second  and 
third  heavens. 


CHAPTER  Vn. 

THE  HIGHER  HEAVENS — Continued. 

Wherein  Spirits  Differ.     Marriage.     Family  Kelations.     Children. 

Animals. 

WHEEEIN    SPIRITS    DEETEE. 

"We  are  told  in  the  Bible  that  angels  differ  "  as  one  star 
differ eth  from  another  star  in  glory."  This  declaration  is 
substantiated  by  the  revelations  of  Spirituahsm.  As  indi- 
viduals of  all  shades  of  character,  of  all  moral  and  intellec- 
tual gTades,  are  constantly  passing  from  this  hfe  to  the 
next,  and  as  nothing  essentially  pertaining  to  moral 
character  or  mind  is  immediately  gained,  lost,  or  changed  by 
death,  it  follows  that  the  inhabitants  of  that  world,  in  all 
these  respects,  are  as  diverse  as  the  inhabitants  of  this, 
and  so  far  as  this  diversity  appHes  to  the  mind  and  intel- 
lect it  still  exists,  in  less  degree,  in  the  highest  heavens. 
Equahty  is  chiefly  in  respect  to  happiness,  all  s]oirits  in 
the  same  heavens  being  equally  happy.  In  the  highest 
heavens  that  my  instructors  have  any  knowledge  of,  the 
educated  and  uneducated,  the  intellectual  and  unintellec- 
tual  are  to  be  found  associated,  and  this  is  evidently  a 
vd^Q  provision  for  the  imjorovement  and  elevation  of  the 
originally  less  fortunate,  ^ith  whom  the  more  fortunate 
are  there  brought  directly  or  indirectly  into  constant  re- 
lations, and  by  this  means  the  former  are  enabled  to  ad- 


lOi  DIVERSITY    AMONG    SriRITS. 

vance  to  liigiier  and  yet  liiglier  planes,  and  thus  wisdom 
and  love  ever  march  hand  m  hand  in  the  paths  of  pro- 
gression. As  spirits  progress  their  capacity  for  the  re- 
ceptio]!  and  assimilation  of  knowledge  is  enlarged  and 
they  receive  all  they  are  capable  of  receiving. 

If  food,  raiment,  etc.,  be  excepted,  in  most  other  re- 
spects spirits  are  as  dependent  on  each  other  for  enjoy- 
ment as  we  are.  Those  who  abound  in  knowledge  or  love 
find  their  highest  pleasure  in  imparting  of  it  to  those  who 
are  deficient  in  either  of  these  respects,  and  these  are 
equally  happy  in  receiving  what  is  so  freely  bestowed,  and 
are  able,  and  glad,  to  impart  something  in  return.  Al- 
though virtue  does  not  confer  talent  yet,  as  a  source  of 
happiness,  it  supplies  its  place,  and  goodness  and  purity 
are  more  necessary  to  progression  in  that  hfe  than  wisdom, 
and  in  the  higher  heavens  the  diversity  in  respect  to  wis- 
dom and  knowledge  is  not  as  great  as  with  us,  for  the 
minds  of  the  simple  and  ignorant  there  unfold  more  rapidly 
than  they  do  here  under  the  most  favorable  circumstances. 
Still  diversity  exists,  not  only  in  respect  to  wisdom  and 
knowledge,  but  to  taste  and  refinement,  and  there  are 
nearly  as  many  different  social  and  intellectual  circles 
as  in  society  on  earth.  But  distinctions  there  are  not  arbi- 
trary, and  as  too  often  here,  based  on  selfish,  interested, 
and  unworthy  considerations.  Merit  first,  then  taste  and 
inclination,  are  at  the  bases  of  all  distinctions  there,  and 
determine  each  one's  position  in  regard  to  all  others,  and 
each  is  most  happy  in  his  relations  to  the  particular  circle 
in  which  he  moves.  The  law  throu^'h  which  individuals  of 
like  tastes  and  inclinations  sympathize  with  and  are  attracted 
to  each  other,  operates  in  the  spirit  world  as  here,  and  all 
are  within  the  sphere  of  its  operation  excepting  certain 
undeveloped  spirits  on  the  lowest  planes,  who  may  for  a 
time  be  condemned  to  isolation.     It  follows,  that  there  are 


CEETAIX    SPIKITS    INSTRUCT    OTHERS.  105 

numerous  circles  or  societies  in  every  heaven,  all  equally 
pervaded  witli  tlie  spirit  of  love  and  every  spirit  sustains 
relations  to  some  society.  Even  in  the  lowest  spheres 
there  are  societies  or  circles  of  criminals,  drunkards,  glut- 
tons, debauchees,  gamblers,  misers,  etc.,  in  which  selfish- 
ness reigns  supreme. 

There  are  as  many  there  who  look  to  others  for  guidance 
and  direction  as  there  are  here.  There  are  many  saints  of 
both  sexes  in  heaven  who  are  as  helpless,  and  nearly  as 
useless,  as  they  ever  were.  But  their  incapacity  is  not  of 
itself  accounted  a  sin,  and  gradually  they  become  sensible 
of  their  deficiencies,  and  are  stimulated  to  exertion,  which 
results  in  improvement.  They  are  simply  deficient  in 
mental  force  and  energy.  There  are  leading  minds  in  all 
the  heavens,  and  there  could  be  no  leaders  were  it  not  that 
the  majority  requu-e  to  be  led.  But  there  the  exercise  of 
their  influence  is  natural,  and  proper,  and  is  not  associated 
with  pride,  vanity,  and  selfishness,  but  is  always  exercised 
m  a  wise  and  lo^ang  spirit,  and  for  the  common  good. 
Many  here  weakly  covet  the  special  talents  of  others,  while 
perhaps  underestimating  and  neglecting  the  value  of  dif- 
ferent, but  perhaps  equally  useful  and  important  talents, 
which  they  may  possess,  but  there  no  such  selfish  compari- 
sons are  made,  each  simply  striving,  more  or  less  earnestly, 
to  improve  the  talents  with  which  he  has  been  endowed. 
Ever}"  man  in  that  life  is  what  he  earnestly  strives  to  be. 

Growth,  both  moral  and  intellectual,  in  the  spirit-world 
is  gradual,  but  more  rapid  than  it  is  here.  There  is  no  re- 
trogi'ession,  neither  are  there  any  sudden  leaps  in  progres- 
sion, but  when  the  upward  course  is  once  entered  uj)on  it 
is  steady  and  continuous,  if  we  excej)t  the  rare  instances  in 
which  it  is  temporarily  interrupted  as  a  result  of  disobedi- 
ence to  the  commands  of  higher  powers,  as  elsewhere 
noticed.  These  are  the  teachings  of  all  advanced  spirits, 
5* 


100  PROGRESSION    GRADUAL. 

and  they  all  equally  agree  in  declaring  it  to  be  their  opinion 
that  progression  for  every  human  soul  is  eternal. 

"  The  new  must  e'er  supplant  the  old 
While  time's  unceasing  current  flows, 
Only  new  beauties  to  unfold, 
And  brighter  glories  to  disclose." 

In  that  world  every  soul  unerringly  gravitates  to  that 
plane,  and  is  surrounded  by  those  conditions,  that  are  best 
suited  to  his  requirements  and  present  or  future  happiness. 
Advancement  keeps  pace  with  the  improvement  which  jus- 
tifies it,  and  no  spirit,  however  pure  and  happy  he  may  be, 
would  be  equally  happy  were  he  to  prematurely  advance 
even  to  the  next  heaven  above  his  own.  Mr.  Owen,  who, 
while  his  home  was  in  the  fifth  heaven  was  permitted  to 
visit  the  higher  heavens,  up  to  the  fifteenth,  and  my  father, 
who,  while  in  the  sixth  was  permitted  to  visit  the  ninth,  both 
told  me  that  their  feelings  did  not  harmonize  with  sur- 
rounding objects  and  scenes  in  those  heavens,  and  not- 
withstanding the  superiority  of  all  things  there  after  re- 
maining a  short  time,  and  partially  satisfying  their  curi- 
osity, they  experienced  a  desire  to  return.  They  did  not 
feel  at  home,  they  felt  that  they  were  out  of  place,  and  not 
quahfied  to  inhabit  those  heavens. 

Happiness,  hke  knowledge,  and  wealth,  to  be  fully  appre- 
ciated must  be  gradually  attained.  "  If  God,"  says  Lessing, 
were  to  hold  in  His  right  hand  all  truth,  and  in  His  left 
the  everlasting  active  desire  for  truth,  though  veiled  in 
eternal  error,  and  were  to  bid  me  choose,  I  would  humbly 
grasp  His  left,  praying,  'Almighty  Father  grant  me  this 
gift,  absolute  truth  is  for  Thee  alone.'" 

All  the  faculties  of  the  mind  are  exercised  with  greater 
clearness  and  force  in  spirit-life,  and  all  good  spirits  have 
a  never-ceasing  desire  for  advancement,  their  past  experi- 


ATHEISM  THERE  UNKNOWN.  lOT 

ence  teacliing  tliem  tliat  iu  each  successive  heaven  their 
happiness  has  been  increased,  and  that  each,  successively, 
is  more  beautiful  than  that  below  it,  and  this  desire  mcites 
them  to  constant  efforts  to  elevate  themselves,  morally  and 
intellectually.  But  they  are  not  impatient,  the  desire  be- 
ing a  calmly  expectant  one  and  they  know  it  will  in  due 
time  be  gratified,  and  this  knowledge  is  a  source  of  happi- 
ness to  them. 

No  event  occurs  in  spirit-life  corresponding  to  the  death 
of  the  material  body  in  earth-life.  In  passing  from  lower 
to  higher  heavens  spirits  experience  no  change  other  than 
that  of  an  increase  of  ha23j)iness.  The  only  change  which 
precedes  this  step,  and  leads  to  it,  is  steady  progress  in  love 
and  wisdom.  As  it  is  with  us,  the  steps  by  which  angels 
rise  are  built  of  good  deeds,  and  thoughts,  and  words  of 
kindness  and  love. 

There  are  no  Atheists  in  the  heavens  above  the  third,  and 
very  soon  after  entering  that  heaven  a  God-denying  spirit, 
if  of  average  inteUigence,  comes  to  appreciate  his  condition 
and  surroundings,  and  to  perceive  the  hand  of  God  in 
eveiything,  and  every  doubt  of  the  existence  of  an  Al- 
mighty, All  Wise,  and  Beneficent  Power  is  banished  fi'om 
his  mind.  The  faith  of  the  higher  spirits  in  man's  immor- 
tahty  is  absolute,  and  this  perfect  conviction  is  their  prin- 
cipal argTiment  in  support  of  its  truth.  They  regard  the 
human  soul  as  a  pure  coin  from  the  mint  of  Deity,  with 
God's  own  image  impressed  upon  it,  so  that  its  true  nature 
and  quahty  shall  be  recognized  throughout  the  universe, 
and  thi'ough  the  ages  of  eternity. 

A  good  and  true  earthly  record  is  a  passport  to  the  best 
associations  there.  That  earthly  character  does  carry 
weight  in  the  next  life,  as  before  remarked,  is  certainly 
true,  and  the  following  anecdote  illustrates  the  fact. 

At  one  of  our  meetings  in  Januar^'^,   1878,  Mr.   Owen 


108  ME.  Owen's  inquiries. 

asked  me  whether  I  formerly  had  known  in  San  Francisco 

a  gentleman  of  the  name  of  B G .    He  said  he  had 

lately  made  the  acquaintance  of  a  spirit  of  this  name,  who 
told  him  that  he  knew  me  in  that  city,  about  eighteen 
years  ago.  Many  ^^ears  since  he  was  engaged  in  mercan- 
tile business  in  New  York,  and  in  the  early  days  of  Cah- 
fornia  he  emigrated  to  San  Francisco,  where  after  some 
years  he  died.  He  informed  Mr.  Owen  of  an  occurrence 
in  which  he  and  I  alone  were  concerned,  and  also  in  other 
ways  identified  himself  satisfactorily  to  me.  The  particular 
object  IVIr.  Owen  had  in  view  in  communicating  this  to  me 
was,  he  said,  to  ascertain  what  this  gentleman's  character 
had  been  when  here,  as  fi'om  their  frequently  meeting  they 
might  become  more  intimate,  and  his  character  when  here 
would  to  some  extent  determme  the  degree  of  that  inti- 
macy in  the  future. 

For  the  information  of  Mr.  Owen's  friends  I  will  here  say 
that  "  Violet "  has  been  for  many  years,  and  still  is,  the 
companion  of  his  wife.  Her  home  is  with  his  family  in  the 
spirit-world. 

The  only  exception  I  have  found  to  the  rule,  that  un- 
happiness  is  unknown  in  heaven,  is  that  young  children  of  a 
sensible  age,  after  their  separation  by  death  from  their 
parents,  mourn  their  absence.  But  their  grief  is  of  short 
duration,  and  it  seems  to  be  permitted  for  the  purpose  of 
impressing  upon  their  tender  minds,  in  indelible  characters, 
the  remembrance  of  their  parents,  and  their  love  for  them, 
so  that  their  own  love  shall  not  fade,  but  shall  respond  to 
that  of  the  parents  when  the  final  reunion  shall  take  place 
through  the  death  of  the  latter. 


IMARKIAGK    IS    THERE    KNOAVN.  1()9 

MARRIAGE   IN    THE    HEAVENS. 

"  For  in  the  resuiToction  the}'  neither  marry  nor  are  given  in  marriage,  but  are  as 
the  angels  of  God  in  heaven." — JIatt.  xxii.  oO. 

Marriage,  as  it  was  regarded  by  the  Jews  in  the  time  of 
Jesus,  is,  as  he  declared  it  to  be,  unknown  in  the  heavens. 
With  them  it  was  not  the  union  of  equals,  nor  necessarily 
of  two  kindred  souls  constituting  a  perfect  whole,  but  the 
v^-iie  was  regarded  as  an  inferior,  an  appendage  of  the 
household,  a  seiwant,  often  bought  with  the  husband's 
money,  whom  he  could  divorce  or  discharge  from  his  ser- 
vice for  shght  causes,  and  with  little  formahty.  It  is  very 
true  that  "they  neither  marry  nor  are  given  in  marriage" 
in  this  sense  in  the  heavens,  but  all  sj)irits,  sooner  or  later, 
either  renew  theii'  marriage  relations  or  enter  the  married 
state.  Their  happiness  othermse  would  not  be  perfect ; 
they  would  constitute  discordant  elements  where  all  is 
harmony. 

]Many  marriages  on  earth  are  for  time  only,  but  it  is  satis- 
factory to  know  that  the  majority  are  for  eternity.  Wliile 
death  divorces  many  it  also  forever  unites  in  the  bonds  of 
love  and  affection  many  more.  If  husband  and  wife  are 
not  here  proj)eiiy  mated,  if  they  are  discordant  in  senti- 
ment and  feehng,  no  reunion  there  takes  place,  but  each 
party  sooner  or  later  forms  a  harmonious  and  happy  union 
with  another,  and  whether  husband  and  wife  are  reunited, 
or  new  relations  formed,  the  union  is  forever.  Neither 
outgrows  the  other,  their  progress  is  equal.  Thenceforth 
they  are  one  in  thought  and  feeling.  The  two  constitute 
a  perfect  whole,  the  rounded  being. 

All  who  pass  to  spuit-hfe  unmari-ied,  sooner  or  later 
marry,  but  some  remain  single  for  many  years.  A  brother, 
who  died  at  the  age  of  sixteen,  married  in  the  spirit-world 
nine  years  since,  at  the  age  of  fifty,  counting  the  united 


110  SPIEITS   AS   MATCH-MAKEES. 

years  of  liis  earthly  and  spiritual  existence.  Two  sisters, 
wlio  ]3assed  away  when  I  was  a  youth,  are  not  yet  married, 
while  on  the  other  hand  an  infant  daughter,  who  now 
should  be  twenty-eight  years  of  age,  was  married  five  years 
since,  and  my  first-born  child,  a  son,  who  entered  spirit- 
hfe  at  the  age  of  four  years,  thirty  years  ago,  has  been  en- 
gaged to  be  married  about  three  years.  From  his  case  it 
will  be  perceived  that  there  are  such  things  as  protracted 
courtships,  as  well  as  marriages,  in  heaven. 

Unmarried  spirits  generally  make  their  homes  with  the 
famihes  of  their  relatives,  or  friends.  Wlien  marriages 
take  place  in  the  heavens  the  wife  assumes  the  surname  of 
the  husband,  as  in  earthly  marriages.  Earthly  marriages 
are  frequently  brought  about  by  spiiit  fiiends  of  the  parties, 
often  with  happy  results,  and  sometimes  the  results  are 
quite  different,  and  these  well-disposed  but  mistaken  spirit- 
friends  are  brought  to  reahze  that  their  intervention  has 
been  most  unfortunate.  Then  again,  in  certain  compara- 
tively rare  instances,  marriages  with  us  are  the  results  of 
the  schemes  of  vicious  spirits,  and  such  unions  necessarily 
are  lamentable,  misery  being  the  inevitable  lot  of  one,  or 
both  parties. 

There  is  no  truth  in  the  opinion,  held  by  some,  that 
people  are  born  in  pairs,  male  and  female,  and  predestined 
for  each  other. 

The  ceremony  of  marriage  in  the  heavens  is  very  simple. 
When  the  parties  have  determined  on  a  union  they  an- 
nounce their  engagement,  and  at  the  proper  time  assemble 
their  friends,  and  in  their  presence  declare  their  intentions. 
The  choice  is  always  aj)proved,  as  it  cannot  be  otherwise 
than  suitable,  and  the  declaration  on  the  part  of  the  con- 
tracting parties,  with  the  felicitations  of  their  friends  con- 
stitute the  entire  ceremony.  This  is  followed  by  a  feast, 
and  generally  v/ibh  music  and  dancing. 


AFFECTION    SURVIVES    DEATH.  Ill 

The   approved   and   liappy  marriages  of  tlieir  eartlily 
friends  ai-e  frequently  celebrated  by  tliem  in  like  manner. 


FAMILY   RELATIONS   IN   THE   HEAVENS. 

'  By  a  power  to  thought  unknown, 

Love  shall  ever  seek  its  own  ; 

Sundered  not  by  time  or  space, 
"VYith  no  distant  dwelling  place. 

Soul  shall  answer  unto  soul, 

As  the  needle  to  the  pole." — Doten, 

Simple  family  relationship,  in  itself,  has  there  no  bind- 
ing force,  but  its  ties  are  not  severed  by  death,  for  where 
in  this  life  affection  has  existed  between  relatives,  or  others, 
it  continues  in  the  next,  and  generally  is  there  augmented. 
The  husband  and  wife,  parent  and  child,  brother  and  sister, 
that  are  here  united  in  the  bonds  of  spiritual  affinity,  are 
reunited  in  the  spirit-world,  and  no  power  can  separate 
them,  but  where  this  spiritual  attraction  does  not  exist, 
even  should  they  inhabit  the  same  heaven,  they  will  be  as 
indifferent  to  each  other  as  if  the  ties  of  relationship  had 
never  existed. 

But  it  is  rarely  the  case  that  all  the  members  of  a  family 
find  themselves  in  the  same  heaven  when  the  last  of  them 
has  passed  over.  InteUigence,  spirituahty,  morality,  age 
and  other  considerations  enter  as  factors  in  determming 
the  heaven  that  a  spirit  shaU  first  enter,  as  weU  as  the 
length  of  time  he  shall  remain  in  it.  If  the  parents  be  of 
advanced  age  when  they  enter  the  spirit-world,  and  have 
lived  good  and  true  hves,  they  advance  with  comparative 
raj)idity,  while  one  of  their  children,  of  mature  age,  of 
equally  true  character,  dying  about  the  same  time,  might 
enter  the  same  heaven  mth  them,  say  the  third,  and  not 
advance  beyond  the  fourth,  while  they  have  passed  upward 
to  the  fifth  or  sixth.     The  difference  here  in  the  rate  of 


112  FAMILIES    ARE    KEUNITED. 

progression  may  not  be  at  all  dependent  on  moral  char- 
acter, nor  intelligence,  etc.,  but  simply  on  earthly  attrac- 
tions, these  being  very  feeble  with  the  parents,  but  perhaps 
quite  active  with  the  adult  child.  But  afterwards  this  child 
will  overtake  the  parents  if  he  desires  to  reunite  with  them. 

It  frequently  happens  with  a  family  that  when  the  last 
member  passes  over  he  may  enter  the  third  heaven  while 
the  other  members,  who  have  preceded  him,  may  be  dis- 
tributed through  the  other  heavens,  ujd  to  the  sixth  or 
seventh  ;  in  this  case  those  in  the  highest  heavens  will  re- 
main there  until  the  others  overtake  them,  when  all  will  be 
reunited,  and  thereafter  advance  together,  and  so  far  as 
we  know,  for  all  eternity.  Nor  should  it  be  supposed  that 
the  members  of  such  a  family,  who  are  in  the  lower  heav- 
ens, and  who  have  lived  proper  lives  on  earth  feel  in  any 
degree  humiliated  by  their  temporarily  lower  position,  for 
they  fully  realize  that  they  are  not  there  as  a  punishment, 
but  for  the  reason  that  in  those  heavens  they  can  best  be 
prepared  to  enjoy  the  happiness  of  the  higher  heavens. 
Nor  do  they  suffer  for  lack  of  the  society  and  companion- 
ship of  their  relatives  in  the  heavens  above  them,  for  these 
visit  them,  perha|)s  daily,  and  possibly  are  with  them  the 
greater  portion  of  the  time,  and  although  their  happiness 
is  not  equal  to  that  of  those  above  them,  yet  they  are  far 
from  being  miserable. 

In  November,  1877,  my  spirit  father  informed  me  that 
he  and  my  mother  had  removed  from  the  eighth  to  the 
seventh  heaven.  He  said  that  a  spirit  from  a  higher  heaven 
had  visited  him,  at  his  home,  and  notified  him  that  he  and 
my  mother  were  at.  liberty  to  advance  to  the  ninth.  He 
rephed,  that  it  would  afford  them  greater  pleasure  to  re- 
turn to  the  seventh,  so  as  to  be  nearer  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Owen, 
who  then  were  in  the  fifth,  and  there  remain  until  the  lat- 
ter should  join  them.     The  messenger  expressed  his  sur- 


MR.  Owen's  progressiox.  113 

prise  at  this  preference,  but  said  lie  would  leave  and  return 
within  an  hour,  bringing  the  decision  regarding  my  father's 
request.  He  did  so  return,  and  reported  that  it  had  been 
granted,  and  accordingly  my  parents  descended  to  the 
seventh  heaven.  They  had  then  been  in  the  spirit-world 
more  than  lialf  a  century,  while  Mr.  Owen  had  entered  it 
only  in  June  of  the  same  year — five  months  previously. 
The  latter  passed  fiom  earth  on  the  24th  day  of  June, 
1877,  and  entered  the  third  heaven,  where  he  remained 
less  than  one  month,  and  thence  passed  successively  to  the 
fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth,  entering  the  latter 
heaven  in  April,  1878.  Mr.  Owen  was  qualified  immedi- 
ately after  his  departure  to  enter  a  higher  heaven,  at  least 
the  sixth,  but  as  his  work  here  was  not  yet  completed  it 
was  desirable  that  he  should  make  his  home  temporarily 
in  each  of  the  true  heavens,  and  regularly  advance  from 
the  lowest,  so  as  to  unclerstandingly  judge  of  the  charac- 
teristics and  merits  of  each,  and  thus  be  better  cjualified  to 
correctlv  describe  them. 

Neither  husband  nor  wife  there,  ever  outgrows  the  other 
in  any  direction  which  can  cause  inharmony.  If  one  ex- 
cels in  wisdom,  the  other  surpasses  in  loveliness  of  char- 
acter. Thus  the  balance  is  eternally  preserved.  Conjugal 
love  in  that  Hfe  is  the  highest  and  most  perfect  form  of 
love.  It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  parental  love,  in  all  the 
intensity  which  frequently  characterizes  it  here  wiU  con- 
tinue to  forever  exist  in  that  world.  This  love  on  earth  is 
intensified  by  the  deep  and  ever-present  sense  of  respon- 
sibility, of  the  need  of  protection  and  gTiidance,  but  as  the 
necessity  in  which  this  feeling  originates  no  longer  exists 
in  spirit-hfe,  this  love  ceases  to  be  apprehensive,  and  in- 
tense, and  becomes  transformed  into  that  steady,  mild 
affection,  which  there  binds  together  all  true  friends,  and 
kindi'ed  souls. 


114  CIIILDEEN    IN   THE    HEAVENS.  *" 

Spirits  are  sensible  of  tokens  of  affection  on  the  part  of 
their  mortal  friends,  and  ajDpreciate  them,  perhaps  more 
highly  than  when  in  the  ilesh,  and  it  is  a  beautiful  truth 
that  when  pure  affection  for  the  departed  prompts  the 
dedication  to  them  of  any  object,  such  as  an  embroidered 
article,  a  drawing,  painting,  book,  or  other  ornamental  or 
useful  production,  the  knowledge  of  it  generally  soon 
reaches  the  dear  one  for  whom  it  is  intended,  and  the  gift 
is  not  only  highly  appreciated  but  a  spiritual  duplicate  of 
the  object  is  fi^equently  procured  and  treasured  as  the 
representative  of  the  object  itself,  and  many  times  the 
donors  are  surprised  and  pleased,  when  they  join  their 
angel  friends  on  the  other  shore,  to  find  these  counterparts 
of  their  gifts  conspicuously  displayed  in  their  spiritual 
homes. 

The  love  that  is  born  of  the  spirit,  as  all  true  love  is,  is 
imperishable,  and  will  find  its  oavu  and  be  reunited  with 
it  in  despite  of  all  obstacles.  It  never  mistakes  ;  it  knows 
BO  failures.  The  laws  that  govern  it  are  God's  laws,  and 
these  are  invariable. 

CHn^DREN    IN   THE     HEAVENS. 
"  I  shine  a  star,  though  once  I  perished  as  a  flower," 

When  infants  and  other  very  young  children  pass  into 
spirit-Hfe  the  change  in  their  appearance  is  less  marked 
than  in  older  persons.  They  gain  nothing  but  their  free- 
dom from  pain  and  suffering,  and  lose  nothing  but  their 
material  bodies,  and  are  as  helpless,  innocent,  and  igno- 
rant as  before.  In  the  fifth  heaven  there  is  what  may  be 
termed  a  grand  nursery,  or  temporary  home,  for  such  as 
these,  and  all  are  conveyed  there  v/ho  have  no  parents  or 
near  relatives  in  the  heavens  above  the  second,  to  claim 
and  care  for  them.     All  who  have  adult  female  relatives  in 


TIIEIR    CONDITION.  115 

these  heavens  are  taken  by  the  latter  to  their  own  homes, 
where  they  are  cai-efully  and  lovingly  tended  and  in- 
structed. There  are  alwa3"S  many  female  spirits  in  the 
foiu'th  and  fifth  heavens  who,  either  never  had  children  of 
theii*  o^^ll,  or  who  have  none  with  them  in  spirit-life,  whose 
highest  enjoyment  consists  in  receiving  and  caring  for 
these  little  waifs.  This  is  with  them  a  labor  of  love  and 
delight,  and  they  devote  the  same  kind  and  degree  of  at- 
tention to  them  that  loving  and  sensible  mothers  here  be- 
stow on  theii'  helj)less  children,  and  while  the  love  of  these 
angehc  foster-mothers  for  their  innocent  charges  always 
equals,  and  more  fi'equently  surpasses  that  of  the  natui'al 
mother,  it  is  bestowed  more  judiciously,  with  greater 
wisdom  and  constant  regard  to  the  best  interests  of  the 
child  in  the  futui^e,  and  only  those  are  entrusted  with  the 
duty  whose  highest  hajDpiness  consists  in  its  perform- 
ance. 

The  conditions  that  surround  young  children  in  that 
life  are  such  that  only  the  best  and  noblest  qualities  of 
theii'  natui'es  are  unfolded,  they  are  far  removed  from  all 
e^il  influences,  and  are  angehc  in  their  loveliness,  and 
pui'ity,  as  they  afterwards  become  m  knowledge  and  wis- 
dom. Free  from  the  contamination  of  eartlily  faults 
and  vices,  they  have  nothing  to  repent  of,  no  wounds 
to  be  healed,  no  scars  to  mar  the  purity  of  their  charac- 
ters, and  no  bitter  earthly  experiences,  the  memory  of 
which  to  outgTow.  Thej  are  pure,  "even  as  the  angels 
in  heaven,"  beautiful  blossoms,  transplanted  to  a  fairer 
clime,  where  they  unfold  into  perfect  and  never-fading 
flowers. 

Respecting  the  education  of  children,  the  necessity  of  it 
is  as  imperative  there  as  here,  the  conditions  and  means 
only  being  different,  and  the  character  of  these  renders  the 
impartation  and  acquisition  of  knowledge  a  pleasure,  in- 


116  CHILDREN    INCREASE    IN    STATURE. 

stead  of  a  task,  and  the  unfoldment  of  tlie  youthful  mind 
proceeds  more  raj)idly  than  in  this  life.  No  means  of 
compulsion  are  used,  and  no  restraints  are  imposed,  their 
inclinations  being  in  perfect  harmony  with  their  pursuits. 
Books  are  employed  as  means  of  instruction,  but  most  of 
the  knowledge  is  imparted  oraUy,  and  by  object  teaching. 
Our  kindergarten  schools  are  indebted  to  the  spirit-world 
for  their  origin.  Children  are  there  taught  all  the  com- 
mon or  elementary  branches,  including  the  geography  of 
the  heavens,  illustrated  by  maps,  and  such  other  knowl- 
edge as  will  be  useful  to  them  in  the  future.  Of  the  moral 
lessons  that  are  most  constantly  impressed  on  the  youth- 
ful spirit  mind,  is  that  of  the  necessity  of  being  useful  to 
themselves,  and  others. 

Older  children  than  these,  approaching  adult  age,  of 
depraved  natures,  when  they  pass  over  enter  the  second 
sphere,  a  division  of  which  is  appropriated  to  their  recep- 
tion, and  where  they  are  kept  separate  from  the  adults, 
and  carefully  guided  and  instructed,  and  in  a  comparatively 
brief  time  are  advanced  to  the  third  heaven. 

Children  in  the  spirit-world  increase  in  stature  as  they  do 
here,  but  their  mental  and  spiritual  unfoldment  are  more 
rajDid  than  if  they  had  remained  on  earth.  Boys  and  girls 
there  are  respectively  characterized  by  masculine  and  femi- 
nine tastes,  as  they  are  here,  and  the  former  amuse  them- 
selves with  their  balls,  and  marbles,  and  the  latter  with 
their  dolls,  and  hoops. 

Young  children  are  frequently  brought  to  earth  to  learn 
by  observation  of  children  here,  and  strong  and  enduring 
attachments  are  often  formed  by  spirit  children  for  children 
in  this  life,  who  may,  or  may  not,  be  related  to  them  by 
ties  of  consanguinity,  and  the  influence  exercised  is  always 
for  good.  But  the  custom  of  bringing  children  to  earth  is 
not  by  any  means  general,  for  ordinarily  there  is  no  ne- 


ORIGIN    OF    SPIKrrUAr.    ANIMALS,  117 

cessity  for  it,  they  being  able  to  learn  aU  that  is  necessary 
for  them  to  know,  in  then-  heavenly  homes. 


ANIIMALS   IN    THE    SPIRIT    WORLD. 

The  animals  m  the  spirit-world  are  actual,  objective  ex- 
istences, and  not  images,  or  phantasms,  only  existing  in 
the  minds  of  spirits,  as  some  suppose,  but  with  the  Lidian, 
for  example,  the  dog  and  pony  he  has  with  him  are  not 
the  spirits  of  the  identical  dog  and  pony  he  owned  on 
earth,  but  spiritual  counterparts  of  them,  and  not  of 
earthly  origin,  for  earthly  animals  have  no  existence  be- 
yond this  life.  Many  other  spirits  beside  Indian,  who  here 
had  their  favorite  horses,  and  pet  dogs,  or  birds,  have 
there,  what  appear  to  them  to  be  the  same,  the  resem- 
blance in  all  respects  being  j)erfect,  but  in  reality  they  are 
not  the  same.  These  have  been  provided  to  meet  the  de- 
sii'es  of  these  spirits,  by  the  same  Divine  hand  that  pro- 
vides dii'ectly,  or  indirectly,  for  all  their  other  wants  and 
desn^es.  As  to  spirit  anir-nls,  their  origin  may  there  be 
as  much  a  matter  of  speculation  with  some  as  the  origin  of 
species  is  here.  It  is  certain  that  they  do  not  propagate 
their  sj)ecies,  and  for  all  that  wise  spirits  know  to  the  con- 
traiy  they  enjoy  a  pei^petual  existence. 

The  only  species  of  animals  in  the  spirit-world  that  my 
instiTictors  have  knowledge  of,  are  horses,  dogs,  cows,  deer, 
hares,  and  rabbits,  domestic  fowls,  and  birds,  and  of  these, 
horses,  deer,  and  birds,  are  to  be  found  in  all  the  heavens 
above  the  second,  certainly  up  to  the  thirty-second,  as  also 
in  the  first,  or  Indian  heaven,  but  there  are  no  animals  of 
any  kind  in  the  second  sj^here.  They  are  all  perfectly  do- 
cile, and  hve  on  the  most  fiiendly  terms  with  man,  though 
when   the   Indian  chases  deer  they  act  precisely  as   our 


118  THEIR    INTELLIGENCE. 

deer  do  when  hunted,  but  they  seem  to  understand  that 
they  are  in  no  danger,  and  enter  into  the  spirit  of  the 
sport,  and  after  the  chase  they  peaceably  return  to  their 
haunts  where  they  can  be  approached  without  difficulty, 
and  will  then  readily  obey  the  call  of  their  hunters. 

Animals  in  the  spirit-world,  apparently,  possess  no  other 
means  of  communicating  with  each  other  than  earthly 
animals  do,  but  they  are  far  more  intelligent  than  the 
latter,  and  seem  to  understand  each  other  better.  They 
also  evidently  comprehend  whatever  is  said  to  them  by 
spirits. 

Although  horses,  dogs,  and  birds,  at  least,  are  frequently 
brought  from  higher  to  lower  heavens,  and  taken  back,  yet 
they  cannot  be  taken  from  the  heaven  they  inhabit  to  a 
higher,  so  when  spirits  possessing  these  animals  progress 
to  higher  heavens  they  are  compelled  to  leave  them,  but 
strange  to  relate,  if  they  desire  it,  in  their  new  homes  they 
find  animals  in  all  respects  like  the  others,  only  in  degree 
more  beautiful,  and  these  animals  seem  to  know  them,  as 
the  others  did,  answering  to  their  names,  and  possess- 
ing all  the  traits  and  habits  which  the  others  possessed. 
So  perfect  is  the  resemblance  that  most  spirits  believe 
them  to  be  the  identical  animals  they  left  in  the  heaven 
below. 

Horses  and  dogs  may  be  brought  from  the  first  and 
third  heavens  to  the  earth,  and  in  some  instances,  in  twi- 
hght,  be  sufficiently  materialized  to  be  seen  with  the  nat- 
ural eye,  but  when  there  are  appearances  of  wolves,  and 
other  wild,  fierce  animals,  these,  most  commonly  are  psy- 
chological creations  of  low  gross  spirits,  of  strong  power  of 
will,  certain  of  whom  are  able  to  create  these  forms — 
phantasmal  to  them  as  to  us — and  endow  them  with  the 
semblance  of  animation  so  that  they  shall  be  momentarily 
visible  to  persons  who  are  clairvoyant,  and  to  such  only. 


A    VISIT    TO    EARTH.  119 

Sometimes,  however,  spirits  on  liiglier  planes  tlian  tliese, 
with  a  mechanical  turn  of  mind,  amuse  themselves  by  con- 
structing and  bringing  to  earth,  and  experimenting  with 
spiritual  images  of  wild  or  strange  animals,  or  diminutive 
images  of  men  and  women,  all  tliese  being  provided  with 
liexible  joints  like  certain  of  our  toys,  and  after  partially 
materializmg  them,  as  well  as  their  own  hands,  they  set 
them  in  motion,  and  to  any  person  who  sees  them  they 
appear  to  naturally  and  j)erfectly  perform  the  functions  of 
the  animal,  or  other  being  they  are  intended  to  represent. 

On  the  first  of  Januar}^,  1^78,  one  of  the  Indian  guides 
of  the  medium  brought  his  horse  and  dog  to  the  earth. 
A  few  days  pre™us  I  had  asked  the  question  of  my  in- 
structors, whether  spirit  animals  could  be  brought  to  the 
earth  ?  and  they  were  unable  to  answer,  and  this  visit  was 
the  result  of  an  attempt  on  their  part  to  practically  settle 
the  question. 

When  the  Indian  who  had  been  selected  to  make  the  ex- 
periment was  read}^  he  addressed  some  words  to  his  horse, 
and  told  him  that  he  desired  to  take  him  on  a  long  jour- 
ney, and  enjoined  him  to  regard  all  he  should  say  to  him, 
then  and  while  on  the  way.  The  animal  indicated  his 
appreciation  of  what  had  been  told  him  by  certain  sounds, 
and  the  Indian  mounted,  and  as  easily  as  he  trans23orts 
himself  alone,  he  and  his  horse,  the  dog  following,  were 
transported  to  the  earth.  Other  of  my  fiiends,  beside  my 
instructors,  were  interested  in  the  results  of  the  experi- 
ment, and  were  present,  and  accompanied  the  Indian  on 
the  trial  excursion.  After  the  arrival  of  the  party  the  In- 
dian amused  himself  and  them  by  riding  to  and  fro  on  the 
street,  in  front  of  my  dwelling,  and  while  thus  engaged  he 
encountered  a  pah'  of  horses  before  a  carriage,  and  the  hor- 
ses clairvoyantly  perceiving  the  si^irit  horse,  and  dog,  and 
Indian  arrayed  in  his  chief's  costume,  which  he  had  assumed 


120  A    DANGER    AVOIDED. 

for  the  occasion,  were  terrified,  endangering  the  safety 
of  the  driver  and  the  occupants  of  the  carriage,  and  to 
avert  the  threatened  danger  the  Indian  quickly  turned 
into  another  street.  Since  then  the  horse  and  dog  have 
been  brought  here  several  times,  and  my  friends  have 
learned  that  it  is  not  uncommon  for  horses,  dogs,  and 
birds  to  be  brought  to  earth. 


CHAPTEE  Yin. 

The  Movements  of  Spirits.     Their  Return  to  Earth.     Do  Ancient 
Spirits,  and  Spirits  from  other  Worlds  visit  the  Earth  ? 

THE    MOVEME>fTS    OF    SPIEITS. 

"  To  soar  in  fearless  freedom 

Through  broad,  blue,  boundless  skies, 
And  catch  the  radiant  gleaming 

Of  love-lit  angel  eyes  ; 
To  feel  the  Father's  presence 

Around  me,  near  or  far, 
And  see  His  radiant  glory 

Stretch  onward  star  by  star." 

Simply  by  tlieii'  ^-olition,  spii'its  are  able  to  transport 
tliemselves  through  space  with  amazing  velocity.  It  is 
the  same  power,  so  circumscribed  in  this  hfe,  by  the  exer- 
cise of  which  we  move  our  Hmbs,  and  dii^ect  our  steps. 
Good  spirits,  fi'ee  from  the  limitations  imposed  by  our 
physical  bodies,  and  material  surroundings,  find  them- 
selves still  in  possession  of  this  power,  increased  in  degTee, 
and  with  all  impediments  to  its  full  and  j)erfect  exercise 
removed.  This  power  seems  to  be  exercised  instinctive- 
ly by  the  new-bom  spirit,  when  his  consciousness  and 
strenofth  are  not  materially  impaired.  j\Ir.  Owen  told  me 
that  veiy  soon  after  he  had  left  his  body  he  departed  for 
the  third  heaven,  under  the  gTiidance  of  his  angel  friends, 
and  his  movements  through  space  were  to  him  as  easy  and 
natural  as  if  he  had  been  accustomed  to  them.  Never- 
theless, a  distinct  and  positive  exercise  of  vtdll-force  is 
6 


122  TIME    AND    SPACE    ARE    THERE    KNOWN. 

required  to  direct  their  movements,  a  merely  passive  in- 
clination to  proceed  to  any  point  does  not  avail.  The 
Sliced  of  their  movements  is  also  determined  by  their  will. 

It  is  sometimes  said,  even  by  spirits  through  mediums, 
that  time  and  space  are  unknown  in  spiiit-life.  This  is  an 
error,  for  time  and  its  divisions,  as  known  to  us,  are  equally 
regarded  b}^  spirits  in  all  the  heavens,  at  least,  below  the 
sixteenth.  They  measure  it  as  we  do,  by  years,  months, 
weeks,  days,  houi's,  and  minutes.  The  only  diiference  be- 
tween time  here  and  there  is,  that  there  it  apj)ears  to  pass 
more  rapidly,  a  year  apparently  being  comprised  in  a 
month  of  our  time.  In  the  sixteenth  and  higher  heavens  it 
is  true  that  less  regard  is  had  to  the  divisions  of  time.  As 
to  space,  their  movements  through  it  being  so  inconceivably 
rapid,  this  is  comparatively  annihilated,  yet,  when  they  note 
their  movements  they  are  conscious,  not  only  of  the  lapse 
of  time,  but  of  the  vast  dimensions  of  space.  Between  the 
earth  and  first  sphere,  a  distance  of  about  five  hundred  and 
fifty  miles,  there  is  nothing  but  space,  and  they  traverse 
this,  almost  mth  the  speed  of  lightning. 

Spirits  in  passing  fi'om  the  heavens  to  the  earth,  and 
vice  versa,  are  not  guided  by  knowledge,  the  only  faculty 
consciously  exercised,  being  that  of  will,  but  in  some  mys- 
terious way  their  movements  are  so  governed  that  they  in- 
fallibly pursue  the  most  direct  course  to  the  objective 
point.  A  spirit  child  of  half-a-dozen  years,  of  average  in- 
telhgence  and  will-power,  who  has  once  been  brought  to 
earth  and  returned,  can  afterward  pass  to  and  fro  with  as 
much  certainty,  and  security,  as  an  adult  who  has  been  in 
the  habit  of  frequently  visiting  us. 

Spirits,  when  approaching  the  earth,  first  perceive  the 
clouds,  if  these  exist,  and  from  the  time  they  leave  the  first 
S23here  until  the  clouds  become  visible  they  see  nothing, 
excepting  other  spirits  who  may  be  passing  in  the  opposite 


HOW  OUR  EARTH  APPEARS  TO  THEM.       123 

direction.  Of  tliese,  tliey  p,'enerally  meet  large  numbers, 
and  instinctivelv  avoid  comin<»'  into  collision  with  them. 
"Wiien  our  atmosphere  is  unclouded  they  do  not  perceive 
the  earth  until  quite  neai*  it,  as  their  \ision  can  penetrate 
oiu'  atmospliere  only  to  a  very  limited  extent.  Even  when 
they  have  descended  below  the  regions  of  the  clouds  the 
scenery  and  objects  on  the  earth  are  but  very  indistinctly 
perceived  by  them. 

AMien  spirits  a23j)roach  the  first  sphere,  from  the  earth, 
they  perceive  nothing  until  within  a  short  distance  of  it, 
vs'hen  it  presents  a  nebulous  appearance,  which  increases  in 
density  until  it  assumes  the  apj)earance  of  an  interminable 
mass  of  overspreading  sj^iritual  substance.  At  certain 
points  of  this  lower  surface  there  are  conca\ities,  or  arched 
vaults,  furnished  with  horizontal  projecting  platforms,  used 
as  landing  j^laces  by  spii'itsj  and  these  terminate  in  vesti- 
bules, which  lead,  thi'ough  gates,  to  broad  halls,  these 
merguig  into  ascending  avenues,  some  of  v^hich  lead  to  the 
upper  surface  of  the  first,  or  Indian  sj)here,  while  the  ma- 
jority of  these  avenues  terminate  in  the  second  sphere,  and 
all  spu'its  inhabiting  that  sj^here  are  restricted  to  these. 

'\Mien,  on  earth,  spirits  desire  to  return  to  their  homes, 
and  at  the  same  time  exercise  their  will-power  for  that  pur- 
j)ose,  they  immediately  find  themselves  on  their  way,  and 
in  fi'om  one  to  three  minutes,  the  time  varying  with  each 
spirit,  they  reach  the  j)roper  entrance  in  the  first  sj)here. 
T\liat  guides  them  du'ectly  to  this  point,  is,  as  my  instruc- 
tors say,  one  of  the  many  mysteries,  mystery  to  them  as  to 
us,  but,  as  before  remarked,  they  never  mistake  their  way 
nor  fail  to  pursue  the  direct  hue  to  their  destination. 
"WTien  they  desu-e  to  come  to  earth  they  pass  down  the 
avenue,  through  the  hall  and  gateway,  out  upon  the  land- 
ing place,  and  by  the  simple  exercise  of  their  will  are  im- 
pelled to  any  spot  on  earth  which  they  may  be  disposed 


124  AVENUES    OF    COMMUNICATION. 

to  visit,  and  it  matters  not  whether  they  have  ever  before 
visited  that  locahty,  their  course,  undetermined  and  unin- 
fluenced by  them,  is  always  the  proper  and  most  direct  one 
to  the  objective  point. 

But,  23erhaps  the  most  amazing  thing  about  all  this  is 
the  entire  absence  of  fear  in  taking  the  leap  into  the  regions 
of  space,  below.  God  has  provided  against  this,  otherwise 
insuperable  obstacle  to  their  returning  to  earth,  by  divest- 
ing spirits,  as  a  rule,  of  all  sense  of  fear  in  taking  this  step. 
It  is  the  same  in  respect  to  their  movements  in  other  direc- 
tions through  space,  they  rarely  experience  fear  or  appre- 
hensions of  their  power  failing  them,  their  faith  in  an 
ever-present  and  omnipotent  protecting  Power  generally 
being  instinctive,  and  absolute. 

There  are  many  of  the  avenues  of  communication,  above 
described,  extending  through  the  basic  substance  of  the 
first  sphere,  as  well  as  through  that  of  the  higher  heavens, 
and  at  points  on  a  level  with  the  upper  surfaces  of  the  dif- 
ferent heavens  these  avenues  are  intersected  by  others,  of 
limited  extent,  branching  off  and  opening  into  these 
heavens. 

At  my  suggestion,  my  father  and  Mr.  Owen  noted  the 
exact  time  required  by  them  to  go  from  the  earth  to  Mr. 
Owen's  home,  then  in  the  fifth  heaven,  and  it  was  within  a 
second  or  two  of  two  minutes,  and  it  required  half  a  minute 
more  for  my  father  to  go  from  the  fifth  to  his  home  in  the 
seventh  heaven.  Some  months  subsequent  to  this  they 
noted  the  time  required  to  go  from  the  seventh  heaven  to 
the  city  of  Paris,  where  a  sister  of  mine  at  that  time 
resided,  and  it  was  nearly  fifteen  minutes,  and  to  return 
twenty-eight  minutes.  The  greater  time  required  in  re- 
turning was  owing  to  their  being  fatigued  by  their  exer- 
tions in  going,  and  the  necessary  tax  on  their  strength 
while  there  present.     They  learned  from   spirits,   whose 


MOVEMENTS    OF    SPIRITS.         .    -  125 

liomes  were  iu  the  fifteentli  heaven,  that  it  required  nearly 
fifteen  minutes  for  them  to  pass  from  the  earth  to  their 
heaven,  and  vice  versa.  Indian  spirits  are  able  to  travel  to 
and  fL'om  the  earth  with  greater  speed  than  white  spirits. 
In  proceeding  from  the  earth  to  their  homes  spirits  are  un- 
able to  arrest  their  course  until  they  reach  the  first  sphere. 
It  is  the  same  in  returning  to  earth,  and  in  our  atmosphere, 
but  they  are  able  to  accelerate  or  diminish  their  speed.  In 
their  own  heavens  they  are  able  to  arrest  their  course  at 
any  moment  in  mid-air,  and  hover  over  any  spot,  but  there 
they  do  not  ordinarily  transport  themselves  through  the 
air,  unless  between  distant  points,  preferring  the  means  of 
locomotion  that  are  familiar  to  us,  namely,  walking  and 
riding,  or  di'iving,  as  they  are  rarely  in  haste,  and  best  en- 
joy these  means  of  moving  from  place  to  place. 

In  traversing  the  space  between  the  heavens  and  earth 
they  experience  no  difficulty  in  their  respiration,  they 
breathe  as  easily  and  naturally  at  one  period  of  their  jour- 
ney as  at  another,  but  when  they  become  fatigued  here, 
they  do  not  become  restored  in  any  degree  until  they  have 
entered,  at  least,  the  first  heaven.  When  they  are  present 
in  oiu'  public  halls,  chui'ches,  or  theatres  on  public  occa- 
sions, they  are  not  able,  as  is  supposed  by  some,  to  remain 
suspended  in  the  air.  Should  they  come  to  a  rest  in  mid- 
au"  they  would  at  once  gravitate  to  the  earth.  They  stand 
about  the  room,  or  platform,  or  occupy  vacant  seats,  or  sit 
on  the  backs  of  occupied  seat's,  and  some  of  them  perch 
themselves  on  the  chandeliers,  or  projecting  parts  of  the 
interior  of  the  building,  and  I  am  assured  by  my  instruc- 
tors that  sometimes  frolicsome  sj^ii^its  excite  the  mirth  of 
other  sj)irits  by  stepping  from  the  heads  of  certain  persons 
to  those  of  others,  and  thus  make  their  way  from  place  to 
place,  all  of  which  is  very  undignffied,  but  cj^uite  human, 
and  therefore  natural. 


^26  THROUGH    OUR    ATMOSPHERE. 

When  the  higher  spirits,  while  visiting  the  earth,  desire 
to  proceed  to  another  and  distant  j)lace,  on  its  surface,  they 
do  not  proceed  in  a  direct  Hne  through  our  atmosphere, 
but  return  to  the  first  s}3here,  and  thence  take  a  new  de- 
parture for  the  desired  locaHty,  for  the  reason  that  travers- 
ing long  distances  in  our  atmosphere  rapidly  exhausts 
them,  and  even  if  they  should  accomphsh  their  journey 
they  would  be  able  to  remain  but  a  short  time,  being  com- 
pelled to  return,  at  least  to  the  first  sphere,  to  recruit  their 
strength.  In  going  short  distances  they  proceed  to  the 
objective  point  either  by  following  the  most  direct  streets, 
or  roads,  or  pursuing  a  direct  coui^se  through  the  atmos- 
phere, as  they  prefer.  They  can  come,  say  to  New  York, 
and  with  the  delay  of  a  few  minutes,  not  ordinarily  more 
than  five,  can  proceed  direct,  say  to  Boston,  or  Baltimore, 
but  not  to  a  locality  much  more  distant,  as  their  strength 
would  be  unequal  to  it.  Of  course  there  are  certain  spirits 
who  are  able  to  travel  greater  distances  than  these.  The 
speed  of  their  movements,  also,  is  much  less  in  our  atmos- 
phere than  in  space.  From  any  point  on  earth  they  are 
able  to  proceed  in  a  direct  line  to  any  other  place  with 
which  they  are  unacquainted,  not  more  distant  than  either 
of  the  above-named  cities,  the  same  as  when  they  depart 
directly  from  the  heavens. 

Guardian  spirits,  being  in  close  rapport  with  their  wards, 
are  always  able  to  instantly  be  v^^ith  them  v/herever  they 
may  be,  but  with  most  other  spirits  it  is  different,  for  when 
these  desire  to  visit  earthly  fiiends  they  are  compelled  to 
seek  them  as  we  would,  either  by  visiting  their  homes,  or 
places  of  resort,  or  by  obtaining  information  of  their  where- 
abouts from  their  guardians,  or  other  intimate  spirit  friends 
who  may  happen  to  have  knowledge  of  them.  "With  these 
exceptions,  and  a  few  others,  they  have  not  the  power  to 
trace  mortals  from  place  to  place,  and  without  availing 


CERTAIN    SPIRITS    CAN   TRACE    US.  127 

themselves  of  information  in  tlie  ways  mentioned  they 
might  fail  in  discovering  their  fiiends,  even  though  they 
"were  in  their  immediate  vicinity. 

It  is  a  mistake  to  suppose  that  in  our  movements  from 
place  to  place  we  leave  behind  us  a  track  or  line  of  light, 
or  magnetism,  visible  to  ordinary  spirits,  and  by  means  of 
which  thev  are  able  to  trace  us,  but  there  are  reasons  for 
belie^'ing  that  we  do  leave  behind  us  an  invisible  track  of 
this  natui'e,  by  means  of  which  certain  spirits  who  possess  a 
faculty,  perhaj^s  something  analogous  to  that  of  the  hound,  ' 
ai'e  able  to  unerringly  trace  us  in  all  our  movements.  We 
know  that  certain  S2:)irits  possess  the  power  of  tracing  a 
person  fi'om  a  lock  of  hair,  or  other  object,  which  is  im- 
bued with  his  magnetism,  and  with  the  Indians  the  in- 
stinctive faculty  or  sense  upon  which  in  earth-hfe  they  rely 
to  track  game  and  enemies  through  the  forests,  is  more 
highly  developed  in  spii'it-hfe,  and  this  serves  in  a  limited 
degree  to  render  them  there  independent  of  extraneous 
helps,  and  they  fi^equently  are  able,  unaided,  to  trace  their 
earthly  friends  to  distant  points. 

In  the  autumn  of  1878  many  Spiritualists  were  sorely 
puzzled  to  understand  why  it  was  that  the  mortal  remains 
of  Mr.  A.  T.  Stewart  could  not  be  discovered,  and  their 
hiding  j)lace  revealed  by  spirits.  Soon  after  they  were 
stolen  I  had  some  conversation  with  my  instructors  on  the 
subject,  and  they  said  they  would  visit  Mr.  Stewart's  late 
residence  and  question  his  spiiit  friends,  some  of  whom, 
doubtless,  they  would  meet  there.  Accordingly  they 
visited  the  dwelling,  and  found  many  of  the  spirit  fiiends 
of  the  family  present,  and  conversed  vn.th  them,  and  their 
uniform  reply  to  all  cjuestions  was  that  they  were  in  abso- 
lute ignorance  regarding  the  place  of  concealment  of  the 
remains,  and  equally  ignorant  regarding  the  perpetrators 
of  the  outrage,  and  they  assured  my  friends  that  IVIr.  Stew- 


128  POWERS    OF    SPIRITS    LIMITED. 

art  himself  had  no  more  knowledge  of  the  matter  than 
they  had. 

The  explanation  given  by  my  instructors,  is  this.  Mr. 
Stewart,  from  the  time  his  remains  were  deposited  in  the 
vault,  ceased  to  bestow  the  least  attention,  or  probably  the 
slightest  thought  on  them,  nor  did  any  of  his  spirit  friends 
think  of  them,  and  it  follows,  that  unless  they  had  been 
informed  of  the  contemplated  outrage  neither  he  nor  they 
could  have  been  present  when  the  remains  were  abstracted, 
or  have  had  any  knowledge  regarding  them.  Who  the 
perpetrators  were,  was  therefore  only  known  by  the  per- 
petrators themselves,  and  their  spirit  friends ;  the  former 
of  course  guarded  the  secret  from  mortals,  and  the  latter 
as  jealously  guarded  it  from  other  spirits,  thus  extending 
the  a]3plication  of  the  adage,  that  there  is  honor  even 
among  thieves.  As  to  clairvoyant  spirits,  the  majority  of 
them  are  unable  to  perceive  distant,  concealed,  inaninnate 
objects,  unless  they  be  furnished  with  clews  by  which  to 
trace  them.  But  no  living  human  being  can  be  thus 
secreted  and  the  place  of  concealment  remain  unknown  to 
its  spirit  friends  for  a  single  day. 

"When  in  June,  1879,  aU  New  York  was  excited  about 
the  murder  of  Mrs.  Hull,  it  was  asked  in  at  least  two  of 
the  public  journals,  why  do  not  the  spirits  furnish  such 
information  as  would  lead  to  the  detection  of  the  mur- 
derer? The  reply  is,  the  deed,  unanticipated  by  her 
spirit  friends,  was  perpetrated  in  the  night,  when  most 
spirits,  like  mortals,  seek  repose  in  sleep,  and  therefore 
the  ^probability  of  any  of  her  spirit  friends  being  present 
is  extremely  doubtful,  and  for  the  same  reason  it  is  doubt- 
ful whether  any  other  spirits  were  present.  If  these  rea- 
sons be  sound  her  spirit  friends  possessed  no  clew  by 
which  to  discover  the  murderer,  and  if  they  had  no  knowl- 
edge  of   the   fact   that,  in  comparatively  rare   instances, 


YISITIXG    THE    EUROPEAN    HEAVENS.  129 

spirits  are  endowed  with  tlie  faculty  of  tracing  the  authors 
of  such  deeds,  as  probably  they  had  not,  they  then  had  no 
knowledge  of  the  perpetrators  of  this  deed,  until  they  ac- 
quu'ed  it  fi'om  their  mortal  friends.  It  should  be  borne  in 
mind  that  clairvoyance  among  spirits,  at  least  in  the  heavens 
of  which  we  know  anything,  is  as  rare  a  gift  as  it  is  among 
mortals,  and  there,  as  here,  the  great  majority  are  sceptical 
of  the  existence  of  powers  which  they  themselves  do  not 
possess. 

There  are  two  routes  by  which  spirits  travel  to  and  from 
the  American  and  European  heavens  ;  the  first  is  through 
theii'  OAvn  atmosphere,  and  the  second,  by  descending  be- 
low, the  first  sphere  and  traversing  the  space  above  our 
atmosj)here.  They  direct  their  course  towards  the  lowest 
spheres  of  the  foreign  heavens,  which  they  enter,  and  after 
obtaining  permission  from  the  wardens  proceed  to  the 
higher  heavens,  but  none  are  here  permitted  to  ^dsit  heav- 
ens liigher  than  their  own.  In  visiting  these  heavens  it  is  the 
same  as  when  they  desire  from  their  own  heavens  to  visit 
certain  locahties  on  earth,  they  require  no  knowledge  of  the 
course  to  be  pursued,  nor  direction,  nor  guide,  their  desires 
and  vohtion  apparently  being  sufficient  to  insure  their  reach- 
ing the  desired  heaven  by  the  most  direct  course.  It  is  the 
same  when  they  are  in  a  distant  heaven,  and  desire  to  return. 

T^lien  spirits  visit  the  earth  in  winter,  in  addition  to 
their  ordinary  raiment  they  usually  wear  mantles,  or  heavy 
robes.  These  seem  to  serve  to  j)rotect  them  from  the  cold, 
as  coiTespondiug  garments  do  us.  Excepting  those  spirits 
who  have  friends  there,  none  visit  the  polar  regions.  They 
are  as  sensitive  to  cold  as  we  are,  and  unless  attracted  by 
dear  fiiends,  whom  they  know  precisely  where  to  find,  they 
never  venture  into  those  regions,  and  my  instmctors  doubt 
whether  even  those  who  have  friends  there,  unless  it  be  on 
rare  occasions,  ever  visit  them.  They  are  inclined  to  the  be- 
6* 


130  RETURN    OF    SPIRITS    TO    EARTH. 

lief  that  gTiardian  spirits,  and  the  spirit  friends  of  the  natives 
of  those  regions,  are  the  only  exceptions  to  the  above  rule. 
The  spirits  of  Sir  John  Franklin's  company  left  their  bodies, 
if  the}''  died  from  freezing,  before  the  latter  were  completely 
frozen,  as  spirits  always  do  under  similar  circumstances, 
and  immediately  were  attracted  to  their  appropriate 
spheres,  or  heavens.  The  spirit,  vdthout  reflection,  would 
instinctively  be  impelled  to  this  step.  If  among  the  crew 
there  were  any  so  degraded  as  to  be  unfit,  even  for  the 
second  sphere,  they  would  be  immediately  attracted  to  a 
more  genial  chmate  on  earth,  and  probably  to  their  former 
homes  or  haunts. 

Spirits  in  any  heaven  cannot  perceive  the  one  above,  not 
even  when  the}"  approach  it,  as  the  communicating  avenue 
does  not  admit  of  a  view  of  it. 

The  doctrine  of  vast  magnetic  currents  flowing  through 
space  in  various  and  contrary  directions,  and  the  necessity 
of  spirits  seeking  and  availing  themselves  of  certain  of  these 
currents  in  order  to  traverse  it,  which  has  been  taught  by 
certain  able  writers,  and  by  certain  spirits,  my  instructors 
declare  to  be  wholly  without  foundation.  Spirits  are  able, 
at  will,  to  proceed  in  any  direction  and  in  all  directions 
with  equal  facility,  provided,  no  obstacle,  which  to  them  is 
substantial,  intervenes. 

THE   EETURN    OF  .SPIEITS    TO    EARTH. 

"  Not  with  sound  of  many  thunders, 

Not  with  miracles  and  wonders, 
Would  they  herald  forth  their  coming  from  the  peaceful  spirit-shore ; 

But  in  God's  own  love  descending, 

With  your  aspirations  blending, 
They  would  teach  you  of  the  future  that  you  watch  and  weep  no  more." 

Spirits,  with  comparatively  few  exceptions,  are  not  com- 
pelled to  revisit  the  earth,  and  heretofore  the  majority  of 


THE    MAJORITY   DO    NOT    EETURN.  131 

them  Lave  not  returned,  and  the  proportion  of  low  and 
ignorant  spirits  who  return  exceeds  that  of  the  advanced 
and  intelhgent,  very  many  of  the  latter  not  knowing,  or  not 
believing  that  they  have  the  power  of  returning,  whereas 
the  former  either  temporarily  exist  on  the  earth,  or  if  in 
the  second  sj^here,  are  less  removed  in  distance,  and  they 
ai'e  more  strongly  attracted  to  it,  and  more  commonly  visit 
it;  Also,  some  good  spirits  who  believe  in  its  possibihty 
are  deterred  from  making  the  attempt,  through  fear,  and 
the  minds  of  certain  of  this  class  are  impressed  with  this 
sense  of  fear  by  higher  spirits,  who  desire,  for  their  good, 
that  they  should  not  return.  Thus,  when  we  consider  that 
the  great  majority  of  good  spirits  rest  under  no  obligation 
to  retui'n,  that  others  are  not  attracted  to  earth,  that  many 
disbeheve  in  the  possibility  of  returning,  and  that  others 
are  restrained  by  fear  from  making  the  attempt,  it  is  not 
sui'prising  that  so  many  never  return.  Then  again  the 
aged  man,  or  woman,  whose  companion  has  gone  before, 
and  whose  children  are  grovni  to  man's  and  woman's  estate, 
surely  has  ordinarily  but  slight  motive  for  doing  so.  Men 
and  women  of  middle  age,  who  have  experienced  little  but 
misery  and  disappointment  here,  and  who  are  compelled 
to  take  on  their  former  earthly  conditions  and  feelings 
when  they  return,  have  even  less  inducement  to  revisit  the 
earth.  To  these  classes,  so  'numerous,  are  to  be  added 
those  who  while  yet  young  have  died  after  much  suf- 
fering, those  who  have  suddenly  died  under  agonizing 
circumstances,  or  while  insane,  the  timid,  the  indolent, 
the  indifferent,  and  we  then  have  a  majority  of  all  who 
pass  to  the  third  and  liigher  heavens  who  never  return  to 
earth. 

But  the  foregoing  remarks  more  particularly  apply  to 
the  past,  for  the  proportion  of  those  who  do  return  is  con- 
stantly increasing,  owing  to  the  dissemination  among  men 


132  UNBELIi:VIT^G    SPIRITS. 

of  the  knowledge  of  spiritual  intercourse,  and  of  more  cor- 
rect views  of  tlie  relations  existing  between  tlie  two  worlds. 
And  these  increasing  proportions  of  those  who  return  are 
made  up  almost  wholly  of  the  better  classes  of  spirits, 
many  of  whom  become  missionaries  to  earth's  inhabitants. 
The  rapidly  increasing  numbers  of  people  who  here  have 
learned  the  lessons  of  spiiit  intercourse,  and  the  spiritual 
j^hilogophy,  who  are  entering  the  spirit- v/orld,  the  majority 
of  whom  will  again  return  as  missionaries  to  earth,  will  ere 
long  constitute  a  numerous  and  mighty  army,  animated 
with  the  single  purpose  of  influencing  and  enlightening 
the  minds  of  men,  and  spreading  broadcast  the  knowledge 
of  spiritual  and  moral  truths,  and  rich  harvests,  through 
the  blessings  of  God,  will  crown  their  labors,  and  the 
time  is  now  not  distant  when  error  and  ignorance  will  no 
longer  sit  enthroned,  and  be  blindly  worshipped  and  ab- 
jectly obeyed, 

Not  only  is  it  the  case  that  the  majority  of  good  spirits 
in  the  past  have  not  revisited  the  earth,  but  it  is  equally 
true  that  the  majority  of  these  at  the  present  time  have  no 
more  faith  in  their  abihty  to  communicate  with  their  mor- 
tal friends,  through  mediums,  than  the  great  majority  of 
those  friends  have.  The  knowledge  of  intercourse  between 
spirits  and  mortals  has  made  even  less  progress  in  the 
heavens  than  on  earth,  but  it  is  steadily  extending  there, 
as  it  is  here,  multitudes  there,  as  here,  being  engaged  in 
acquiring  this  knowledge.  But  restricted  as  this  knowl- 
edge comparatively  is,  correct  views  in  relation  to  this  sub- 
ject have  never  before  so  extensively  prevailed  in  either 
world. 

At  one  of  our  meetings  Mr.  Owen  said  that  a  few  days 
previous  he  was  in  the  company  of  about  twenty  intelligent 
spirits,  of  both  sexes,  in  his  own  heaven,  at  that  time  the 
eighth,  when  he  alluded  to  the  intercourse  of  spirits  with 


ANCIENT    AND    FOREIGN    SPIRITS.  133 

mortals,  tlu'ougli  mediums,  and  not  one  of  those  present 
had  any  knowledge  of  its  possibility,  nor  could  be  made  to 
beheve  in  it  by  all  that  Mr.  Owen  could  say.  Though  well- 
bred  persons,  they  yet  could  not  suppress  smiles  of  incre- 
duhty,  mingled  with  pity,  and  one  of  their  number  apolo- 
gized to  Mr.  Owen,  saA^ing  that  thev  had  not  a  doubt  of  his 
sincerity,  they  only  thought  there  must  be  some  mistake 
on  his  part.  A  few  days  after  this  he  conversed  with  a 
gentleman  of  education  and  intelligence,  also  in  his  own 
heaven,  who  denied  the  possibility  of  this  intercourse,  and 
]\Ii'.  Owen  coidd  not  persuade  him  to  accompany  him  to 
oui'  medium  and  witness  the  fact  itself,  and  yet  this  same 
spiiit  told  i\li-.  Owen  that  above  all  things  he  would  value 
the  ]pri^ilege  of  communicating  with  his  wife,  yet  in  this 
hfe. 

]Mi'.  Owen  lectures  once  or  twice  every  week  to  spirits  in 
his  own,  and  low^er  heavens.  He  aims,  chiefly,  to  teach 
them  the  important  truth  that  they  can  return  to  earth, 
and  do  useful  work  in  impressing  the  minds  of  mortals 
with  noble  thoughts,  and  prompting  to  virtuous  acts,  and 
thi'ough  mediums,  instill  into  the  minds  of  their  friends 
the  tiiiths  of  Spiiituahsm. 


DO    ANCIENT    SPIPJTS   AND    SPIRITS   FROM   OTHER   WORLDS    VISIT 

THE   EARTH? 

My  spiritual  instructors  have  encountered  more  difficul- 
ties in  theii'  efforts  to  solve  the  above  questions  than  in 
obtaining  satisfactory  answers  to  most  others,  but  they 
have  definitely  ascertained  that  w^hen  spirits  reach  the 
thirtieth  heaven  they  no  longer  are  permitted  to  revisit 
the  earth,  and  w^hen  they  reach  the  fortieth  they  are  rarely 
permitted   to   descend   below   the    thirty-second    heaven. 


134:  DO    THEY    VISIT    THE    EARTH  ? 

They  regard  this  as  the  rule,  and  can  learn  of  no  authen- 
ticated excerptions  to  it,  but  admit  that  exceptions  may 
occui',  as  in  the  cases  of  Moses  and  Elijah  appearing  to 
Jesus  and  the  three  disciples  on  the  Mount,  the  former  hav- 
ing then  been  dead  about  fifteen  hundred  years,  and  the 
latter  about  nine  hundred.  As  to  ancient  spirits,  like 
Jesus,  Socrates,  Plato,  Paul,  etc.,  visiting  the  earth  in  our 
day,  while  admitting  its  possibility,  they  declare  their  entire 
unbelief  in  such  visits  ever  being  made,  nor  do  they  beheve 
that  either  of  those  ancient  spirits  has  revisited  the  earth 
since  the  first  century  or  two  after  their  original  departure 
from  it,  having  then  advanced  beyond  all  earthly  desires, 
attractions,  and  influences.  And  not  only  do  they  disbelieve 
in  any  of  these  ancient  spirits  ever  revisiting  the  earth,  but 
it  is  their  opinion  that  they  rarely  visit  even  the  highest 
heavens  directly  associated  with  it.  Charles  Stevens,  Mr. 
Owen's  fiiend  in  the  thirty-second  heaven,  reached  that 
heaven,  as  nearly  as  he  could  remember,  in  about  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  years,  and  he  then  was  not  permitted  to  de- 
scend below  the  fourth,  and  now  having  advanced  to  the 
fortieth  he  is  not  allowed  to  ^isit  Mr.  Owen  in  the  eighth, 
and  the  latter  learns  from  spirits  from  the  intermediate 
heavens  that  he  now  is  not  permitted  to  descend  below  the 
thirty-second  heaven,  and  all  direct  communication  between 
him  and  Mr.  Owen  has  ceased. 

As  to  the  question  of  spirits  from  the  sun,  moon,  and 
planets,  in  our  solar  system  visiting  our  earth,  my  instinic- 
tors  have  learned  that  certain  of  these  planets,  together 
with  the  sun  and  moon,  are  inhabited  by  intelligent  beings, 
in  human  form  like  ourselves,  and  that  occasionally  the 
latter  visit  the  higher  heavens  of  our  earth,  but  are  not  per- 
mitted to  visit  the  earth  itself,  nor  the  heavens  below  the 
thirty-second,  and  even  if  it  were  possible  for  them  to  visit 
the  earth  it  would  be  impossible  for  them  to  intelligently 


THE    SUN    AND    I^tOON    INHABITED.  135 

communicate  ^^'itll  us,  having  uo  knowledge  of  any  earthly 
lano-nage.  My  instructors  emphatically  deny  that  the  sun 
is  a  vast  globe  of  lire.  On  the  contrary  they  declare  that 
its  temperature  does  not  exceed  that  of  the  earth,  that  it 
possesses  a  luminous  atmos23here,  unassociated  with  intense 
heat,  and  that  its  surface  is  diversified  with  land  and  water, 
the  former  covered  mth  vegetation  of  like  nature  with  and 
superior  to  that  of  our  earth,  and  that  it  is  inhabited  by 
human  beings,  of  dilierent,  races,  and  animals  of  various 
species,  in  numbers  as  greatly  exceeding  those  of  our  earth 
as  the  dimensions  of  its  surface  exceed  those  of  the  latter. 
As  to  the  moon,  that  portion  of  its  surface  presenting  to 
the  earth  is  not  inhabited,  while  its  opposite  or  remote 
hemisphere  is  inhabited  by  beings  like  ourselves.  The 
planets  which  are  regarded  as  inhabited,  beyond  doubt,  are 
Jupiter,  Mars,  and  Venus,  and  the  others  are  believed  to 
be  inhabited.  Regarding  the  ability  of  spirits  in  our 
heavens  to  ^isit  other  planets,  and  the  sun,  and  moon,  my 
instructors  declare  that  all  spirits  in  heavens  above  the 
thirtieth  are  at  hberty,  and  possess  the  power,  to  do  so. 
Whether  still  higher  spirits  are  able  to  visit  heavenly 
bodies  beyond  the  boundaries  of  our  solar  system,  they 
are  unable  to  say,  but  it  is  theu*  opinion  that  when  spirits 
reach  a  certam  point,  not  very  distant  in  the  course  of 
theu"  jDrogression,  they  attain  this  power. 


QHAPTEE  IX. 

Guardian  Spirits.     Spirits  on  Different  Planes  Communicate.    Dif- 
ficulties Attendant  on  Spiritual  Intercourse. 

GUAKDIAN    SPIRITS. 

''  For  He  shall  give  his  angels  charge  over  thee  to  keep  thee  in  all  thy  ways.  They 
shall  bear  thee  up  in  their  hands  lest  thou  dash  thy  foot  against  a  stone.''' — Ps.  xci. 
11,  12. 

Eyery  mortal,  above  a  certain  age,  has  a  spirit  guardian 
whose  duty  it  is  to  watch  over  and,  to  the  extent  of  his  or 
her  power,  to  protect  and  guide  his  or  her  ward.  These 
spmts  are  in  the  closest  rapport  with  their  wards,  their 
magnetic  spheres  interblending,  and  they  are  able  to  hear 
and  understand  all  they  say,  to  read  all  their  thoughts,  and 
necessarily  to  perceive  their  intentions.  They  also  are  able 
to  hear,  vdth  equal  distinctness,  the  words  of  any  person 
who  may  be  conversing  with  their  wards,  while  at  the 
same  time,  it  may  be,  they  cannot,  understand  what  is  said 
by  other  persons  in  close  proximity  to  them.  Guardians 
are  always  of  the  same  sex  as  their  wards.  They  are  usu- 
ally appointed  for  children  when  these  arrive  at  the  age  of 
twelve  years,  but  when  the  latter  prematurely  develop 
they  sometimes  have  guardians  assigned  them  a  year  or 
two  before  this  period.  Children,  until  gTiardians  are  ap- 
pointed for  them,  are  not  held  accountable  for  their  acts. 

Guardian  spirits  receive  their  appointment  from  the 
fifteenth  heaven.     Messengers  are   sent  to  notify  them  of 


GUAl^DIAN    SPIRITS.  lo7 

the  missions  tliat  liave  been  assigned  tliem,  and  these  are 
g-enenilly  accepted  cheerfully.  The  principal  object  to  be 
attained  by  the  appointment  of  guardian  spirits  is  the  good 
of  theu'  Avards,  but  in  their  selection  the  good  of  the  guar- 
dians is  also  considered.  Some  are  appointed  so  that  in 
the  performance  of  their  necessary  duties  they  shall  find 
the  means  of  theii*  own  progxession,  the  means  of  expiation 
for  former  sins,  and  of  acquiring  knowledge  which  they 
neglected,  or  otherwise  failed  to  obtain  here.  Some  are 
aj^pointed  for  the  reason  that  being  sensible  of  the  benefit 
to  be  derived  fi'om  the  discharge  of  the  duties  they  request 
the  appointment,  and  others  still,  are  appointed  at  their 
OAvn  request,  as  gTiardians  of  certain  fiiends  whom  they 
desire  to  be  near  to  guide,  and  direct,  and  influence  for 
good,  while  still  others  are  selected  on  account  of  their  pe- 
cuhar  fitness  to  -pio'pevlj  and  effectively  influence  certain 
mortals  who,  either  are,  or  are  intended  to  be  instruments 
in  the  hands  of  the  S23irit-w^orld  for  the  accomphshment  of 
important  23urposes.  But  in  all  the  above  enumerated 
cases  suitabilit}'  is  always  regarded,  and  finally  determines 
the  selection  and  appointment. 

Guardian  spirits  are  intended  to  be  our  monitors,  as  well 
as  gTiardians.  Their  duty  is  to  imj^ress  our  minds,  and  by 
this  means  to  instmct  and  guide  us,  to  instill  virtuous 
thoughts  and  resolves,  inform  us  of  our  duty,  and  com- 
mend the  performance  of  it,  dissuade  from  evil  ways,  ad- 
monish us  of  our  faults,  reprove  us  when  we  go  astray,  and 
assist  the  development  of  special,  and  other  talents,  and 
the  exercise  of  every  gift.  They  possess  the  faculty  of 
pre^dsion  to  the  extent  that  by  an  effort  of  the  mind  they  are 
generally  able  to  foresee  any  immediate  danger  which  may 
thi'eaten  our  interests,  or  the  safety  of  our  persons,  and  they 
endeavor  to  impress,  and  when  our  minds  are  not  closed  to 
theii'  influence,  often  succeed  in  impressing  us  with  a  sense 


138  QUATJFICATIONS    AND    POWERS, 

of  impending  danger,  and  sometimes  of  the  precise  cliarac- 
ter  of  it.  It  is  cliiefly  when  we  disregard  these  impressions 
that  the  danger  is  encountered.  As  the  best  intentioned 
efforts  of  guardians  frequently  thus  fail  in  averting  evil  to 
their  wards,  so  failure  often  attends  their  efforts  to  restrain 
the  latter  from  the  commission  of  wrong  acts,  and  for  this 
there  are  various  reasons.  In  the  first  place,  many  guar- 
dians are  not  much  more  enlightened  nor  morally  better 
than  their  wards  ;  in  the  second  place,  they  sometimes  are 
overpowered  by  obsessing  spirits,  and  are  unable  to  pre- 
vent the  accomj^lishment  of  their  purposes,  and  thirdly, 
the  tendency  of  some  persons  to  evil  is  so  strong  that  the 
power  of  their  guardians  is  insufficient  to  restrain  them. 
It  sometimes  happens  that  either  the  gTiardian  or  ward 
progresses,  or  the  latter  retrogrades,  so  that  their  relations 
become  changed,  and  the  association  is  no  longer  beneficial 
to  one,  or  both,  the  connection  then  is  dissolved,  and 
another  guardian  appointed.  But  under  any  circumstan- 
ces it  is  rarely  the  case  that  a  spirit  sustains  the  relations 
of  guardian  for  a  longer  period  than  from  ten  to  twenty 
years,  and  it  follows,  that  during  a  long  life  a  person  must 
have  a  succession  of  guardians.  The  grade  of  the  guardian 
spirit,  when  first  appointed,  is  always  somewhat  higher 
than  that  of  the  ward,  but  frequently  the  difference  in  in- 
telligence, mental  capacity,  and  moral  status  is  slight.  The 
majority  of  spirits  are  not  guardians,  the  number  of  spirits, 
even  in  the  lower  heavens,  exceeding  that  of  mortals  on 
corresponding  planes. 

The  affinity  between  guardian  spirits  and  their  wards  is 
usually  of  a  more  intimate  nature  than  between  the  latter 
and  their  other  spirit  friends,  and  the  affection  of  a  guar- 
dian for  his  ward  is  generally  greater  than  that  which  most 
other  spirit  friends  bear  him.  Guardians  of  the  better 
class  find  happiness  in  the  performance  of  their  duties,  as 


THEIR   RELATIONS   TO    US.  130 

all  do  T^'lio  labor  for  tlie  good  of  others,  and  altliougli  they 
encounter  many  obstacles,  and  have  many  trials  and  dis- 
appointments, yet  they  know  that  they  are  angels  of  mercy, 
and  guides  and  protectors  of  blind  and  erring  mortals  who 
need  their  assistance,  as  they  at  one  time  needed  and  re- 
ceived that  of  others. 

"\Miile  most  other  spirits  in  any  considerable  degi'ee  ad- 
vanced are  unable  to  remain  with  us,  even  during  the  most 
favorable  weather,  beyond  an  hour  or  so  at  a  time,  guardian 
spirits  are  able  to  remain  for  many  hours  without  experi- 
encing discomfort.  Also,  their  memory  is  not  appreciably 
affected  by  earthly  conditions.  Guardians  are  also  able 
with  unerring  certainty  to  direct  their  course  toward  their 
wards,  wherever  these  may  be,  and  not  only  this,  but  they 
are  frequently  cognizant  while  in  theu'  own  sphere  or 
heaven  of  the  approach  of  danger  to  them,  or  of  serious 
fears  and  a2Dprehensions  which  may  agitate  their  minds, 
and  instantly  fly  to  their  assistance.  It  is  not  to  be'  sup- 
posed that  guardians  are  always  present  with  their  wards  ; 
on  the  contrary  they  are  absent  much  of  the  time,  but  as  it  is 
theu'  duty  to  watch  over  them  they  devote  whatever  time 
may  be  necessary  for  this  purpose.  Guardians,  at  least  of 
the  better  class,  never  shirk  this  duty,  as  their  labor  is  one 
of  love,  and  its  performance,  while  benefiting  their  wards, 
elevates  themselves.  Faithful  guardian  spirits  supply  the 
places  in  relation  to  us  that  our  x)arents  did,  or  should 
have  done  in  our  childhood.  For  very  many  of  the  for- 
tunes that  men  make,  and  lose,  they  are  indebted  to  their 
spuit  g-uardians  ;  for  the  former  when  their  guardians 
hax)pen  to  be  shrewd  and  sagacious,  for  the  latter  when 
they  are  the  reverse  of  this. 

There  is  one  duty  that  is  incumbent  on  guardians  which 
has  not  been  mentioned,  and  this  is  the  most  important  of 
all :  it  is  to  carefully  obsei^e  the  conduct  of  their  wards, 


IttO  GOOD    AND    BAD    ACTS    REGISTERED. 

and  note  every  good  and  every  evil  act  committed,  or  con- 
templated, and  each  night  this  record  of  the  previous  day 
is  reported  to  higher  spirits,  there  being  in  certain  of  the 
lower  heavens  official  buildings  where  these  spirits,  ap- 
pointed for  this  purpose,  are  present  at  certain  hours  to 
receive  the  reports  of  the  guardians  of  the  conduct  of  their 
wards,  and  these  rej)orts  are  afterwards  transmitted  to 
higher  heavens  where  a  credit  and  debit  account  is  kept 
of  every  person's  conduct,  by  recording  angels.  Upon  the 
death  of  every  individual  his  record,  thus  obtained,  is  re- 
ferred to,  and  if  his  good  deeds  outnumber  and  outweigh 
his  evil  the  entire  record  is  effaced,  and  his  sins  are  blotted 
out,  but  if  on  the  contrary,  his  evil  deeds  outnumber  and 
outweigh  his  good  deeds  he  is  condemned  to  expiate  them 
thi'ough  remorse  and  repentance. 

"Dark  tales  of  many  a  ruthless  deed ; 
The  ruined  maid — the  shrine  profaned — 
Oaths  broken,  and  the  threshold  stain' d 
With  blood  of  guests  !  there  written,  All, 
Black  as  the  damning  drops  that  fall 
From  the  denouncing-  angel's  pen. 
Ere  Mercy  weeps  them  out  again  !  " — Moore. 

Silence  is  enjoined  upon  guardian  spirits  when  in  the 
presence  of  their  wards,  and  even  when  in  their  own  homes 
they  are  not  permitted  to  converse  about  them.  Yet  there 
are  exceptions  to  this  rule,  as  when  it  is  necessary  to  speak 
in  protest  against  injury  or  injustice  to  their  wards,  or 
when  any  important  interests  of  the  latter  are  threatened. 
It  is  also  the  case,  that  the  guardian  spirits  of  the  different 
members  of  a  family  are  permitted  to  converse  with  each 
other  about  their  respective  wards,  and  although  they  are 
prohibited  from  communicating  directly  with  the  latter,  - 
through  mediums,  yet  the}'  are  frequently  permitted  to 


OUR    GUARDIANS    ARP]    RETICENT.  141 

furnisli  necessary  information  to  tlie  gtiides  of  mediums, 
in  reply  to  test  questions  by  their  wards.  It  is  through 
their  agency  that  mental  questions  are  most  generally 
answered,  as  ordinary  spirits  are  unable  to  do  this.  I  will 
here  say,  that  the  peculiar  gifts  -wdth  which  guardian  spirits 
are  endowed  are  limited  in  their  exercise  to  their  respective 
wards  ;  in  relation  to  other  mortals  these  gifts  are  non- 
existent. 

At  our  seances  my  instructors  fi-equently  have  alluded  to 
my  guardian  spirit  as  being  then  present,  but  not  a  word 
has  he  ever  communicated  to  me  directly,  or  indirectly, 
and  in  no  instance  has  his  opinion  on  any  subject,  no 
matter  how  interesting  or  important  to  me,  ever  been  re- 
ferred to  by  them.  They  declare  that  not  once  in  the 
man}^  hundi'ed  times  they  have  met  him  in  my  presence, 
has  he  and  either  of  them  exchanged  a  word  in  relation  to 
me.  AYhen  they  meet  him  in  the  heavens  they  are  per- 
mitted to  fi'eely  converse  with  him,  but  not  about  anything 
relating  to  me.  In  the  next  life,  persons  who  here  have  led 
proper  Hves  become  accjuainted  with  the  sjoirits  who  have 
been  their  gTiardians  in  this  life,  and  frequently  the  ac- 
c^uaintanceship  rij)ens  into  warm  and  enduring  mutual 
attachment.  IVIr.  Owen,  soon  after  he  entered  spirit-life, 
made  the  acc[uaiutance  of  his  guardian  spirit,  and  since 
then  they  have  been  intimate  and  dear  friends. 

From  what  has  here  been  said  it  follows,  that  if  any 
spii'it  should  claim  to  be  the  guardian  angel  of  any  person, 
he  would  speak  falsely,  for  this  is  one  of  the  secrets  which 
neither  he  nor  other  spirits  would  be  permitted  to  divulge. 
The  only  spuits  who  are  exempt  from  the  operation  of  this 
prohibitory  inile  are  the  guides  of  developed  mediums ; 
these,  nearly  always,  being  their  guardians.  Should  any 
other  guardian  sj)irit  divulge  the  secret  of  his  gniardianship 
to  a  mortal  the  offence  would  immediately  become  known 


142  THE    SPIRITS    WHO    COMMUNICATP:. 

to  higher  powers,  and  he  would  be  prohibited  from  again 
visiting  the  earth.  Upon  the  entrance  io  the  spirit-world 
of  persons  whose  earthly  lives  have  been  miss]3ent  it  is 
most  commonly  the  case  that  they  are  placed  under  the 
direction  and  control  of  their  former  guardians,  or  if  it  be 
that  these  are  not  sufficiently  advanced,  or  otherwise  quali- 
fied, then  under  others  more  competent,  whose  duty  it  is 
to  impress  their  minds  with  vivid  recollections  of  their  past 
sins,  picturing  these  to  them  in  all  their  hideousness,  so 
that  they  shall  become  odious  and  hateful  to  them,  and 
thus,  in  time,  lead  to  remorse  and  repentance.  Upon  these 
disciplining  spirits  is  conferred  the  power  of  rendering 
themselves  invisible  to  those  under  their  care,  but  this 
power  can  only  be  exercised  in  relation  to  the  latter. 

I  am  unable  to  obtain  any  evidence  in  confirmation  of 
the  traditional  behef  in  guardian  spirits  for  countries,  cities, 
etc. 

SPIEITS    ON   DIFFERENT    PLANES    COMMUNICATE. 

Spirits  of  various  moral  and  intellectual  grades  and  con- 
ditions retui'n  to  earth,  and  through  accessible  mediums 
commimicate  with  mortals,  and  their  communications  vary 
in  character  as  they  themselves  do.  In  all  ages  it  has  been 
thus.  Good  and  wise  spirits  commend  and  approve  our 
good  acts,  and  intentions,  but  never  flatter  our  pride  and 
vanity.  When  spirits  eulogize  our  virtues  and  perfections, 
they  should  always  be  distrusted.  No  wise  spirit  will 
boast  of  his  wisdom  and  knowledge,  no  good  spirit  of  his 
purity  and  virtue.  Wise  and  good  spirits  never  counsel 
rashness,  never  sanction  wrong.  They  always  sustain  the 
right,  and  inculcate  truthfulness  and  virtue,  charity  and 
love.  They  never  deal  in  denunciation,  unless  it  be  of  a 
great  wrong,  and  never  expose  a  fault  unless  from  a  sense 


GOOD    SPIRITS    ALWAYS    TRUTHFUL.  143 

of  duiy.  They  never  assume  eminent  names,  are  never  im- 
perious, vain,  or  ambitious  of  the  applause  of  mortals.  Their 
great  purpose,  their  earnest  desire,  is  to  guide  us  into  vir- 
tuous and  peaceful  paths,  to  lead  us  to  entertain  elevated 
and  correct  views,  and  be  governed  by  pure  motives,  and 
any  spirit  that  pursues  a  different  course  may  justly  be 
suspected,  and  his  teachings  should  either  be  received  with 
extreme  caution  or  entirely  rejected.  The  effects  of  their 
teachings  are  always  purifying  and  elevating,  never  cor- 
rupting and  degrading,  and  they  can  always  be  known  by 
these. 

All  spirits  in  the  heavens  above  the  third  are  incapable 
of  deception,  and  knowing  this  no  spirit  there  fever  mis- 
trusts another.  Deceptive,  false  spirits,  are  mostly  either 
of  the  earthly  or  second  sphere,  but  a  few  are  fi'om  the 
thii'd  heaven,  for  although  no  spirits  in  this  heaven,  while 
there,  will  wilfully  deceive,  yet  when  they  visit  the  earth,  if 
they  were  formerly  false,  it  frequently  happens  that  in  re- 
assuming  earthly  conditions  their  former  tendency  and 
inclination  to  deception  seize  them  with  a  force  which  is 
irresistible,  and  then  they  will  not  only  deceive  mortals, 
should  they  communicate  with  them,  but  also  other  spirits 
whom  thev  mav  there  meet.  Upon  their  return  to  their 
homes,  in  the  third  heaven,  they  reahze  and  deeply  regret 
their  conduct,  and  in  time  outgrow  their  infirmity,  and 
until  they  do  this  they  can  never  ascend  to  the  fourth 
heaven,  for  none  there  are  capable  of  deception  under  any 
circumstances. 

The  best  rule  by  which  to  determine  the  moral  status  of 
a  spirit  is  to  weigh  his  utterances,  and  from  the  character 
of  these  to  decide  whether  they  conform  to  the  standards 
of  strict  morahty  and  virtue,  or  fall  short  of  these.  The 
man  who  decides  this  question  favorably,  or  adversely,  only 
as  the  sp)irit  may  approve  or  condemn  his  sj)eculative  views, 


144  DIFFICULTIES^  OF    INTERCOURSE. 

and  opinions,  is  not  qualified  to  justly  determine  it.  With 
s^^irits  there  is  nothing  more  in  a  mere  name  than  there  is 
with  us.  If  a  spirit,  while  visiting  the  earth,  and  in  the 
presence  of  another  spirit  with  whom  he  were  unacquainted, 
should  allege  that  his  name  w^ere  John  Smith,  or  David 
Jones,  the  spirit  to  whom  he  should  state  this  would  have 
no  other  or  better  means  than  we  to  establish  the  truth  or 
falsity  of  the  assertion.  Many  active  energetic  spirits,  with 
good  intentions,  but  little  wisdom,  and  even  less  prudence, 
attach  themselves  to  certain  mediumistic  persons  and  in- 
fluence them  to  practically  realize  their  own  visionary  ideas 
in  this  life,  and  many  times  the  well  meaning  subjects  of 
their  guidance  are  led  into  serious  trouble,  perhaps  suf- 
fering and  misery,  through  their  intemperate  zeal  and  de- 
ficient knowledge.  Through  these  means  there  have  been 
as  many  martyrs  to  error  and  folly  as  to  tnith. 

When  mediums  abuse  and  betray  their  trusts,  some- 
times higher  powers  deprive  them  of  their  gifts,  and  even 
of  their  hves,  and  when  the  controlling  spirits  of  mediums 
are  faitliless  to  their  duty  it  frequently  happens  that  they 
are  displaced. 

DLETICULTIES    ATTENDANT    ON    SPIRIT    INTERCOUESE. 

It  is  sometimes  asked  by  Spirituahsts :  How  does  it  so 
frequently  happen  that  our  fiiends  fail  to  fulfil  their 
jDromises  to  communicate  with  us,  after  death  ? 

There  are  various  difficulties  in  the  way  of  the  fulfillment 
of  their  promises,  among  them  the  following. 

1.  Although  in  a  majority  of  instances  spirits  do  re- 
member their  promises,  yet  no  certain  rehance  can  be 
j)laced  on  their  ability  to  do  so. 

2.  It  may  be  that  they  cannot  obtain  access  to  good 
mediums. 


WHY    SO    FEW    COJ^IMUNICATE.  1J:5 

3.  If  they  should  be  able  to  do  this,  the  conditions  may 
not  be  favorable  to  satisfactory  communication. 

4.  If  they  should  be  able  to  communicate  satisfactorily 
through  certain  mediums  it  may  be  that  the  latter  are  un- 
kno^^Ti  to  their  friends,  and  therefore  it  would  be  useless 
to  attempt  to  communicate  through  them. 

5.  Sometimes,  modest;  retiring  spirits  are  prevented 
fi'om  communicating  through  mediums  by  other  selfish, 
and  self-asserting  spirits  crowding  them  aside,  and  di- 
recting the  proceedings  to  suit  their  own  pleasure  and 
convenience. 

6.  AMiile,  on  one  hand,  the  anxious  state  of  mind  of 
sj^iiits  fi'equently  interferes  with  and  even  prevents  satis- 
factory communication,  on  the  other  the  anxious  and 
positive  state  of  mind  of  the  sitters  perhaps  quite  as  often 
is  the  great  difficulty  in  the  way. 

Then,  as  to  others  who  seek  intercourse  with  their  de- 
parted fi'iends,  perhaps  those  friends  have  never  returned 
to  earth,  and  are  not  aware  of  their  presence  being  desired 
here,  or  if  aware  of  this  may  not,  for  certain  reasons,  be 
disposed  to  comply  with  the  requests  of  their  friends. 
With  regard  to  mediums,  themselves,  they  rarely  receive 
communications  from  theii'  spirit  friends,  either  through 
their  o^^ii  mediumship,  or  that  of  others,  and  the  reason 
assigned  by  s^oirits  for  this,  is,  that  the  practice,  if  per- 
mitted, would  tend  to  direct  their  attention  to  their  ovvti 
feelings  and  the  processes  of  impression,  or  control,  and 
create  an  anxious  and  expectant  state  of  mind  which  would 
seriously  interfere  with,  and  perhaj)s  render  impossible, 
that  passive  condition  upon  which  their  guides,  to  a  great 
extent,  depend  for  theii'  success  in  producing  correct  mani- 
festations. 

Most  Spirituahsts,  when  they  pass  to  the  other  side,  are 
greatly  disappointed  to  find  how  many  and  great  are  the 


l-iG  COMMON    CAUSES    OF    ERROR. 

difficulties  in  tlie  way  of  free  and  satisfactory  communica- 
tion with  their  mortal  friends.  Mr.  Owen,  in  our  conversa- 
tions, often  referred  to  his  own  disappointments  in  this 
respect,  and  repeatedly  said  that  were  it  not  for  the  good 
he  could  accomplish  by  assisting'  me  in  mj^-- work  he  would 
bid  farewell  to  earth,  and  devote  himself  exclusively  to  re- 
searches and  teaching  in  his  own  world. 

Perhaps,  the  most  common  cause  of  the  erroneous  repUes 
and  teachings  of  spirits  is  their  mistaking  theu'  opinions 
for  knowledge.  If  one  will  look  abroad  among  his  ac- 
quaintances, intelligent  though  they  may  be,  he  will  find 
that  many  of  them  constantly  make  this  mistake.  Such  a 
person  is  asked  :  is  such  a  thing  so,  or  so,  and  the  ready 
reply  is,  yes,  or  no,  when  perhaps  he  has  no  sj)ecial  knowl- 
edge of  the  subject,  but  opinion  is  mistaken  for  knowledge, 
and  this  will  be  made  manifest  if  the  respondent  be  closely 
questioned,  for  it  will  then  be  found  that  his  rej)ly  is  based 
entirely  on  opinion,  or  even  impression.  It  is  precisely 
the  same  with  many  spirits,  as  I  have  frequently  observed. 
With  this  class  of  spirits  there  is  the  same  desire  to  be 
regarded  as  wise  above  knowledge,  as  being  capable  of  im- 
parting information  on  all  subjects,  and  the  same  disin- 
chnation  to  be  thought  lacking  in  capacity  and  wisdom. 
Although  immortal,  they  are  yet  human,  Avith  at  least 
most,  if  not  all  of  the  weaknesses  and  failings  of  humanity. 

Another  fact,  which  it  is  proper  to  here  mention,  is,  that 
when  spirits  of  dependent  and  relying  natures  are  with  us, 
in  the  presence  of  mediums,  we  are  quite  as  able  to  influ- 
ence their  opinions  as  they  are  to  influence  ours. 

Wise  and  good  spirits  are  in  possession  of  knowledge 
which  they  are  prohibited  from  communicating  to  us. 
Paul,  and  other  mediums  hke  him,  have  "  heard  unspeak- 
able words  which  it  is  not  lawful  for  a  man  to  utter,"  and 
there  are  spiritual  things  which  our  language  is  inadequate 


NO    HIGHWAY    OF    COMMUNICATION.  147 

to  describe,  or  express.  The  prohibited  knowledge,  my 
instructors  inform  me,  is  not  of  a  nature  to  justify  dis- 
agTeeable  apprehensions  ;  we  are  simply,  yet,  unprepared 
to  receive  it.  The  prohibition  proceeds  from  spirits  in 
authority. 

The  barriers  between  the  two  worlds,  ordinarily,  and  for 
practical  purposes,  are  nearly  as  impassable  to  spirits  as  to 
mortals,  and  to  many  sj)irits  it  is  as  difficult  to  penetrate 
the  material  life  as  it  is  for  us  to  penetrate  the  spiritual, 
and  even  the  comparatively  few  spirits  who  succeed  in  their 
endeavors  encomiter  difficulties  which  we  constantly  fail  to 
reahze.  There  is  no  direct  highway  of  communication  for 
all  between  the  two  worlds,  and  the  means  of  intercourse 
are  generally  imperfect,  and  variable.  All  investigators 
should  understand  this,  and  all  candid  minds  should  make 
allowance  for  it. 


CHAPTER  X. 

The  Philosophy  of  Spirit-Intercourse.     The  Memory  and  Knowl- 
edge of  Spirits, 

THE   PHILOSOPHY    OF    SPIRIT-INTEECOUESE. 

When  a  spirit  controls  a  medium  lie  does  not  personally 
enter  the  body  of  the  latter,  and  dispossess  his  sj^irit,  any 
more  than  a  mesmerizer  enters  the  body  of  his  sensitive, 
or  subject.  The  methods  pursued  and  the  relative  posi- 
tions of  the  respective  parties  in  both  cases  are  similar, 
and  the  power  or  force  exercised  in  the  accomplishment 
of  their  objects  is  the  same,  namely,  Avill-power. 

When  addressing  audiences,  through  mediums,  spirits  at 
first  usually  place  one  or  both  hands  on  the  mediums'  heads, 
and  with  some,  and  especially  with  those  who  are  unaccus- 
tomed to  control,  it  is  necessary  to  retain  them  in  that  po- 
sition while  siDeaking,  but  when  mediums  are  thoroughly 
controlled  by  spirits  who  are  accustomed  to  controlling, 
there  is  no  necessity  for  this,  nor  for  personal  contact  with 
their  mediums  in  any  way.  Here  all  the  movements  of  the 
body  and  hmbs  of  the  medium  correspond  to  and  are  but 
the  reflected  movements  of  those  of  the  body  and  limbs  of 
the  spirit,  and  are  simultaneous  with  the  movements  of  the 
latter,  no  appreciable  instants  of  time  elapsing  between 
those  of  spirit  and  medium.  This  includes  every  inclina- 
tion and  movement  of  the  head,  every  gestiu'e,  attitude, 
and  every  step  taken.      A^H.ien  addressing   an   audience, 


TRANCE   ISIKD'.UMS.  119 

under  tliese  circumstances,  tlie  rapport  of  the  spirit 
speaker  mtli  the  medium  is  so  intimate  that  he  perceives 
each  person  in  it,  and  hears  what  may  be  said  as  distinctly 
as  if  he  were  personally  present  in  the  flesh,  and  like  other 
speakers  he  is  aided  and  strengthened  m  power  by  an  ap- 
preciative and  s^Tinpathetic  audience.  Li  acquiring  and 
holding  control  of  mediums,  spirits  most  commonly  re- 
quii*e  the  assistance  of  other  spirits.  This  assistance  is 
rendered  by  unitedly  and  steadily  projecting  then'  mag- 
netism, or  ^ill-force,  upon  both  the  spirit-speaker  and  the 
medium  ;  principally  upon  the  former. 

Although  with  trance  mediums  their  controlling  spirits 
generally,  perhaps  always,  give  utterance  to  the  language 
of  their  discourse,  yet  their  exact  words  do  not  necessarily 
find  expression  thi'ough  the  h^^s  of  the  former,  it  being 
more  commonly  the  case  that  only  the  ideas  which  the 
words  convev  to  the  minds  of  the  mediums,  and  which  are 
thereupon  impressed,  are  transmitted,  more  or  less  cor- 
rectly— sometimes  very  incorrectly — to  the  audience  in  the 
language  of  the  mediums,  this  language,  owing  to  a  cer- 
tain exaltation  of  the  mental  faculties,  generally  being 
superior  to  that  which  ordinarily  characterizes  them.  Thus 
spirits  in  impressing  the  minds  of  this  class  of  mediums 
labor  under  the  difficulty  of  ha\TJig  their  ideas  mingled 
and  confused  with  those  of  the  mediums,  and  it  frequently 
results  in  the  ideas  expressed  through  the  lips  of  the  latter 
being  quite  different  from  their  o^ti.  This  mostly  arises 
fi'om  imperfect  control,  the  medium  very  rarely  being  con- 
trolled so  absolutely  and  perfectly  that  the  functions  of 
his  mind  are  comj)letely  suspended.  In  the  above  princi- 
pal sources  of  difficulty  lies  the  exj)lanation  of  the  many 
inconsistencies  and  errors  which  have  marred  the  other- 
wise eloquent  and  instructive  addresses  of  some  of  our 
trance  speakers. 


150  MR.  Owen's  experience. 

Another  difficulty  sometimes  experienced  by  spirits  in 
addressing  audiences,  through  trance  mediums,  is  one 
mentioned  to  me  by  Mr.  Owen.  A  short  time  after  he 
had  dehvered  his  address  in  Brooklyn,  in  August,  1877, 
through  the  mediumship  of  Mrs.  C.  V.  L.  Richmond,  he  in- 
formed me  that  while  speaking  on  that  occasion  the  minds 
of  the  spirits  around  him,  who  with  himself  formed  a 
circle  of  considerable  power,  and  who  were  there  for  the 
purpose  of  aiding  him  in  the  delivery  of  his  discourse, 
were  so  intent  upon  the  subject,  and  the  rapport  between 
the  minds  of  the  other  sj)irits,  his  own,  and  that  of  the 
medium  was  so  intimate  that  frequently  when  he  paused 
their  ideas  found  expression  through  the  lips  of  the  me- 
dium, and  thus,  portions  of  the  address,  as  delivered,  really 
did  not  originate  with  him.  In  addition  to  this  the  ideas 
of  the  medium,  at  times,  were  mingled  with,  and  even  sub- 
stituted, though  unintentionally,  for  his  own. 

The  majority  of  spirits  who  address  audiences  through 
inspirational  or  trance  mediums  read  their  addresses  from 
spiritual  manuscript,  not  being  able  to  rely  on  their 
memory  while  on  the  earthty  plane,  either  for  ideas  or 
words.  The  spirit  speaker  usually  takes  a  position  directly 
behind  the  medium,  and  then  is  brought  into  rapport 
with  him,  or  her,  partly  through  his  own  efforts,  and  partly 
through  those  of  other  spirits  present,  who  form  a  circle, 
and  project  their  magnetism,  or  will-force,  as  before  said, 
on  both  the  spirit  speaker  and  medium.  When  the  line 
of  communication  between  the  two  worlds  is  thus  estab- 
hshed,  the  former  reads,  audibly  and  distinctly,  from  his 
manuscript,  (audible  to  spirits,)  and  either  his  words  are 
repeated,  or  his  ideas  expressed  in  different  language  by 
the  lips  of  the  medium.  It  is  by  this  means  that  addresses 
like  certain  of  those  of  Thomas  Gales  Forster,  abounding 
in  statistical  and  historical  facts,  with  exact  and  multiplied 


SPEAKING    EXHAUSTS    SPIRITS.  151 

data,  or  extended  quotations  from  authors,  are  successfully 
delivered.  When  spirits  influence  mediums,  such  as  we 
beheve  Shakspeare,  Sir  Walter  Scott,  and  Charles  Dickens 
to  have  been,  to  TNTite  plays,  and  novels,  they  thus  psychol- 
ogize and  assume  control  of  their  minds,  and  impress 
them  vi-ith  the  words  of  the  pla}^,  or  novel,  which  has  pre- 
viously been  composed  by  these,  or  other  spirits,  and  by 
them  committed  to  writing.  All  that  remains  for  the  re- 
puted author  to  do  is  in  turn  to  commit  the  ideas  he  re- 
ceives to  writing,  or  dictate  them  to  an  amanuensis. 

"SVhere  there  is  unusual  difficulty  in  spirits  communicat- 
ing through  mediums,  their  power,  irrespective  of  the 
form  of  mediumship,  rapidly  becomes  exhausted,  and  fre- 
cjuently  they  are  compelled  to  make  a  hasty  retreat  to  their 
homes  in  order  to  recuperate  their  strength,  and  with  all 
but  the  most  experienced,  it  is  an  exhausting  labor,  and 
soon  the  mind  becomes  weary  and  confused.  The  periods 
of  time  during  which  s^Dirits  are  able  to  continue  these 
employments  vary  with  different  spirits,  and  not  only  this, 
but  the  abihty  of  each  spirit  varies  in  respect  to  different 
mediums,  and  the  same  spirit  that  could  comfortably  re- 
main one  hour  with  a  circle,  if  he  were  not  thus  engaged, 
might  not  be  able  to  remain  one  half  that  time,  if  he  were. 

Few  spirits  are  able  to  command  the  perfect  exercise  of 
theii'  mental  faculties  in  our  atmosphere,  even  in  the  most 
favorable  weather,  and  when  the  weather  is  unfavorable  it 
not  only  renders  the  majority  of  them  uncomfortable,  but 
they  find  difficulty  in  conversing  with  each  other,  and  their 
power  to  do  so  soon  becomes  exhausted.  In  decidedly  tem- 
X^estuous  weather  it  is  only  guardians,  and  the  very  lowest 
spirits,  and  a  few  others  that  are  able  to  remain  on  earth 
beyond  very  brief  periods  of  time,  and  comparatively,  few 
good  spirits  other  than  guardians  visit  the  earth  during  the 
prevalence  of  such  weather.    The  rapid  exhaustion  attendant 


152  RESEARCHES    IN    SCIENCE. 

upon  mental  labor  in  warm  weather,  wliicli  we  ourselves 
commonly  experience,  is  as  mucli  of  tlie  spiritual  as  of  the 
l^hjsical  organism,  for  disembodied  spirits  are  even  more 
depressed  by  a  heated  atmosjohere  than  we  are. 

Eesearches  in  physical  science  can,  generally,  be  pursued 
much  better  here  than  from  the  spirit  side  of  life,  and  thus 
it  is  that  addresses  through  mediums  by  sj)irit  scientists 
are  but  too  often,  in  point  of  clearness  and  accuracy  of 
statement,  inferior  to  the  former  lectures  and  writings  of 
the  same  spirits  when  in  the  flesh,  and  this,  even  when  the 
difficulties  of  conveying  the  exact  ideas  of  the  spirit  speaker 
are  reduced  to  a  minimum.  Such  lectures  through  mediums 
have  no  merit  above  that  of  the  lectures  daily  delivered  by 
our  competent  scientists.  The  majority  of  scientists  when 
they  pass  ti-'om  earth  leave  much  of  their  interest  in  science 
as  well  as  much  of  their  knowledge  of  it,  behind  them. 
As  to  questions  of  health  and  disease,  causes  and  nature 
of  malaria,  the  origin  of  worlds,  of  species,  and  hfe,  the 
laws  of  nature,  the  nature  of  electricity  and  magnetism,  of 
Hght  and  sound,  and  the  subjects  of  physiology,  chemistry, 
and  other  branches  of  science  and  philosophy,  the  opinions 
of  the  majority  of  spirits  regarding  them  are  of  little  value, 
and  for  the  most  part  their  learned  disquisitions  on  these 
subjects  are  either  the  identical  opinions  which  are  j)i'eva- 
lent  with  us,  or  theories  and  speculations  of  their  own,  the 
weakness  and  errors  of  which  are  often  transparent  to 
mortals,  as  they  probably  are  to  most  intelligent  spirits. 

The  fact  is,  the  majority  of  spirits  who  discourse  to  us 
on  such  subjects  derive  their  ideas,  ]Drincipally,  fi'om  spir- 
itual copies  of  our  books,  and  journals,  in  which  these  sub- 
jects are  treated,  not  a  book  of  any  importance  and  value 
being  j^ubhshed  here  which  is  not  republished  there,  and 
copies  are  within  the  reach  of  all  spuits,  even  in  the  third 
heaven,  and  many  of  our  pubhcations  are  extensively  read 


A   MEANS    OF    ACQUIKING    KNOWLEDGE.  153 

in  that  life.  Thus  we  can  account  for  the  fact,  which  has 
been  noticed  by  all  observing  Spiritualists,  that  frequently 
soon  after  important  discoveries  in  science  and  art  have 
been  announced  through  books,  or  the  public  journals, 
these  discoveries  have  been  either  alluded  tx),  or  discussed, 
in  the  discourses  of  our  inspirational  speakers.  The  spirits 
who  sj)eak  through  these  mediums  most  commonly  obtain 
their  information  from  spiritual  copies  of  these  publications. 
The  majority  of  spirits  who  descant  upon  these  topics, 
never  possessed  any  profound  knowledge  of  them  while 
here,  and  have  had  no  02:>portunities,  superior  to  ours,  of 
increasing  their  knowledge  on  the  other  side.  The  physi- 
cal sciences  relate  exclusively  to  the  material  world,  and 
not  to  the  spiritual,  and  as  spiritual  things  are  only  spirit- 
ually discerned,  so  material  things  are,  with  comparatively 
few  exceptions,  best  discerned  materially.  From  what  I 
can  learn  I  am  compelled  to  believe  that  even  the  highest 
spirits,  that  communicate  directly  with  mortals,  have  as 
Httle  knowledge  of  such  questions  as  the  origin  of  the 
w^orld,  and  of  life,  the  nature  of  magnetism  and  light,  etc., 
as  we  have. 

And  vet,  after  all  that  can  be  said  of  the  deficiencies  of 
the  majority  of  those  spirits  w4io  assume  to  instruct  us 
through  mediums,  upon  scientific  subjects,  it  still  remains 
that  there  are  spiiits  qualified  to  instruct  us  upon  certain 
of  these  subjects,  and  who  most  commonly  do  so  by  im- 
pressing the  minds  of  peculiar  individuals  w^ho  unite  in 
their  own  persons  the  scientist  and  the  medium,  and  the 
world  is  thus  indebted,  at  least  in  part,  to  scientific  spirits 
for  the  electric  telegraph,  the  telej)hone,  microphone,  and 
latest  of  all,  for  the  apphcation  of  electricity  to  illuminating 
pui-poses.  My  instructors,  who  at  my  request  at  various 
times  \isited  IMr.  Edison,  at  his  laboratorv,  assured  me 
that  not wilh'^'^an ding  his  extraordinary  natural  talent  for 


154  OUR    THOUGHTS    REACHING    SPIRITS. 

invention,  he  is  greatly  indebted  to  tlie  assistance  of  scienti- 
fic spirits  for  his  success,  and  upon  each  of  their  visits  they 
found  him  surrounded  with  spirits  of  this  class. 

Ordinarily,  spirits  are  unable  from  their  heavenly  homes 
to  influence  their  mortal  friends,  or  others,  but  my  spirit 
instructors  find  abundant  evidence  that  certain  spirits, 
higher  than  themselves,  do  possess  this  power,  and  exercise 
it,  not  only  in  relation  to  us,  but  to  them.  As  a  rule,  the 
thoughts  of  their  friends  on  earth  concerning  them  do  not 
reach  sj)irits  in  their  homes,  but  sometimes  when  they  have 
passed  away  suddenly  and  under  peculiarly  distressing  cir- 
cumstances, and  where  their  departui^e  has  been  deeply 
lamented,  and  also  in  certain  other  cases  where  earthly 
friends  deeply  grieve  for  them,  the  mournful  thoughts  and 
sad  regrets  of  the  latter  reach  them  and  draw  them  irresis- 
tibly to  earth.  But  it  appears  that  when  these  spirits  have 
passed  beyond  the  third  heaven  they  are  no  longer  sensible 
to  such  influences.  Also,  spirits  on  low  planes  sometimes 
are  unable  to  resist  the  summonses  of  mortals,  even  when 
compliance  with  their  demands  is  displeasing  to  them. 
With  certain  of  these  spirits  the  desires  of  their  friends  and 
others,  here,  concerning  them,  whether  of  an  agreeable  or 
disagreeable  nature,  seem  in  some  mysterious  way  to  reach 
them,  and  they  are  correspondingly  affected  by  them. 
Guardian  spirits  also  must  be  included  among  those  who 
are  influenced  by  mortals,  for  with  some  it  matters  not  at 
what  distance  they  may  be  from  their  wards,  they  instantly 
become  cognizant  of  anxious  feelings  or  apprehensions  of 
danger  on  the  j)art  of  the  latter,  as  they  also  are  of  any 
real  danger  that  may  threaten  them.  But  it  is  only  the 
majority  of  guardians,  and  certain  individuals  of  the  two 
former  classes,  that  are  thus  subject  to  mortal  influences, 
for  our  thoughts  of  other  spirits,  even  when  continuous, 

9 

and  intense,  rarelv  or  never  reach  them  in  their  homes. 


A   MISTAKE    OF    S"\VEDENBORG.  155 

Swedenborg,  in  liis  H.  and  II.,  ^  494,  says  :  "When  any 
one  there  (in  heaven),  thmks  intensely  of  another,  and  is 
impressed  in  his  mind  and  memory  with  his  hkeness,  and 
certain  particulars  of  his  hfe,  having  at  the  same  time  a 
strong  desire  to  see  him,  the  person  so  tliought  of  becomes 
immediately  present  to  him,  as  if  sent  to  him." 

We  here  believe  Swedenborg  to  be  in  error,  for  disem- 
bodied spirits,  although  no  longer  mortal,  are  yet  in  all 
respects  human,  and  consequently  there  must  be  moments, 
perhaps  seasons,  when  j^rivac}"  is  desirable,  and  even  neces- 
sarv,  when  thev  are  disinchned  to  meet  even  their  friends, 
much  less  to  be  arbitrarily  and  unexj)ectedly  summoned  to 
the  presence,  perhaps  of  strangers,  in  whom  they  feel  no 
interest,  and  whom  possibly  they  may  wish  to  avoid,  for 
spirits,  though  not  absolutely  rej)elled  by  the  presence  of 
anv  in  their  o\ni  heavens,  are  attracted  to  certain  others 
vdth  whom  they  prefer  to  associate,  and  in  whose  society 
they  are  hapj^iest.  If  it  were  as  represented  by  Sweden- 
borg spirits  in  the  higher  heavens  would,  at  least  to  a  cer- 
tain extent,  be  subject  to  the  whims  and  caprices  of  each 
other,  and  would  not  enjoy  that  sense  of  personal  indepen- 
dence and  freedom,  which,  provided  they  still  are  human, 
must  be  as  highly  prized  by  them  as  by  us.  My  spirit 
instinictors  all  deny  the  correctness  of  this  statement  of 
Swedenborg's. 

Thoughts  are  not  more  tangible  or  comprehensible  to 
spirits  than  to  mortals.  So  far  as  they  know  they  have  no 
existence  as  entities.  May  it  not  be  that  they  are  forms  of 
spiritual  force,  determined  by  the  modes  of  action  of  the 
functional  processes  of  the  mind  ?  Spirits  ordinarily  are 
unable  to  read  each  other's  thoughts.  They  have  their 
secret,  or  at  least  private  thoughts,  as  well  as  we  mortals. 
What  we  ordinarily  term,  reading  the  mind,  is  with  the  ma- 
jority of  them,  as  with  us,  more  of  an  impression  received, 


156  MIND    EEADING. 

or  a  feeling,  than  a  clear  and  distinct  perception.  Our 
guardians,  and  a  very  few  other  spirits,  perhaps  more  ad- 
vanced than  they,  are  able  to  read  our  minds  readily,  and 
accurately,  and  mind  readers  with  us  are  mediums  whom 
such  spirits  impress  mth  the  thoughts  of  others,  whose 
minds  the}^  are  able  to  read.  But  although  our  guardian 
spirits  and  certain  others  as  just  stated,  are  able  to  read 
the  thoughts  at  the  moment  existing  in  our  minds,  yet  this 
is  the  hmit  of  their  j)ower,  for  they  are  not  able  to  perceive 
past  thoughts  nor  the  knowledge  with  which  our  minds 
are  furnished  exceptmg  as  they  j^erceive  it  by  careful  obser- 
vation or  association  as  we  inform  ourselves  of  the  qualifi- 
cations of  each  other.  Our  memory  is  a  sealed  volume  to 
all  disembodied  spiiits. 


THE   MEMOEY   AND   KNOWLEDGE    OF    SPIRITS. 

"  Each  fainter  trace  that  memorj'  holds, 
So  darkly,  of  departed  years, 
In  one  broad  glance  the  soul  beholds, 
And  all  that  was  at  once  appears." — Byron. 

"  Thou  shalt  forget  thy  misery  and  remember  it  as  waters  that  pass  away,  and 
thine  age  shall  be  clearer  than  the  noonday  ;  thou  shalt  shine  forth,  thou  shalt  be  as 
the  morning." — Job  xi.  16,  17. 

While  disembodied  spirits  possess  certain  powers  with 
which  they  are  not  generally  credited,  they  have  by  us 
been  invested  with  other  powers  which  they  do  not  pos- 
sess. It  is  supposed  by  some,  that  they  perceive  all  the 
23ast,  the  present,  and  the  future,  and  have  knowledge  of 
all  things.  This  is  an  error,  for  few  possess  the  faculty  of 
divining  the  future,  few  indeed  have  the  means  of  knowing 
all  that  is  transpiring  in  the  present,  either  here,  or  in  the 
spirit-world,  and  of  the  past,  very  few  have  little  more 
knowledge  than  we  have,  and  so  far  as  it  rela-tes  to  their 


MOIOKY    OF    SriKITS    ITNKELIABLE.  157 

o\Mi  earthly  lives  tlieir  memory,  as  a  rule,  is  far  less  re- 
liable than  that  of  the  friends  from  whom  they  have  parted. 
As  a  general  truth  or  proposition,  it  may  be  said  that  we 
pass  into  the  next  life  imchanged,  except  the  loss  of  the 
earthly  body,  but  we  must  qualify  this  by  saying  that  while 
the  sj^iritual  senses  and  the  intellectual  faculties  generally 
are  exalted,  the  faculty  of  memory,  as  just  stated,  in  so  far 
as  it  relates  to  earthly  events  and  circumstances,  is  with 
most  persons  greatly  impaired,  and  even  this  imperfect  re- 
membrance of  the  things  of  this  life  steadily  fades  from  our 
minds,  the  realities  of  that  hfe  gradually  obliterating  the 
remembrance  of  former  things.  The  memory  of  spirits 
who  2^ass  over  in  j^outh  or  middle  age  as  to  the  circum- 
stances of  theii*  earth-life  is  generally  much  better  than 
that  of  spirits  who  die  in  old  age. 

It  follows,  that  most  spirits  upon  their  entrance,  to  spirit 
life  do  not  experience  a  distinct  remembrance  of  all  or 
even  the  greater  number  of  the  acts  and  circumstances  of 
theii'  past  hves.  Those  who  have  led  immoral  lives  have 
their  misdeeds  thus  miiTored  to  their  minds  T^ith  fearful 
clearness  and  force,  but  the  good  and  true  have  no  such 
haiTowing  exj^eriences.  With  them  only  the  memory  of 
the  good  they  have  done  abides  with  them,  the  modicum 
of  evil  they  may  have  wrought  is  buried  in  their  graves.  P-^^*""^^ 

xAJthouGfh  it  is  reasonable  to  believe  that  every  act  of  our  -^/^^^ 
lives,  and  everything  that  has  come  under  our  observation,  -*^ 
or  within  our  experience,  has  made  its  stamp  upon  the 
memory,  and  although  it  is  probable  that  if  the  proper 
conditions  were  provided  the  recollection  of  any  act  or  cir- 
cumstance, which  has  made  its  impression,  would  again  be 
fully  or  partially  revived,  there  is  yet  no  reason  why  the 
remembrance  of  all  these  things  should  be  active  in  the 
next  life.  The  lessons  which  most  of  them  furnish  have 
already  been  learned,  and  it  is  probable  that  all  the  beiie- 


fC^^Cvt- 


158  THE    MEMOKY    OF    MISDEEDS. 

fits  wliicli  could  accrue  from  the  perfect  remembrance  of 
tliem  would  result  from  the  recollection  of  such  things  only, 
as  is  excited  by  future  experiences,  and  which  can  assist 
our  judgment,  and  tend  to  perfect  our  knowledge. 

These  remarks  apply  to  the  great  majority  of  spirits  of 
every  grade  and  class.  The  vivid  recollections  of  former 
misdeeds  which  sooner  or  later  haunt  the  imaginations  of 
guilty  si)irits,  and  which  are  with  them  the  efficient  means 
of  reformation,  are  mostly  dependent  on  the  agency  of 
higher  spirits,  generally  their  former  guardians.  Multi- 
tudes of  low  spirits  now  exist  whose  remembrance  of  the 
events  and  circumstances  of  their  earth-lives  is  shadow}^ 
and  vague.  These  are  still  unrepentant,  but  when  the 
time  comes  that  their  minds  can  be  imjoressed,  their 
guardians,  whose  remembrance  of  their  transgressions, 
and  theirs  only,  is  clear  and  distinct,  will  arouse  them 
from  their  torpidity  and  indifference,  and  quicken  their 
memories,  galvanize  as  it  were  their  minds  into  activity, 
compel  self-examination,  which  will  induce  feelings  of  re- 
morse, to  be  followed  by  repentance  and  reformation,  but 
a  moment  s  reflection  will  convince  us  that  when  this  pur- 
pose is  accomplished  no  possible  good  can  accrue  from  the 
further  and  constant  remembrance  of  deeds,  for  which 
atonement  has  been  made,  but  on  the  contrary,  no  place 
nor  condition  could  be  heaven  where  a  distinct  remem- 
brance of  them  were  possible. 

We  do  not  carry  with  us  to  the  next  life  the  full  and 
perfect  memory  of  all  the  acts  and  circumstances  of  our 
earth-life,  but  we  do  carry  with  us  and  avail  ourselves  of 
the  accumulated  fruits  of  our  entire  earthly  experience. 
Good  spirits  become  more  and  more  mdifferent  to  these 
events  and  circumstances,  and  the  remembrance  of  them, 
if  this  has  existed  in  any  considerable  degree,  fades  as 
their  interest  in  them  declines.     Among  themselves  they 


MR.  owen'g  memory.  159 

rarely  have  occasion  to  refer  to  the  dates  of  the  events  of  their 
eai"th-hfe,  and  not  very  freqnently  to  the  events  themselves, 
and  even  if  they  should  at  lirst  remember  them  they  soon 
forget  them,  and  hence,  when  they  return  and  attempt 
to  communicate  with  their  friends  here  through  mediums, 
and  reply  to  test  questions,  they  are  liable  to  fi'equent  mis- 
takes. I\Ir.  Owen  informed  me  that  for  the  first  few  days, 
perhaps  a  week,  after  he  entered  spirit-life,  though  actively 
ahve  to  everything  there,  he-  had  no  distinct  remembrance 
of  the  friends,  events,  localities,  etc.,  of  the  hfe  he  had  just 
left,  but  after  the  expiration  of  that  period  of  time  it 
gradually  revived,  and  became  quite  distinct,  but  then, 
live  months  afterwards,  his  memory  of  earthly  things  was 
again  steadily  fading,  and  were  it  not  for  his  frequent 
visits  to  earth  it  would  by  that  time  have  been  entirely 
unreliable.  When  spirits  are  constantly  attracted  to  earth 
their  memory  of  the  events  and  circumstances  of  their 
eai*thiy  existence,  of  persons  with  whom  they  were  simply 
acquainted,  localities,  etc.,  is  much  better  than  it  other- 
wise would  be.  Mr.  Owen  also  at  one  time  informed  me 
that  a  few  days  before  he  had  conversed  with  a  spirit  who 
had  been  in  that  life  but  three  years,  and  who  during  that 
time  had  not  visited  the  earth,  and  he  assured  him  that  he 
had  forgotten  nearly  everything  pertaining  to  his  earth- 
Hfe,  and  he  did  not  regret  it.  Mr.  Owen  thought  he  had 
been  unha2Dj)y  here,  and  his  desire  to  banish  all  thoughts 
of  his  former  life  had  hastened  the  failure  of  his  memory 
in  regard  to  these  things. 

Many  a  statesman,  general,  philosopher,  author,  poet, 
artist,  and  architect,  whose  deeds  and  w^orks  have  outlived 
him,  remembers  far  less  of  his  achievements  than  is  known 
by  the  present  generation  of  scholars,  who  have  acquired  a 
knowledge  of  them  from  the  books  in  which  they  are  re- 
corded.    The  builders  of  the  colossal  temples  of  Thebes, 


160  MEMORY    GRx\.DUALLY    FAILS. 

tlie  rock  temjjles  of  Lidia,  and  tlie  Parthenon  "at  Athens, 
probably  remember  these  monuments  of  then"  skill  and 
industry  only  by  name,  while  even  Michael  Angelo,  and 
Sir  Christopher  Wren,  in  modern  times,  have  respectively 
but  an  indistinct  remembrance  of  St.  Peter's  at  Rome,  and 
St.  Paul's  in  London. 

Nevertheless,  it  is  true  that  certain  spirits  do  retain  a 
distinct  remembrance  of  the  events  and  circumstances  of 
their  earth-life  for  a  limited  period  of  time,  but  in  all 
cases  this  gradually  fails,  but  all  true  knowledge  of  spirit- 
ual things  acquired  here,  is  retained  perfectly,  and  is  of 
inestimable  value  to  us  there. 

The  memory  of  spirits  is  generally  as  defective  in  regard 
to  things  here,  when  they  return  to  their  homes,  as  it  is  in 
relation  to  things  there,  when  they  visit  us.  When  they 
approach  the  earth  their  organisms,  throughout,  including 
their  brains,  invariably  become  in  degree  materialized,  and 
their  minds  generally  are  rendered  less  active  and  clear,  and 
their  memory  becomes  impaired  under  these  changed  condi- 
tions. Then,  when  they  leave  our  atmosphere  they  throw 
off  the  material  elements  with  which  they  have  been  j)er- 
meated,  and  with  these  the  remembrance  of  what  they  have 
here  said,  heard,  and  witnessed,  frequently  passes  away. 
One  would  suppose,  in  view  of  this  fact,  that  when  they  re- 
turn to  earth  the  remembrance  of  what  they  have  said,  done, 
or  witnessed,  on  a  previous  visit,  would  return  in  full  force, 
but  it  appears  to  be  otherwise.  This  difnculty  is  less  with 
those  spirits  who  frequently  visit  the  earth,  but  I  have 
found  none  whose  memory,  while  here,  is  not  in  some  de- 
gree, and  on  some  points,  impaired. 

Spirits,  when  they  meet  us  in  seances,  notwithstanding 
they  may  have  previously,  in  their  own  homes,  considered 
what  they  intended  to  say,  very  often  find  themselves  in  a 
position  like  that  of  the  school  boy  who  has  carefully  studied 


SPIRITS    TxVKING    NOTKS.  IGl 

liis  lessou,  and  mastered  it  perfectly,  yet,  wlien  called  to  re- 
cite before  his  class  is  unable  to  recall  a  sentence,  perhaps 
even  a  word,  and  like  the  school  bo}'^  with  his  lesson,  when 
they  have  returned  to  their  homes  perhaps  every  word  and 
idea  recur  to  their  minds  with  provoking  distinctness.  I 
ha^e  always  found  the  memory  of  my  spirit  advisers  ex- 
tremel}'  defective  in  relation  to  what  transpired  at  previous 
seances,  and  this  was  a  subject  of  almost  constant  regret, 
sometimes  of  annoj^ance,  until  it  occurred  to  me  to  suggest 
to  them  to  take  notes  of  whatever  they  desired  to  remem- 
ber, and  refer  to  them  in  their  own  homes,  as  also  here  in 
subsequent  seances.  They  ado^oted  the  suggestion,  and 
since  then,  now  nearly  two  years,  there  has  been  no  trouble 
fi'om  that  cause,  and  they  frequently  will  request  a  mo- 
ment's delay  while  referring  to  notes  taken  in  previous 
seances,  and  when  found  will  read  them  to  me  in  the  same 
phraseology  in  which  I  have  them  recorded.  And  they  not 
only  take  notes  during  our  seances,  but  note  down  in  their 
OT\Ti  homes  whatever  they  desire  to  remember  when  here. 
Before  they  adopted  this  j)ractice  they  frequently  forgot  to 
tell  me  what,  before  they  left  their  homes,  they  desired  to 
sa}^  and  I  have  repeatedly  known  them  to  return  in  a  few 
minutes  after  the  close  of  a  seance,  and  again  control  the 
medium  to  tell  me  of  something  which  was  the  main  object 
of  their  original  visit,  and  the  remembrance  of  which  had 
Avholly  faded  ii'om  all  their  minds  upon  apj)roaching  the 
earth,  but  which  was  revived  as  soon  as  they  reached  the 
first  sphere,  on  their  return. 

Another  incident,  illustrative  of  the  unreliability  of  the 
memory  of  spirits  when  visiting  the  earth,  I  will  here  re- 
late. At  a  certain  seance  I  had  asked  my  spirit  father  to 
endeavor  to  ascertain  the  circumstances  of  a  relative,  whom 
I  had  reason  to  beheve  to  be  somewhat  embarrassed  finan- 
cially, and  when  I  next  met  him  I  inquired  whether  he  had 


162  FORGETTING    PKOPER    NAMES. 

obtained  any  information  on  this  point.  His  reply  was,  "  No, 
my  son,  I  have  not  yet  attended  to  that  matter."  Then, 
after  a  moment's  pause,  he  continued  :  "  Why,  yes,  certain- 
ly, both  your  mother  and  sister  D (in  spirit  life)  have 

visited  S ,  and  they  told  me  she  w^as  not  in  any  degree 

embarrassed."  This  information  was  afterwards  conlirmed. 
In  no  respect  is  the  memory  of  sj)irits,  when  with  us,  so 
manifestly  unreliable  as  it  is  in  recalling  the  proper  names 
of  their  mortal  friends,  and  the  reasons  they  assign  for  this 
are,  first,  the  imperfection  of  their  memory  upon  all  sub- 
jects when  in  our  atmosphere ;  secondly,  that  not  being 
accustomed  to  associate  ideas  of  their  earthly  friends  with 
their  names  to  the  extent  that  we  do,  these  names  with 
them,  soon  lose  their  significance ;  and  thirdly,  that  there 
is  a  peculiar  difficulty  in  recalling  proper  names  of  persons, 
dej)endent  upon  a  certain  positive,  psychological  quality, 
which  seems  to  be  imparted  to  these  names  by  their  repre- 
sentative character.  Why  this  should  be  so  we  are  unable 
to  explain,  but  all  investigators  who  have  had  any  consid- 
erable experience  in  intercourse  with  spirits  are  convinced 
of  the  fact  itself.  In  the  early  stages  of  my  intercourse 
with  them  I  was  surprised  to  find  how  very  defective  their 
memory  sometimes  was  in  this  respect,  for,  while  conver- 
sing with  them  freely  about  certain  mutual  friends  on 
earth  the  names  of  these  friends  would  occasionally  escape 
their  memory,  and  it  would  be  necessary  for  me  to  repeat 
them,  but  I  generally  found  it  necessary  to  only  give  them 
the  least  direct  hint  of  the  names  for  them  to  recollect 
them.  This  difficulty  how^ever  does  not  always  exist,  for 
it  is  more  frequently  the  case  that  they  refer  to  friends 
directly  by  name,  but  they  say  that  if  it  does  not  present 
itself  readily  to  their  minds  their  anxiety  to  recollect  it  is 
certain  to  eftectually  banish  it  for  a  time,  at  least,  when, 
perhaps,  it  will  spontaneously  recur  to  them. 


PARALLEL    CASKS    WITH    US.  1()3 

Even  parents  who  have  recently  entered  spirit-life  some- 
times encounter  this  difficulty  when,  through  mediums, 
the  question  is  suddenly  propounded  to  them,  What  are 
the  names  of  your  children  ?  and  they  are  unable  upon  the 
instant  to  recollect  them,  and  although  they  may,  after  a 
brief  delay,  correctly  give  all  the  names  but  one,  this  they 
may  lind  it  impossible  to  give,  and  then  the  chagrin  and 
disappointment  caused  by  their  failure  are  frequently  so 
great  as  to  induce  actual  mental  suffering,  for  they  well 
know  and  feel  the  distrust  of  their  identity  which  their  fail- 
ure on  this  ]Doint  has  caused. 

This  fi'equent  inability  of  spirits  to  recollect  names  of 
persons  is  not  by  any  means  peculiar  to  them,  for  many  of 
us  in  this  life  are  faulty  in  this  respect,  though  existing 
constantly  under  the  same  conditions,  and  it  is  but  reason- 
able to  suppose  that  under  the  wholly  changed  conditions 
of  another  existence  we  will  experience  still  greater  diffi- 
culty in  this  respect.  Dr.  Ab'ercrombie,  m  his  Inquiries 
Concerning  the  Intellectual  Poivers,  relates  a  number  of  re- 
markable instances  of  this  peculiar  form  of  defective  memo- 
ry. "One  of  the  most  common"  (examples,)  he  says,  "is 
the  loss  of  the  memor}^  of  words  and  names,  while  the 
patient  retains  a  correct  idea  of  things  and  persons.  The 
late  Dr.  Gregory  used  to  mention  a  lady,  who  after  an  apo- 
plectic attack  recovered  correctly  her  idea  of  things,  but 
could  not  name  them."  He  adds,  "A  gentleman  whom  I 
attended,  some  years  ago,  after  recovering  from  an  apo- 
plectic attack  knew  his  friends  perfectly,  but  could  not 
name  them,"  and  he  says,  that  "a  young  lady  who  wr.s 
present  at  a  late  catastrophe  in  Scotland,  in  which  many 
people  lost  their  hves  by  the  fall  of  the  gallery  of  a  church, 
escaped  mthout  any  injury  but  with  the  complete  loss  of 
the  recollection  of  any  of  the  circumstances." 

It  is  said  of  the  late  Sir  Henry  Holland,  that  when  weary 


IGi  SPIRITS    AVIIOSE    MEMORY    IS    BEST. 


y 


from  physical  labor  lie  forgot  every  word  of  German,  but 
the  remembrance  of  it  returned  when  strength  was  re- 
stored. In  the  above  instances,  changed  conditions  deter- 
mined the  character  of  the  memory. 

Spirits  who  are  best  able  to. remember  earthly  events 
and  circumstances  are  generally,  as  before  remarked,  those 
who  have  recently,  and  easily  and  naturally  passed  from 
earth,  while  young,  or  in  the  prime  of  life.  The  aged  man, 
through  death,  regains  his  youth,  and  every  thought  and 
feeling  are  in  harmony  with  his  new  condition,  and  neces- 
sarily inharmonious  with  the  thoughts  and  feelings  which 
were  associated  with  his  advanced  age  in  earth-life,  and 
hence,  his  remembrance  of  the  scenes  and  circumstances 
of  his  2)revious  life  should  be  and  actually  is  less  distinct 
than  that  of  those  who  have  passed  away  at  an  earher  age. 

The  human  sj)irit  upon  the  death  of  its  physical  body 
enters  upon  a  new  and  widely  different  state  of  existence. 
The  former  conditions  and  circumstances  of  existence,  to- 
gether with  the  old  associations,  no  longer  sustain  any 
direct  relations  to  it,  and  though  individuality  remains  the 
personality  is  greatly  changed,  and  the  spirit,  as  it  becomes 
accustomed  to  its  new  life,  acc^uires  new  ideas,  new  habits 
of  thought,  new  associations,  and  new  enjoyments,  and  in 
time  becomes  so  completely  identified  with  its  new  life  that 
it  no  lono'er  has  a  thou2;ht  which  su<]f<]fests  the  recollection 
of  the  acts  and  circumstances  of  its  former  earthly  exist- 
ence, and  these  necessarily  fade  from  the  memory,  and  are 
either  incapable  of  being  recalled,  or  at  best  but  faintly  re- 
collected. The  change  is  greater  than  that  from  childhood 
to  mature  age,  and  when  we  consider  how  few,  compara- 
tively, are  the  events  and  circumstances  of  our  earliest 
years  that  we  can  recollect,  we  are  able  to  imperfectly  real- 
ize how  difficult  it  must  be  for  disembodied  spirits  to  re- 
call, in  memory,  the  innumerable  events  of  their  earthly 


IT   IS    BEST    AS    IT    IS.  105 

lives,  in  Avliieh  perhaps,  the}"  have  long  since  ceased  to  take 
anv  interest. 

This  imperfection  of  the  memory  of  most  spirits  in  rela- 
tion to  the  circumstances  and  events  of  their  earthly  exist- 
ence, seems  to  be  unfortunate  when  we  regard  it  only  in 
relation  to  sjDirit  intercourse,  as  it  is  the  great  stumbling 
block  to  unbelievers,  and  vexatious  to  believers,  but  when 
we  view  it  in  relation  to  sj^irits  themselves  we  perceive 
that  it  is  a  wise  and  beneficetit  provision  of  the  Creator, 
to  protect  them  against  the  evils  that  would  flow  from  the 
perfect  remembrance  of  the  acts  and  circumstances  of  their 
earthly  hves,  for  with  many  spirits,  if  their  memory  of 
these  things  were  clear  and  distinct,  their  constant  self- 
accusation  and  useless  regrets  would  render  their  heaven 
to  them  a  hell,  and  not  only  this,  but  were  a  parent,  a 
mother  for  instance,  in  spirit-hfe,  to  carry  with  her  from 
her  fi'equent  visits  to  earth  the  perfect  remembrance  of  the 
misery  of  a  dear  child,  she  would  j&nd  no  consolation  in 
heaven,  for  its  joy,  and  harmony,  and  beauty  would  be 
viewed  by  her  only  m  contrast  with  the  sufferings  of  the 
cherished  one  on  earth,  and  it  would  be  impossible  for  her 
losing  and  sympathetic  nature  to  exult  in  her  own  superior 
state,  while  her  mind  were  agonized  with  the  pictures  of 
real  misery  which,  perhaps,  she  would  be  helpless  to  alle- 
viate. Fortunately,  God  in  his  wisdom  has  provided  other- 
wise. 

We  take  with  us  to  the  next  life  all  substantial  knowledge, 
all  knowledge  of  principles,  all  the  essential  knowledge  we 
have  acquired  here,  but  our  remembrance  of  non-essentials 
and  minor  details  is  most  commonly  shadowy  and  imper- 
fect. Thus  an  experienced  chemist  upon  entering  spirit- 
hfe,  while  distinctly  remembering  the  principles  and  funda- 
mental laws  of  organic  and  inorganic  chemistry,  might  find 


166  WE   RETAIN    ALL    USEFUL    KNOWLEDGE. 

it  impossible  to  reply  to  many  questions  wliich  might  be 
propounded  in  relation  to  the  exact  constitution  of  certain 
bodies,  the  compounds  which  may  be  formed  by  the  union 
of  certain  substances,  or  the  special  laws  of  their  combina- 
tion, while  a  physician  of  capacity  ar  d  experience,  on  the 
other  side,  if  critically  examined  by  a  brother  physician  on 
this,  and  judged  by  his  replies,  perhaps  would  not  be  con- 
sidered competent  to  treat  many  ordinary  diseases.  But 
this  is  not  the  invariable  rule,  for  certain  sjDirits  retain  a 
comparatively  distinct  remembrance  of  the  details  of  the 
knowledge  acquired  here. 

True  knowledge,  not  false,  even  of  material  things,  is  of 
great  benefit  to  us  when  we  pass  to  the  other  side.  It 
strengthens  and  consolidates  our  personality,  gives  confi- 
dence and  force,  and  instead  of  standing  dazed,  blinded, 
and  helpless  in  view  of  the  strange  reahties  of  that  Hfe,  we 
are  impelled  by  our  habits  of  examination  to  exercise  our 
reason,  and  judgment,  and  make  use  of  our  previously  ac- 
quired knowledge  in  solving  the  innumerable  questions 
which  surrounding  objects  and  circumstances  suggest. 
Through  the  operation  of  these  mental  processes  the  first 
step  in  progression  is  sooner  taken,  and  this  primary  diffi- 
culty overcome.  The  real  knowledge  which  we  acquu-e 
here  will  render  the  attainment  of  further  knowledge  there 
easier.  In  the  ratio  that  a  spirit  gains  knowledge  and 
wisdom  it  acquires  power,  and  all  true  and  essential 
knowledge  that  is  acquired  is  the  eternal  j^ossession  of  the 
soul.  And  not  only  this  knowledge  itself,  but  the  exercise 
here  of  the  faculties  necessary  to  its  attainment  benefits  us 
in  the  next  life.  This  exercise  of  the  mind  is  just  as  essen- 
tial to  us  as  exercise  of  the  body,  and  it  invigorates  and 
strengthens  the  former,  and  what  we  thus  gain  we  are  not 
divested  of  by  death,  but  retain  as  rightfully  earned  and 
acquired. 


PKOGEESS    IS    GRADUAL    AND    STEADY.  1(JT 

Tlie  knowledge  of  the  dead  languages,  not  being  essen- 
tial and  useful  with  most  spirits,  soon  fades  from  memory. 
Mr.  Owen  says  that  his  knowledge  of  these  is  now  very 
imperfect,  and  steadily  decreasing,  and  that  of  modern 
languages  shares  the  same  fate  if  not  frequently  called 
into  requisition. 

Except  w4iat  has  been  gained  by  observation,  experience, 
and  research  in  spirit-life,  or  in  visits  to  our  world,  spirits 
possess  no  more  knowledge' than  they  possessed  in  earth 
hfe,  and  there  are  many  among  them  who  passed  over 
years  since,  who  know  comparatively  little  more  of  heav- 
enly things  than  they  did  when  here,  while  most  spirits 
possess  less  knowledge  of  this  life  than  when  they  passed 
av^ay,  it  having  gradually,  or  perhaps  rapidly,  faded  from 
their  minds.  As  a  rule,  a  naturally  intelligent  and  well- 
informed  politician,  professional  or  business  man,  could  in 
a  few  hours  furnish  more  information  of  a  reliable  charac- 
ter relating  to  his  sjoecialty,  to  any  ordinarily  intelligent 
spirit,  than  the  whole  sum  of  knowledge  of  that  subject 
possessed  by  the  latter.  But  there  are  exceptions  to  this 
rule. 

The  progress  of  spirits  in  knowledge  and  wisdom  is 
gradual  and  steady  ;  it  is  not  marked  by  sudden  leaps  or 
bounds. 

The  principal  reason  why  we  do  not  constantly  receive 
new  and  higher  truths  fi'om  spiritual  sources,  is,  that  as 
spirits  increase  in  knowledge  and  wisdom  they  advance  to 
higher  and  higher  heavens,  and  are  less  and  less  attracted  to 
earth,  so  that  their  ranks  in  the  lower  heavens,  from  which 
only,  at  least  with  rare  excejotions,  spirits  revisit  the  earth, 
are  constantly  recruited  by  accessions  from  earth  itself,  and 
thus  the  knowledge  of  the  inhabitants  of  these  heavens  is 
only  such  as  they  have  accjuired  here,  to  which  is  super- 
added that  which  they  have  acquired  in  their,  perhapi,  not 


IGS  KNOWLEDGE    OF    INTERCOUKSE. 

protracted  existence  in  spirit-life,  and  as  their  progress  is 
based  quite  as  mncli  upon  their  emancipation  from  error 
as  on  the  direct  acquisition  of  knowledge,  the  greater  num- 
ber of  them  are  not  by  any  means  wise,  and  when  we  further 
consider  that  there  are  comparatively  few  in  the  higher 
heavens  who  had  any  knowledge  of  spirit  intercourse  jyre- 
vious  to  their  passing  from  earth,  and  that  they  are  still 
ignorant  of  it,  we  can  understand  that  comparatively  few 
wise  and  exalted  spirits  concern  themselves  with  earthly 
affairs,  or  are  engaged  in  transmitting  knowledge  of 
spiritual  things  to  us.  The  knowledge  of  intercourse  be- 
tween spirits  and  mortals,  in  its  present  form,  is  as  limited, 
even  in  the  higher  heavens,  as  it  is  on  earth,  but  it  is 
rapidly  extending  in  the  lower  heavens,  and  the  time  is 
not  distant  when  it  will  penetrate  the  minds  of  aU  from  the 
least  to  the  greatest,  both  in  the  heavens  and  on  earth. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

Visual  Perception  of  Material  Objects  by  Spirits.  Hearing  our 
Conversation.  Ability  to  Pass  through  Solid  Matter.  Their 
Kelations  to  the  Elements. 

VISUAL   PEECEPTIOX    OF    MATEEIAL    OBJECTS   BY    SPIRITS. 

Very  few  spirits  perceive  earthly  objects  as  distinctly  as 
we  do,  and  these  few  are  able  to  perceive  them  thus  clearly 
only  in  theii'  immediate  vicinity.  As  a  rule,  low  spirits  can 
perceive  material  objects  better  than  those  more  advanced, 
and  their  perceptive  power  diminishes  as  they  progress. 
To  the  vision  of  highly  advanced  spirits  gross  matter  be- 
comes extremely  shadowy  and  unreal. 

All,  excepting  very  low  S2:)irits,  and  a  few  of  higher 
gi'ades  who  are  pecuharly  endowed,  when  they  attempt  to 
concentrate  theu"  \dsion  on  a  person,  or  other  object,  are 
affected  by  confusion  of  sight,  and  the  way  in  which  they 
are  best  able  to  view  material  objects  is  by  causing  con- 
stant oscillatory  movements  of  the  eyes,  so  that  the  hne  of 
vision  shall  not  remain  beyond  a  single  moment  in  the 
dii'ection  of  any  point.  They  are  affected,  in  degree,  pre- 
cisely as  a  mortal  is  whose  defective  sight  requires  the  aid 
of  glasses,  and  who  attempts  to  read  without  them.  When 
engaged  in  quiet  intercourse  with  us,  if  the  light  be  strong 
they  are  frequently  compelled  to  close  their  eyes,  or  aveii; 
them,  or  even  to  seek  the  protection  afforded  by  the  shadow 
of  an  object  in  the  room.  On  this  account  a  subdued  light 
8 


170  SPIKITS    SEE    US    INDISTINCTLY. 

is  always  agreeable,  and  sometimes  necessary  to  them,  and 
twilight  is  the  favorite  time  for  their  visits.  Dazzling 
solar,  or  artificial  light,  affects  spirits  very  much  as  we  are 
affected  u]3on  suddenly  emerging  into  the  glare  of  sunlight 
from  a  darkened  room  ;  but  brilliant  artificial  Hght  is  more 
disagreeable  to  them  than  the  full  glare  of  the  sun. 

Our  guardians  can  perceive  us  distinctly  ;  to  most  other 
spirits  we  appear  spectral,  ghostly,  unless  it  be  when 
mediums,  either  spiritual  or  mortal,  are  present,  when 
they  are  able  to  perceive  us  with  greater  distinctness,  and 
when  spirits  are  controlling  mediums  they  perceive  us  still 
more  clearly.  One  day,  while  conversing  with  the  Indian 
spirit  through  our  medium  he  was  interrupted  by  another 
spirit,  and  from  a  few  disconnected  words  in  English, 
together  with  his  gestures,  I  understood  that  the  conversa- 
tion related  to  me,  and  when  he  again  addressed  me  I 
asked  to  whom  had  he  been  speaking, "and  he  replied,  "To 
another  Indian,  who  sometimes  comes  with  me."  He 
added,  that  the  latter  had  inquired  of  him  who  I  was,  and 
he  informed  him,  when  he  recollected  having  seen  me 
and  having  been  in  the  same  room  before.  Said  he, 
"  Spirits  have  as  much  curiosity  as  they  ever  had,  but  this 
Indian  not  controlling  the  medium,  can't  see  persons  and 
places  as  plainly  as  I  do,  and  so  don't  remember  them 
well." 

To  most  spirits  our  clothing  and  bodies  are  not  dia- 
phanous, but  certain  spirits  are  endowed  with  the  special 
faculty  of  perceiving  the  internal  organs.  The  Indian  con- 
troller of  my  medium  possesses  this  faculty  ;  the  numerous 
proofs  furnished  by  him  place  the  question  beyond  doubt, 
not  only  to  me  but  to  others  who  have  been  present  when 
the  faculty  was  exercised.  His  explanation  of  the  process 
which  he  employs  to  accomplish  this  is  as  follows.  Having 
controlled  the  medium  he  aj)plies  the  hands  of  the  latter, 


OUR   SPIRITS    INVISIBLE   TO   TIIEM.  171 

one  on  each,  side  of  the  bod}'-  or  limb,  directing  liis  atten- 
tion to  and  making-  sliglit  pressure  on  tlie  parts,  when  the 
entire  substance  and  structure  intervening  between  the 
hands  become  distinctly  visible,  Ijut  it  is  only  the  portion 
of  the  hodj  or  limb  between  the  hands,  not  any  other  por- 
tion above  or  below,  that  he  can  perceive.  He  does  not 
consciously  see  with  the  hands  or  lingers  of  the  medium, 
but  with  his  own  brain  or  mind  and  he  applies  his  atten- 
tion precisely  as  when  he  uses  his  eyes.  It  is  only  when 
he  is  in  the  act  of  controlling  the  medium  that  he  j)ossesses 
this  power,  in  his  ordinary  state  he  is  unable  to  exercise  the 
facult3\  His  Indian  companion  is  wholly  deficient  in  this 
power,  but  I  am  acquainted  with  another  sjDirit,  in  a  higher 
heaven,  who  controls  no  medium,  but  who  is  similarly  en- 
dowed. No  other  spirits  with  whom  I  am  acquainted  pos- 
sess this  power  in  any  degree  under  any  circumstances. 

Spirits  cannot  perceive  our  spiritual  bodies  ;  these  are 
masked  fi'om  their  view  as  they  are  from  ours,  by  our 
earthl}'-  bodies. 

When  spmts  visit  the  earth,  during  the  day,  the  sun 
j)resents  the  same  appearance  to  them  that  it  does  to  us  ; 
if  it  be  partially  obscured  by  clouds  this  also  is  a]3parent 
to  them.  If  their  visits  are  in  the  night  the  darkness  is 
equally  manifest  to  them.  If  they  enter  a  dark  room,  and 
attempt  to  move  about,  they  are  generally  compelled  to 
gTope  and  feel  their  way  as  we  do,  and  ujider  these  circum- 
stances we  are  invisible  to  them,  but  if  a  well-developed 
medium  be  j)resent  the  atmosphere  immediately  surround- 
ing him  or  her  is  in  a  certain  degree  luminous,  and  in  this 
dim  light  persons  and  objects  are  more  or  less  distinctly 
perceived.     This  luminosity  suiTOunds  mediums  only. 

In  this  we  find  an  explanation  of  the  ability  of  sj^irits  to 
see  in  dark  seances,  and  here  the  light  is  often  increased 
by  the  presence  of  several  mediums.     Another  explanation 


172  SPmiTtJAL    LIGHT,  n 

is,  that  certain  spirits  possess  tlie  power  of  illuminating 
tlie  sjoace  for  a  short  distance  around  them,  with  spiritual 
light,  visible  to  clairvoyant  but  not  to  natural  vision.  They 
effect  this  apparently  by  their  volition,  but  the  rationale  is 
not  understood  by  my  instructors.  My  own  opinion  is 
that  all  such  spirits,  when  here,  possessed  strong  medial 
power,  and  still  retain  it,  and  that  this  emission  of  spiritual 
light,  under  certain  circumstances,  is  dependent  on  it. 
Then  again  certain  spirits  understand  the  art  of  illuminat- 
ing the  space  immediately  around  them  by  artificial  spirit- 
ual light.  Paintings  and  drawings  of  some  merit  have  be- 
yond question  been  executed  in  absolute  darkness,  dark- 
ness to  us,  by  the  hands  of  mediums,  while  controlled  or 
directed  by  spirit  power. 

Not  only  do  most  spirits,  when  in  our  atmosphere,  im- 
perfectly perceive  us,  and  material  objects,  but  their  per- 
ception of  each  other  is  equally  imperfect,  and  they  appear 
each  to  the  other  as  little  more  substantial  than  shadows, 
and  although  they  cannot  ordinarily  perceive  mortals  and 
material  objects  in  total  darkness  yet  they  are  able  to  per- 
ceive each  other  nearly  as  well  as  in  the  full  light. 

The  walls  of  our  dwellings  are  not  ordinarily  transparent 
to  spiritual  vision,  but  they  are  so  to  certain  spirits,  as  they 
also  are  to  certain  mesmeric  sensitives.  The  range  of  their 
vision  in  our  atmosphere  is  very  limited,  but  in  their  heav- 
ens it  is  more  extended  than  ours  here.  There  are  few 
spirits  whose  vision  can  penetrate  below  the  surface  of  the 
earth.  I  have  found  one  who  can  see  to  the  depth  of  from 
one  hundred  and  fifty  to  two  hundred  feet,  and  another  to 
the  depth  of  about  ten  or  fifteen  feet.  None  of  my  other 
spirit  friends  can  see  to  the  extent  of  an  inch  below  the 
surface. 

Few  spirits  are  able  to  read  written  or  printed  characters 
unless  these  be   of  extraordinary  size   and   distinctness. 


READING    CLOSED    BOOKS.  173 

Those  wlio  can  read  the  former  are  special!}^  endowed,  and 
they  are  able,  without  the  assistance  of  a  medium,  with 
wonderful  facility  and  celerity  to  read  eyen  closed  books 
and  manuscript.  The  books  must  be  at  least  partially  ex- 
posed to  yiew,  that  is  they  must  not  be  enclosed,  for  in- 
stance in  a  box,  safe,  closet,  or  drawer,  but  they  may  be  in 
their  proper  places  in  an  open  safe  or  bookcase,  or  in  a  pile 
with  others,  or  placed  on  a  table,  or  desk,  and  so  long  as  a 
sj)irit  endowed  vdih  this  faculty  is  able  to  see  the  books  or 
coyers,  eyen  in  part,  this  is  sufficient  for  his  purpose. 
Standing  or  seated  near  a  book  thus  placed,  by  his  yohtion 
he  conjui-es  up  or  causes  psychological  copies,  or  pictures 
of  its  pages  to  be  successiyely  presented  to  his  mind,  which 
he  is  able  to  read,  so  my  instructors  say,  with  ten  times  the 
rapidity  that  we  could  possibly  read  the  open  pages  of  the 
same  book,  and  he  can  copy  the  contents  on  sj)iritual  paper 
with  equal  rapidity.  It  makes  httle  or  no  difference 
whether  the  characters  are  TVTitten  or  printed,  small  or 
large.  The  faculty  is  comparatiyely  a  rare  one,  but  one  of 
my  instructors,  ]Mi\  Bernard,  has  a  fi'iend  in  spirit-hfe  who 
possesses  it,  and  he  has  repeatedly  coj)ied  letters  and  other 
written  documents  at  the  request  of  the  former,  and  once 
at  my  request  he  did  the  same. 

About  thi'ee  years  since,  at  my  request,  certain  of  my 
spiiit  fi'iends  tested  their  ability  to  read  manuscript,  and 
the  open  pages  of  a  book  printed  in  ordinary  sized  t}q)e 
and  placed  at  a  distance  fi^om  and  behind  the  medium,  and 
they  failed,  but  succeeded  in  reading-  at  the  same  distance 
a  pubhsher's  placard,  the  letters  of  one  hne  being  of  the 
size  of  two  inches,  and  of  another  two  and  a  half  inches, 
while  the  other  letters  were  less  than  one  inch  in  size. 
They  encountered  some  difficulty  in  reading  the  latter. 
On  another,  more  recent  occasion,  at  my  suggestion,  IVIr. 
Owen,  my  father,  and  Mr.   Bernard  separately  attempted 


174  HEARING    US    CONVERSE. 

to  read  a  plainly  written  page,  placed  in  the  hands  of  the 
medium  while  entranced.  The  two  former  entirely  failed, 
but  Mr.  Bernard  succeeded  in  slowly  deciphering,  word  by 
word,  two  lines,  when  he  relinquished  the  task. 

THE   ABILITY     OF    SPIRITS    TO     HEAR   AND     UNDERSTAND     OUR     CON- 
VERSATION. 

Few  sj)irits,  except  guardians,  are  ordinarily  able  to  un- 
derstand our  conversation.  Guardians  are  able  to  clearly 
and  distinctly  understand  not  only  what  is  said  by  their 
wards,  but  equally  well  every  word  that  is  said  by  others 
with  whom  the  latter  at  the  moment  may  be  conversing. 
Beside  these  there  are  a  comparatively  few  spirits  who 
are  especially  endowed  with  the  faculty  of  understanding 
all  that  may  be  said  by  mortals  in  their  presence,  but  the 
great  majority  of  spirits,  high  and  low,  when  not  in  the 
presence  of  mediums  are  unable,  unless  it  be  under  un- 
usually favorable  conditions,  to  understand  us  when  con- 
versing with  each  other.  They  can  only  hear  disconnected 
words,  and  in  unfavorable  weather  they  are  frequently 
unable  to  understand,  or  even  hear  a  word.  Our  conver- 
sation then  appears  to  them  to  be  a  succession  of  humming, 
murmuring  sounds. 

It  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  frequently,  wrong  con- 
clusions are  drawn  as  to  motives  and  intentions,  by  listen- 
ing spirits,  from  the  few  disconnected  words  and  sentences 
they  are  able  to  overhear  in  our  conversation,  and  I  have 
repeatedly  found  it  to  be  so  in  my  experience,  and  there  is 
no  reason  to  doubt  that  in  the  experience  of  others  unfor- 
tunate results  have  been  known  to  proceed  from  spirits 
thus  misunderstanding  the  language  and  intentions  of  per- 
sons engaged  in  conversation.  These  remarks  apply  to 
conversation  when  no  medium  is  present.     When  a  good 


PASSING   THROUGH    MATTER.  175 

medium  is  present  our  conversation  in  liis  or  lier  imme- 
diate vicinity  is  as  readily  understood  by  spirits  as  it  is  by 
us,  tmd  in  many  dwellings  spirits  are  able  to  bear  and  un- 
derstand neai'ly  all  that  is  said  at  certain  times  by  tlie 
inmates.  This  is  where  mediums  developed  or  unde- 
veloped, are  present,  and  as  there  are  unrecognized  me- 
diums in  many  families  it  follows  that  conversation  in  such 
families  is  fi'equently  distinctly  overheard  by  spirits  who 
ai'e  disposed  to  listen. 

"\Mien  a  cjuiet,  attentive  audience  is  assembled  in  a 
chui'ch,  or  j^nblic  hall,  the  spirits  present  are  able  to  hear 
the  speaker  nearly  or  quite  as  well  as  he  is  heard  by  the 
audience.  This  is  principally  owing  to  the  fact  that  many 
among  the  audience  are  mediums.  But  the  presence  of 
many  low  spirits  on  a  pubhc  occasion  is  a  hindrance  to  the 
understanding  by  higher  spirits  of  what  is  said  by  the 
sj)eaker. 


POWER    OF    SPIRITS    TO    PASS    THROUGH    SOLID    MATTER. 
"  Then  came  Jesus,  the  doors  being  shut,  and  stood  in  the  midst," — John  xx.  26. 

All  spirits,  except  those  just  liberated  from  their  earthly 
bodies,  and  a  few  others,  and  these  the  most  degraded, 
possess  the  power  of  passing  through  solid  walls  of  wood 
and  stone,  these  being  to  them,  in  this  respect,  as  if  they 
did  not  exist.  Spirits  are  conscious  of  passing  through 
them,  but  experience  no  sensations  different  from  those 
they  experience  in  pursuing  their  course  through  the  air, 
or  space.  If  a  spirit  should  aj)proach  a  wall  with  no  inten- 
tion of  passing  through  it,  his  course  would  be  obstiaicted 
exactly  as  oui*s  would,  it  then  being  as  substantial  to  him 
as  to  us,  but  when  he  reached  the  wall,  or  before  reaching 
it,  should  he  desire  to  pass  through  it  lie  would  immedi- 


176  CONVEYING    SMALL    OBJECTS. 

ately  find  liimseK  in  conscious,  rajDid  motion,  and  the  next 
instant  lie  would  be  on  the  other  side.  They  pass  through 
heavy  and  thin  walls  with  equal  facility,  and  through  walls 
of  one  material  as  readily  as  through  those  of  another. 

Cotton,  wool,  down,  marble,  and  iron,  are  equally  sub- 
stantial and  resistant  to  spirit  touch  and  pressure.  A 
silken  thread  extended  between  two  points,  would  obstruct 
the  course  of  a  spirit  as  effectually  as  a  rod  of  iron  if  he 
were  to  deliberately  approach  it,  although,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  wall,  if  he  were  to  will  it,  he  would  instantly  find 
himself  beyond  it. 

Certain  spirits  are  able  to  transport  small  objects  through 
the  air  for  greater  or  less  distances,  and  others,  in  the 
presence  of  certain  mediums,  are  able  to  cause  similar  ob- 
jects to  pass  through  sohd  walls  without  injury  in  any  re- 
spect to  the  object.  These  things  remain  yet  unexplained 
by  my  instructors. 

There  are  spirits  so  gross  and  degraded  that  they  are 
unable  to  enter  our  dwelhngs  through  the  walls.  They 
find  access  only  through  open  doors  and  windows,  and 
usually  can  depart  only  by  the  same  means,  but  as  these 
spiritual  tramps  in  their  visits  to  tenements  are  liable  to  be 
accidentally  imprisoned,  when  these  become  temporarily 
deserted,  it  seems  to  have  been  provided  that  when,  in 
such  cases,  they  become  sufficiently  reduced  by  starvation 
they  shall  acquire  the  power  to  escape  through  the  walls. 

Spirits  do  not  possess  the  power  to  penetrate  below  the 
surface  of  the  earth,  nor  of  a  body  of  water.  To  them, 
water  is  as  sohd  as  earth,  and  yet  if  a  person,  while  hving, 
were  to  be  buried  in  the  depths  of  a  mine,  or  of  the  ocean, 
his  spirit,  when  released  from  the  body,  would  soon  emerge 
from  its  confinement. 

It  is  thought  by  some  that  because  disembodied  spirits 
are   constituted   of,  what  to  us  is  impalpable  substance, 


CONTACT    WITH    SPIRITS.  iM 

tliey  uecessarily  sliould  be  able  to  pass  througli  a  mortal, 
and  vice  versa,  as  readily  as  tlirougli  air.  This  is  a  mis- 
take, for  to  spirits  our  bodies  are  as  substantial  as  they  are 
to  ourselves,  and  even  more  so,  and  even  if  our  own  spirits 
"svere  disembodied  thev  would  still  be  substantial  to  other 
spirits.  "NMien  a  S23iritual  apparition  is  seen  and  it  appears 
to  pass  tlu'ough  a  mortal,  or  the  mortal  through  it,  it  is 
only  in  appearance,  the  movements  of  the  spirit  being  so 
rapid  that  our  vision  cannot  follow  them.  When  spirits 
touch  us  we  feel  more  substantial  to  them  than  they  do  to 
each  other,  for  while  the  substance  of  their  persons  yields 
to  theii'  pressure  oui-  flesh  does  not,  but  on  the  contrary 
it  feels  to  them  as  firm  and  unyielding  as  marble  or  iron. 
If  a  spirit  were  standing  so  close  to  a  mortal  as  to  be  nearly 
in  contact  with  him,  and  the  latter,  unseen  by  the  former, 
should  suddenly  and  rapidly  approach  him,  he  probably 
would  come  in  contact  with  him,  but  at  the  instant  of  con- 
tact the  spiiit  would  change  his  position'  and  his  move- 
ment would  be  so  instantaneous  that  there  would  be  little 
or  no  chance  of  his  balance  being  disturbed.  If  the  dis- 
tance between  them  were  greater,  when  the  mortal  moved 
towards  the  spirit,  even  if  the  latter  were  previously  un- 
aware of  the  former's  intention,  he  would  instantly  become 
conscious  of  it  by  recognizing  the  magnetic  force  of  his 
will  directed  in  a  line  with  his — the  spirit's— person,  and 
he  would  move  aside,  perhaps  without  turning  his  head. 
If  a  spiiit  were  seated  in  a  chair  and  a  mortal,  standing 
before  or  beside  him,  should  suddenly  seat  himself  in  the 
same  chair  the  former  would  escape  before  or  at  the  in- 
stant of  contact.  In  such  cases  the  movements  of  spirits 
are  as  instantaneous  as  lightning. 

All  objects  in  the  sj^irit-world  are  real  and  substantial  to 
spiritual  perception,  and  spirits  have  no  more  power  to 
penetrate  the  substance  of  the  heavens,  or  the  walls  of 
8* 


178  SPIRITS    AND    THE    ELEMENTS. 

tlieir  own  dwellings,  than  we  have  to  penetrate  the  sub- 
stance of  the  earth,  or  pass  through  solid  walls.  Neither 
can  their  vision  ordinarily  penetrate  spiritual  substance. 
Should  one  spirit  attempt  to  lift  another  the  latter  would 
apjDear  to  the  former  to  be  as  heavy  as  one  mortal,  under 
like  cii'cumstances,  would  aj^pear  to  be  to  another. 

SPIRITS    IN    REL.\TION    TO    THE    ELEMENTS. 

Spirits  in  the  coldest  weather  traverse  the  space  between 
the  heavens  and  earth  so  quickly  that  they  do  not  suffer 
from  the  cold,  provided  that  u^Don  their  arrival  here  they 
immediately  enter  a  comfortable  dw^elling,  but  should  it  so 
happen  that  they  are  exj^osed  to  a  low  temperature  for  any 
considerable  time  they  are  affected  by  it  as  disagreeably  as 
we  are.  The  same  as  to  very  warm  weather.  When  they 
come  to  earth  and  encounter  cold,  bleak  storms,  they  are 
rendered  verv  uncomfortable,  even  when  sheltered  in  our 
dweUings,  and  the  higher  spirits  rarely  visit  us  during  the 
prevalence  of  such  weather  unless  drawn  to  us  by  love,  or 
from  motives  of  duty,  or  both,  and  when  the  clainas  of  these 
are  satisfied  they  are  glad  to  escape  and  return  to  their 
own  bright,  blissful  homes. 

AVhen  strong  winds  prevail,  and  especially  in  stormy 
w^eather,  it  is  with  some  difficulty  that  spirits  pursue  their 
course  through  our  atmosphere.  One  January  day  when 
a  high  cold  wind  prevailed,  as  soon  as  the  Indian  guide  of 
the  medium  assumed  control  I  noticed  that  he  was  in  an 
unusually  merry  mood,  and  in  reply  to  my  question  he 
said,  that  upon  approaching  my  dwelhng  with  his  com- 
panion they  were  both  precipitated  against  it  with  con- 
siderable force,  being  unable  to  steadily  direct  their  course 
on  account  of  the  violence  of  the  wind.  When  spirits  are 
ex]3osed  in  our  atmosj^here  to  storms  of  hail  they  pass 


perfl':mks  grateful  to  spirits.  179 

tlirouiT^li  it  without  seusation  of  contact  with  it.  It  is  evi- 
dent  that  it  must  pass  through  them,  my  instructors  ad- 
mit this,  but  they  are  unable  to  explain  the  phenomenon. 

Although  they  ai-e  rendered  uncomfortable  when  with 
us  in  very  warm  weather,  yet  they  do  not  perspire.  A 
spirit  under  ordinary  circumstances  Avould  suffer  pain,  but 
not  destruction  of  tissue,  or  parts,  from  prolonged  contact 
with  or  exposure  to  fire.  My  spirit  friends  tell  me  that 
w^hen  they  ^isit  me  in  cold  weather  they  gather  about  the 
fire  as  w^e  do  after  exjDOSUi-e  to  cold,  but  they  are  nearly  as 
careful  as  we  are  to  avoid  -too  close  an  approach  to  it, 
other^\ise  they  would  be  rendered  uncomfortable.  Cer- 
tain  spii'its  understand  hov/,  by  artificial  means,  to  expose 
portions  of  their  persons  to  the  action  of  fire  without  in- 
curring suffering.  They  also  are  able  by  the  same,  or 
other  means,  to  protect  the  hands,  head,  feet,  and  other 
parts  of  the  persons  of  mediums  fi'om  its  action. 

Spirits  are  sensitive  to  odors,  and  perfumes,  and  certain 
of  them  are  as  agreeable  to  them  as  to  us,  while  others  are 
equally  disagreeable.  An  atmosphere  delicately  perfumed 
with  rose,  neroli,  bergamot,  or  cologne,  tends  in  some  de- 
gi'ee  to  assist  manifestations.  The  perfume  of  flowers  is 
always  highly  agi'eeable  to  them. 

There  are  passengers  on  most  vessels  whose  names  are 
not  entered  on  the  passenger  list.  At  my  request  Mr. 
Owen  and  vaj  father  boarded  a  steamship  in  mid-ocean, 
and  found  many  spirits  there.  Some  of  these  were  friends 
of  the  j)assengers,  and  others  w^ere  the  spirits  of  sailors, 
who  lived  aboard  the  vessel,  and  busied  themselves  in  all 
their  former  duties.  It  is  not  to  be  suj^posed  that  these 
duties  are  effectively  performed,  but  sometimes  they  per- 
fonn  real  service  when  it  happens  that  officers  or  lookouts 
are  impressible,  by  influencing  their  minds  so  that  they 
can  consciously  or  unconsciously  avoid  serious  danger  to 


ISO  SPIRITS    LIABLE    TO    SEA-SICKNESS. 

tliemselves,  or  the  vessel.  On  tlie  other  hand,  sometimes, 
but  perhaps  rarely,  some  vicious  spirit  finds  himseK  able 
to  iniiuence  the  lookout,  or  man  at  the  wheel,  and  obscures 
his  mind  to  such  an  extent  that  he  is  rendered  incompe- 
tent to  the  discharge  of  his  duties,  and  through  this  means 
the  vessel  may  be  lost.  Mr.  Owen  and  my  father,  a  short 
time  after  boarding  the  steamer,  experienced  the  usual 
symptoms  of  sea-sickness,  nausea,  dizziness,  and  prostra- 
tion of  strength,  and  soon  they  were  compelled,  from  these 
causes,  to  leave  the  vessel.  They  noticed  that  other  spirits 
present,  friends  of  the  passengers,  were  affected  in  like 
manner. 


CHAPTER  Xn. 

Materialization — Form  Manifestations.  Phantom  Ships  and  Rail- 
way Trains.  Rappings,  and  Moving  of  Objects,  Spirit  Lights, 
Levitation.     Trance  and  Yisipns. 

MATEPJAUZATIOX FORM    JIAXITESTATIONS. 

The  processes  of  materialization  are  really  of  a  scientific 
nature,  and  in  cabinet  seances  are  usually,  perhaps  always, 
supei-^ised  and  directed  by  spirits  of  intelligence  above 
the  average,  who  have  acquired  a  knowledge  of  the  method 
by  direct  instruction,  or  careful  observ^ation,"  but  in  other 
instances  certain  low  spirits  of  strong  magnetic  natures 
and  powerful  will,  generally  of  that  class  who  haunt  certain 
earfhly  locahties,  possess,  either  an  intuitive  or  acquired 
knowledge  of  the  means  of  mateiializing,  for  certain  spiiits 
of  this  class,  equally  v*ith  those  more  elevated,  are  able  to 
materialize  spirits  on  their  ovm  planes,  in  a  degree,  not 
onlv  sufficient  under  certain  circumstances  to  render  them 
visible  to  mortals,  but  also  to  exercise  considerable  power 
over  material  objects. 

It  is  only  of  the  methods  of  procedure  in  circles  for 
materializinf;^  that  we  have  anv  definite  knowledpre,  and 
here  the  process  requires  the  combined  action  of  a  number 
of  instnicted  spiidts,  who  form  a  circle  around  the  spirit  to 
be  materialized,  and  thi'ough  the  exercise  of  their  united 
^\ill-power  attract  and  gather  certain  magnetic  and  material 
elements  fi'om  the  medium,  the  persons  present,  and  the 


182  PBOCESSES    OF    MATEKIALIZATIOX. 

atmosphere,  and  then  by  employing*  their  hands  as  mes-r 
merizers  employ  theirs,  in  making  certain  passes,  they 
direct  these  elements  towards  the  spirit  in  their  midst, 
while  at  the  same  time  they  assist  the  operation  of  these 
movements  by  concentrating  the  full  force  of  their  will- 
power upon  him.  It  is  necessary  that  the  object  of  their 
attentions  should  be  in  a  passive  and  receptive  state,  and  if 
he  or  she  is  capable  of  quietly  and  forcibly  exerting  his  or 
her  will  to  the  same  end  the  accomphshment  of  the  pur- 
pose is  materially  assisted,  the  object  being  to  cause  the 
condensation  or  lodgment  of  these  elements  upon  and 
throughout  the  whole,  or  parts  of  the  person  of  the  spirit. 
These  means  must  be  steadily  employed,  otherwise  the 
spirit  rapidly  demateriahzes,  the  elements  used  becoming 
dissipated  and  reverting  to  their  previous  conditions.  The 
process,  in  some  respects,  resembles  that  by  which  the 
metal  is  taken  up  and  deposited  in  electro-plating.  They 
are  able  to  materialize  any  part  of  the  person  of  a  spirit, 
clothing  that  part  with  material  substance,  or  they  can 
materialize  it  throughout  its  internal  structure,  and  when 
the  power  is  sufficient  and  conditions  favorable,  they  are 
able  to  materialize  the  entire  person  of  the  spirit,  exter- 
nally and  internally. 

Sometimes  an  adult  spirit  who  passed  away  in  childhood, 
is  represented  to  the  parent's  view  as  still  a  child.  This 
result  is  effected  by  their  selecting  a  spirit  child  as  nearly 
as  possible  resembhng  the  spirit  when  it  passed  away,  and 
clothing  it  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  in  which  it  was 
clothed  in  earth  life,  and  then  materializing  it.  The  child 
is  previously  instructed  in  the  part  it  is  to  act.  But 
although  adult  S23irits  are  unable  to  personally  reassume 
the  appearance  of  childhood,  those  who  have  departed  this 
life  at  advanced  ages  are  able  to  appear  materialized  of  the 
ages  they  were  when  they  passed  away.     This  too  is  ac- 


HAUNTING    SPIIilTS.  183 

complislied  "by  will-power.  Previous  to  materializing  tliey 
have  only  to  recollect  how  they  appeared  at  those  ages,  and 
then  to  desire,  or  will,  to  appear  the  same  again,  and  this 
determines  the  result. 

The  sense  of  touch  in  a  fully  materialized  spirit  hand  is 
perfect,  and  the  sense  fails  with  the  decreasing  substan- 
tiality of  the  hand.  Spiritual  birds  are  frequently  brought 
to  earth,  and  sometimes  thev  are  materialized  at  seances. 
Spirits,  a23paritions  as  they  are  termed,  wiio  haunt  certain 
localities,  most  commonly  dwellings,  either  inhabited  or 
abandoned,  when  they  are  joerceived  by  natural  vision,  or 
make  physical  demonstrations,  are  always  more  or  less 
materialized.  Theii*  materialization  is  effected,  as  before 
stated,  by  the  efforts  of  other  sj)irits,  and  as  none  but  very 
material,  if  not  gross  spirits  haunt  such  localities  the  power 
recjuired  to  sufficiently  materialize  them  is  comparatively 
inconsiderable.  They  are  rarely  able  to  manifest  in  either 
manner  unless  it  be  in  these  special  localities,  as  to  a  great 
extent  they  are  dependent  for  their  power  to  do  so  on  the 
magTietic  elements  there  existing.  In  such  instances  it  is 
rare  that  more  than  one  spirit  is  visible  at  the  same  time, 
while  there  may  be  a  score  or  more  engaged  in  materializ- 
ing that  one. 

The  permanent  materialization  of  spiritual  objects,  such 
as  hair,  garments,  flowers,  etc.,  my  spirit  instructors  unani- 
mously declare  to  be  impossible,  and  in  my  own  experience 
neither  the  most  reliable  mediums,  nor  their  guides,  have 
pretended  to  be  able  to  materialize  any  s}Diritual  substance 
so  that  it  shall  retain  its  materiality  when  removed  from 
the  seance  room. 

All  spiiits  when  visiting  the  earth,  of  necessity,  become 
in  a  certain  degree  materialized,  as  also  do  the  spiritual 
objects  they  may  bring  with  them.  At  a  certain  seance 
with  our  medium  one  of  my  instmctors,  Mr.  Bernard,  in- 


184  PHANTOM    SHIPS    AIsD    KAJLWAY    TKAINS. 

formed  me  that  a  spirit  fiiend  of  his  with  a  genius  for  inven- 
tion was  engaged  in  perfecting  a  machine,  the  knowledge 
of  which,  should  it  prove  successful,  he  intended  to  com- 
municate to  me.  When  conversing  on  this  subject  I  sug- 
gested that  a  diagram  of  it  might  be  made  by  my  placing 
a  sheet  of  drawing  paper  on  a  table,  and  their  placing  a 
s]3iritual  diagram  of  the  machinery  upon  the  sheet  I  had 
provided,  and  then  for  them  to  control  the  medium's  hand 
and  with  a  pencil  trace  the  lines  through  their  spiritual 
diagram  upon  the  drawing  paper.  The  reply  was,  that  it 
would  be  impossible  to  procure  a  drawing  by  this  method, 
for  the  reason  that  their  diagram,  when  brought  to  earth, 
would  become  in  degree  materialized,  and  the  j)encil-j)oint 
in  tracing  tlu'ough  it  would  meet  with  resistance,  and  it 
would  be  simply  mutilated  and  destroyed. 

The  knowledge,  thus  obtained,  enabled  me  to  realize 
what  my  instructors  had  often  before  said,  that  they,  and 
consequently  their  brains,  in  degree,  are  invariably  mate- 
rialized when  present  with  us,  and  from  this  fact  another 
is  to  be  inferred,  which  is,  as  before  remarked,  that  upon 
this  partial  materialization  of  their  brains,  wholly  or  par- 
tially depends  their  defective  memory  when  here.  The 
knowledge  of  this  fact  also  enables  us  to  satisfactorily  ac- 
count for  the  greater  power  which  many  low  sj^irits  possess 
to  cause  physical  manifestations.  From  their  hving  mostly 
or  wholly  on  earth,  and  from  their  grossness,  they  are  al- 
ways materiahzed  in  degree,  and  hence,  with  a  slight  addi- 
tion of  material  elements  they  are  able  to  act  directly  on 
matter  with  greater  force  than  spirits  on  higher  planes. 

PHANTOM    SHIPS    AND    RAILWAY    TRAINS. 

The  legendary  phantom  ship  is  not  a  myth.     Spectral, 
or  spiiitual  ships,  are  sometimes  constructed  on  earth  by 


now  riioDut'Ki).  185 

spirits  of  inariners  from  tlie  second  sphere,  wlio  launch 
them,  and  sail  them  on  our  oceans,  and  sometimes  make 
voyages  in  them  between  different  ports.  Notwithstand- 
ing the  appearance  to  the  contrary,  these  ships  simply 
ghde  over  the  waves  mthout  sinking  into  them,  and  earthly 
TN^inds  propel  them  at  rates  of  speed  which  our  ships  can- 
not attain.  The  spiritual  substances,  or  as  we  naturally 
would  term  them,  materials,  of  w4iich  these  spiritual  ships 
are  built,  are  brought  from  the  second  sphere  by  these 
spirits,  having  previously  been  brought  there  from  the 
thii'd  and  fourth  heavens  by  -spirits  of  those  heavens,  who 
are  charged  with  this  duty,  as  these  sailor  spirits  are  not 
permitted  to  go  higher  than  their  own  sphere.  They  are 
thus  fui'nished  with  the  necessary  "materials"  and  per- 
mitted to  use  them  in  building  ships,  as  an  indulgence,  or 
favor,  but  it  is  only  to  such  spirits  as  have  reformed,  or 
have  not  led  abandoned  hves  that  these  favors  are  granted. 
Those  who  enjoy  them,  in  fact,  are  qualified  to  enter  the 
third  heaven,  but  they  still  are  possessed  of  a  lingering  love 
for  their  eartlily  occupations,  and  when  this  becomes  satis- 
fied, as  after  a  while  it  does,  they  pass  to  the  third  heaven. 
Spectral  railway  trains  are  equally  matters  of  fact,  the 
"materials"  of  which  they  are  constructed  being  supplied 
in  the  same  manner  to  the  spirits  of  engineers,  firemen, 
brakemen,  conductors,  etc.,  existing  on  the  same  planes  as 
the  mariners,  above  mentioned.  As  the  spectral  ships  are 
never  visible  in  clear  sunlight,  but  are  only  seen  in  the 
night,  or  twilight,  or  during  storms,  when  the  light  is  par- 
tially obscured,  so  the  spectral  trains  are  never  seen  ex- 
cepting at  night,  or  in  a  tunnel,  where  there  is  little  light. 
Sometimes  these  spectral  ships  and  trains  are  seen  clair- 
voyantly,  and  at  other  times  with  the  natural  eye,  as  these 
spuits,  at  least  in  some  cases,  under  favorable  circum- 
stances appear  to  possess  the  power,  by  their  combined 


ISG  SrKCTIiAL    MEN    IN    ARMOR. 

efforts,  to  temporarily  materialize  them,  together  with 
themselves,  so  that  they  become  apjDarent  to  the  vision  of 
ordinary  observers.  My  instructors  assure  me  that  there 
are  more,  both  of  spectral  ships  and  trains,  in  existence 
than  has  been  suspected  by  the  few  who  have  believed  in 
them. 

The  spectral  men  in  armor  who  have  been  observed  at 
different  times,  especially  in  the  highlands  of  Scotland,  are 
generally  perceived  clairvoyantly.  Large  numbers  of  them 
have  been  seen  at  the  same  time  by  many  persons.  The 
pageant  is  gotten  up  by  spirits  from  the  second  sphere, 
assisted  by  those  from  the  third,  and  while  certain  of  them 
are  marching,  others,  unseen,  direct  their  combined  efforts 
to  0]3en  the  sj)iritual  eyes  of  the  observers,  and  they  some- 
times succeed  in  enabhng  scores,  and  even  hundreds  to 
perceive  them  with  their  spiritual  vision.  Possibly,  also, 
in  some  instances,  the  spirit  troops  have  been  sufficiently 
materiahzed  for  them  to  be  perceived  more  or  less  dis- 
tinctly by  ordinary  vision. 

EAPPINGS     AND     MOVING     OF     MATEKIAL    OBJECTS.       SPIRIT    LIGHTS. 

LEVITATION. 

In  order  to  produce  the  raps  spirits  present  unite  in 
materializing  the  hand,  or  knuckles  simply,  of  one  of  their 
number,  and  he  then  makes  the  raps  with  these.  Some- 
times a  small  spiritual  object  as  a  pencil  or  ring  is  mate- 
rialized and  the  raps  are  made  with  this.  When  a  table  is 
used  the  raps  are  generally  made  on  its  lower  surface,  and 
it  is  not  necessar}^,  in  order  to  effect  the  purpose,  that 
either  the  hand  or  other  object  shall  be  materialized  to  the 
extent  that  it  shall  be  visible  to  those  present. 

Tables  and  other  objects  are  moved  by  the  materialized, 
or  partially  materialized  hands  of  spirits.    When  the  article 


Sl'IIilT    LIGHTS.  187 

is  very  licaAT,  as  a  piano,  then  the  materiaHzed  hands  of  a 
number  of  spirits,  perhaps  a  dozen,  are  required  to  lift  it. 
Neither  electricity  nor  magnetism  is  employed,  nor  can 
either  be  made  available  for  such  purj)oses. 

The  luminous  points,  frequently  extending'  into  lines  of 
light,  so  cominonl}'  observed  in  dark  seances,  and  known 
as  sj^irit  lights,  are  produced  by  spirits  forcibly  striking 
together  two  hard  substances,  spiritual  of  course,  in  the 
same  manner  that  we  do  flint  and  steel  to  elicit  sparks.  In 
giving  me  this  explanation  Mr.  Owen  said  he  had  noticed 
that  on  each  occasion  the  operator,  jorevious  to  striking 
these  substances  together,  dipped  the  ends  of  them  in  a 
hquid.  The  aid  of  spiritual  chemicals  is  here  probably 
called  into  requisition.  Levitation,  or  elevation  and  sus- 
l^ension  of  a  mortal  in  the  air,  is  accomplished  by  the 
united  efforts  of  a  number  of  spirits  who  have  been  suffi- 
ciently materiaHzed  by  other  spirits  for  this  purpose. 
These  semi-materialized  spirits  raise  the  person  exactly  as 
we  would,  with  theii-  hands.  None  but  mediums  of  ex- 
traordinary power  can  be  thus  elevated. 

TRANCE   AND   VISIONS. 

Trance,  with  jDossibly  some  exceptions,  is  induced  by 
disembodied  spirits,  sometimes  for  purposes  of  medium- 
istic  development,  sometimes  so  that  the  peculiar  condition 
of  mind  and  body  that  obtains  in  this  state,  may  be  made 
available  in  arresting  the  course  of  disease,  and  at  other 
times  it  is  induced  so  that  the  mind  may  be  brought  under 
conditions  in  which  it  can  be  powerfully  imj)ressed  with 
spu'itual  truths.  Ordmarily  the  state  of  trance  is  not  at- 
tended vrith  danger,  but  occasionally  it  happens  that  unin- 
formed and  too  confident  spirits  find  themselves  able  to 
induce  the  state  and  then,  to  their  consternation,  discover 


188  HOW   TRANCE    IS    INDUCED. 

that  tliey  cannot  restore  tlie'  subject  to  his  normal  condi- 
tion, and  instances  have  occurred  where  the  person  has 
been  buried  under  the  fatal  niisaj)prehension  that  death 
has  ensued. 

Trance  is  induced  by  S23irits  by  precisely  the  same 
means  that  mesmerizers  employ  to  mesmerize  their  sub- 
jects. All  trance  subjects  are  mediums.  In  the  trance 
state  the  spirit  is  not  usually  absent  from  the  body,  but  is 
generally,  either  semi-conscious,  or  entirely  unconscious  of 
external  things.  In  some  cases  however  the  person  is 
fully  alive  to  everything  around  him.  It  sometimes, 
though  rarely  happens,  that  spirits  under  exce|)tionally 
favorable  conditions  are  able  to  and  do  maintain  absolute 
control  of  a  medium  for  days,  weeks,  and  even  months,  re- 
leasing their  hold  for  brief  periods  of  time,  during  which 
the  medium  is  generally  in  the  trance  state,  or  asleep.  In 
the  majority  of  these  rare  instances  intelligent  spirits, 
with  good  motives,  and  for  important  purposes,  thus  main- 
tain possession.  It  must  not  be  supposed  that  in  such 
cases  the  spirit  natural  to  the  body  is  banished  from  it ;  it 
is  only  overpowered,  its  faculties  obscured,  and  functions 
temporarily  suspended.  The  controlling  spirit  is  always 
external  to  the  body  of  the  medium.  It  is  not  possible  for 
any  disembodied  spirit  to  personally  enter  the  body  of  a 
mortal. 

Visions  of,  apparently,  heavenly  scenes  are  but  impres- 
sions made  upon  the  minds  of  susceptible  persons  by  dis- 
embodied spirits  during  partial  sleep,  or  if  the  subject  be 
possessed  of  medial  power,  when  he  is  wholly  or  partially 
entranced.  The  psychologizing  spirit  by  thinking  intently 
of  any  subject,  or  scene,  and  at  the  same  time  intently  de- 
siring the  person  to  think  of  or  perceive  the  same,  is  able 
to  impress  his  ideas  upon  the  person's  mind,  and  the  latter, 
if  the  attempt  be   successful,  perceives  whatever  is  in  the 


YISIO:f^S    OR    MENTAL    PICTURES.  189 

mind  of  the  operating  spirit,  and  perliaps  realizes  it  more 
yividly  tlian  it  is  realized  by  liim.  Will-power  is  the  force 
employed,  and  the  process  is  here  again  precise^  similar 
to  that  employed  b}"  mesmerizers.  Mental  pictures  of  ob- 
jects and  scenes  are  thus  produced,  and  frequently  they  are 
so  apparently  real  that  the  subject  ever  after  believes  he 
has  actually,  in  spiritual  person,  visited  the  scenes  depicted, 
and  there  seen  what  in  reaUty  were  only  psychological  pic- 
tures impressed  upon  his  mind  by  spirit  agency.  The 
language,  when  heard,  is  also  that  of  the  psychologizing 
spirit. 

But  the  spu'its  of  certain  persons,  under  certain  circum- 
stances, are  able,  as  elsewhere  stated,  to  leave  the  body 
when  asleep,  for  a  bri3f  time,  and  to  visit  earthly  localities, 
and  absent  friends,  and  return  and  re-enter  the  body,  and 
when  the  latter  awakes  the  remembrance  of  what  the  spirit 
has  seen  is  generally  more  or  less  distinct.  Sometimes, 
also,  distant  earthly  objects  and  scenes  are  discerned, 
apjDarently  through  spontaneous  or  independent  clairvoy- 
ance, and  by  lucid  mesmeric  subjects,  but  it  is  very  doubt- 
ful whether  the  vision  of  an  embodied  spirit  has  ever  pene- 
trated even  the  lowest  of  the  heavens.  As  to  spirits,  while 
yet  associated  with  the  body,  visiting,  even  the  lowest  of 
the  heavens,  my  instructors  believe  to  be  impossible. 


CHAPTEK  Xm. 

Spirits  in  Relation  to  Animals.     Do  they  Interest  Themselves  in 
our  Business  AfiEairs  ?    There  is  Room  in  God's  Universe  for  All. 

SPIRITS    IN   RELATION    TO    ANIMALS. 

Spirits  are  capable  of  influencing  certain  animals  in  tlieir 
feelings  and  movements.  We  knov?-  that  with  us  animals 
are  sometimes  psychologized,  or  mesmerized  by  persons 
highly  endov^ed  with  mesmeric  power,  and  to  one  who  be- 
lieves in  the  power  of  spirits  to  influence  mortals  there 
should  be  no  difficulty  in  believing  that  they  are,  at  least 
sometimes,  capable  of  influencing  animals.  Li  the  Bible 
instances  are  recorded  of  the  exercise  of  this  power  by 
spirits,  as  in  1  Kings  xvii.  6,  where  the  ravens  brought 
Elijah  bread  and  flesh  ;  in  Dan.  vii.  22,  where  the  angel, 
or  spirit,  shut  the  lion's  mouth,  and  in  Mark  v.  13,  where 
the  unclean,  or  low  spirits,  influenced  the  swine  to  rush 
into  the  sea. 

Also  certain  domestic  animals  are  capable,  at  least  at 
times,  of  perceiving  spirits,  and  as  spirits  in  their  natural 
state  can  only  be  perceived  by  spiritual  vision  these  ani- 
mals must  be  endowed  with  spiritual  organs  of  vision,  and 
if  with  these,  doubtless  with  other  spiritual  senses,  and 
consequently  with  spiritual  organisms.  Thus,  animals 
should  possess  S23iritual  bodies,  and  my  instructors  have 
no  doubt  of  the  fact,  but  as  stated  in  another  part  of  this 
work,  they  deny  to  the  spirits  of  animals  continued  exist- 


ANIMALS    SOMETIMES    SEE    SriRITS.  191 

ence,  these  perisliing  with  then*  material  bodies.  Horses, 
dogs,  and  cats,  possess  the  facult}'  of  discerning  sj)irits, 
under  certain  circumstances,  and  sometimes  Indian  spirits, 
and  others,  amuse  themselves  by  mountinfj;'  horses  when 
grazing  in  the  open  held,  and  by  violent  gestvires  impelling 
them  to  tlieir  utmost  speed,  and  to  strange,  and  sometimes 
frantic  movements  and  efforts  to  dismount  their  ghostly 
riders,  who  are  visible  to  them  alone.  I  am  also  informed 
that  sometimes,  when  vicious  and  revengeful  spirits  enter- 
tain gTudges  against  certain  persons,  they  will  seize  oppor- 
tunities when  the  latter  are  riding,  or  driving,  to  suddenly 
appear  before  tlieir  animals,  perhaps  at  dangerous  points 
on  the  roads,  and  by  violent  gestures  frighten  them  so  that 
mischief  may  ensue.  Idle  and  fi'olicsome  spirits-  frequently 
amuse  themselves  with  dogs  and  cats,  availing  themselves 
of  the  animals'  inability  to  distinguish  between  them  and 
mortals  to  bewilder  and  deceive  them,  and  ill-disposed 
spirits  sometimes  succeed  in  inciting  dogs  to  attack  certain 
persons  whom  they  dislike.  A  notable  instance  of  clair- 
voyant vision  in  an  animal  is  recorded  in  Numb.  xxii.  23 
to  27. 

DO    SPIRITS    INTEREST    THEMSELVES    IN    OUR   BUSINESS    AFFAIRS? 

The  question  is  sometimes  asked  ;  Do  spirits  interest 
themselves  in  the  business  affairs  of  this  hfe  ?  Some  of 
them  do,  but  a  person  who  receives  advice  or  information 
in  respect  to  business  matters  from  them  should  be  guided 
by  it  only  when  his  osvn  judgment,  or  knowledge  confirms 
it.  There  have  been  instances,  w^ell  attested,  certain  of 
them  within  my  own  experience,  in  w^hich  worldly  advan- 
tage has  accrued  from  information  and  advice  given  by 
spmts,  but,  as  a  rule,  it  is  much  safer  to  rely  alone  upon 
one's  otm  judgment  and  exertions.     If  we  have  a  relative, 


192  SPIRITS    AND    BUSINESS    AFFAIRS. 

or  dear  friend  in  spirit-life,  who,  wlien  here  was  actively 
engaged  in  business  pursuits,  and  who  possessed  an  in- 
disputable capacity  for  them,  and  if  through  a  reliable  me- 
dium we  can  readily  enter  into  communication  with  him, 
and  should  find  him  still  interested  in  worldly  affairs,  and 
especially  in  our  own,  it  may  be  well  if  counsel  is  needed 
to  consult  him,  always  subjecting  his  information  or  advice 
to  the  crucible  of  our  reason,  and  adopting  or  rejecting  it 
accordingly,  precisely  as  we  would  if  it  were  received  from 
an  earthly  friend.  Persons  who  are  so  credulous  as  to  rely 
solely  upon  spirit  direction  in  their  earthly  affairs,  almost 
invariably  suffer  for  their  folly  in  failing  to  exercise  and  be 
guided  by  their  own  reason,  and  for  attempting  to  evade 
their  own  responsibility  by  transferring  it  to  invisible,  and 
most  frequently,  irresponsible  shoulders.  It  is  the  mission 
of  our  unseen  friends,  as  far  as  the}^  are  able,  to  assist, 
protect,  and  guide  us  in  the  right,  not  to  assume  and  per- 
form our  duties  for  us  ;  these  we  alone  must  discharge,  or 
suffer  the  consequences. 

Spirits  who  have  left  property  to  their  heirs  are  often 
present  at  its  distribution,  and  many  times,  when  it  carries 
no  blessing  with  it,  they  are  gratified  to  see  it  wasted,  and 
sometimes  are  successful  in  their  efforts  to  scatter  the 
w^ealth  in  the  pursuit  of  which  they  had  sacrificed  their 
earthly  health,  comfort,  time,  and  possibly  honor. 

THERE   IS    ROOM    IN    GOd's   imr^ERSE   FOR   ALL. 

Where  can  the  departed  spirits  of  the  countless  ages  of 
the  past,  together  with  the  myriads  of  yet  uncreated  spirits, 
find  space  in  which  to  exist  ? 

This  is  a  problem  which  presents  itself  to  the  minds  of 
many  thoughtful  persons  who  believe  in  the  eternal  ex- 
istence of  the  soul,  and  at  the  first  view  it  seems  difiicult 


THERE    IS    liOOM    FOR    ALL.  193 

to  satisfactorily  solve  it,  but  when  we  call  figures  to  our 
assistance  it  will  be  found  that  much  of  if  not  all  the 
difficulty  disappears. 

Thus,  a  square  of  fifteen  miles  contains  225  square  miles. 
Multiply  5,280,  the  number  of  feet  in  a  lineal  mile,  by 
itself,  and  the  product  is  27,878,400,  being  the  number  of 
square  feet  in  a  square  mile.  Multiply  this  number  by 
225  and  we  have  6,272,04:0,000,  being  the  number  of  square 
feet  in  the  square  of  fifteen  miles,  and  dividing  this  sum 
by  1,400,000,000,  the  present  estimated  poj)ulation  of  our 
globe,  and  we  have,  (within  a  fraction,)  4^  square  feet  for 
each  person.  If  the  present  site  of  London,  with  its  700 
square  miles,  were  an  open  plane  it  would  suffice  to  fur- 
nish comfortable  standing  room  for  three  times  the  present 
population  of  the  earth. 

The  entire  surface  of  our  globe  comprises  about  197,- 
000,000,  square  miles.  Of  these,  about  54,000,000,  are  land, 
and  allowing  4|-  square  feet  for  each  person  334,540,800,- 
000,000,  individuals  could  find  standing  room  upon  its 
surface,  this  being  238,957  times  the  present  population 
of  the  earth.  Assuming  thirty-three  years  .as  the  term  of 
life  of  a  generation,  and  that  the  population  of  the  earth 
has  always  been  the  same  as  now,  all  the  people  who  have 
existed  upon  it  for  7,885,581  years  could,  if  now  living, 
find  standing  room  on  the  dry  land  of  our  globe,  but  as 
the  population  anterior  to  one  thousand  years  ago,  j)rob- 
^  ably,  was  not  one-half  its  present  number  we  may  proj)erly 
double  the  above  number  of  years,  making  it  15,771,102. 

If  the  entire  surface  of  our  globe  were  dry  land  it  would 
furnish  871,753,  times  the  present  population  with  stand- 
ing room,  or  all  the  human  beings  that  have  existed  upon 
it  for  28,767,849  years.  This  presumes  that  at  no  time 
were  there  a  less  number  of  people  existing  on  the  earth 
than  at  present. 
9 


194  THE    VASTNESS    OF    SPACE. 

The  foregoing  calculations  wiU  serve  tlie  purpose  of 
showing  the  vast  numbers  of  persons  who  can  find  stand- 
ing room  on  a  comparatively  limited  surface,  and  a  calcu- 
lation of  the  number  of  cubic  miles  contained  in  a  sphere 
equal  in  diameter  to  that  of  the  orbit  of  the  moon,  or  space 
included  in  a  radius  of  240,000  miles  from  the  earth  in 
every  direction,  will  show  what  myriads  of  souls  could  find 
ample  room  therein  to  exist. 

In  this  space  there  are  57,905,971,200,000,000  cubic 
miles.  This  number  divided  by  1,400,000,000,  the  present 
population  of  the  earth,  gives  41,361,408  cubic  miles  to 
each  person,  and  is  equal  to  one  cubic  mile  for  every  hu- 
man being  who  has  existed  on  our  globe  for  1,364,926,464 
years,  estimating  the  average  number  of  its  inhabitants  the 
same  as  at  present. 

This  estimate,  as  just  said,  is  only  of  the  space  included 
in  a  radius  of  240,000  miles  from  the  earth  in  every  direc- 
tion. A  railway  train  starting  from  our  earth  and  travelhng 
in  a  direct  line,  night  and  day,  at  the  rate  of  fifty  miles  an 
hour,  would  traverse  the  radius  of  this  space  and  reach  the 
moon  in  less  than  seven  months,  while  travelling  at  the 
same  rate  of  speed  it  would  require  more  than  two  hundred 
years  to  reach  the  sun. 

To  fully  realize  the  vastness  of  the  space  described  by 
the  orbit  of  the  moon,  and  the  myriads  of  human  souls  it 
is  capable  of  containing,  with  ample  room  for  all,  is  beyond 
the  capacity  of  most  minds,  and  to  even  approximately  re- 
alize the  immensity  of  the  space  of  which  the  sun  is  the 
centre,  and  the  earth  a  point  in  the  circumference,  not  to 
mention  the  entire  space  of  the  solar  system,  is  an  impos- 
sibility to  any  finite  mind.  Yet,  inconceivable  as  the  di- 
mensions of  this  space  are  they  dwindle  into  insignificance 
when  compared  with  the  immensity,  to  us  infinity,  of  space 
represented  by  the  distance  from  our  speck  of  earth  of  the 


THIS,    THE    CHILD-LIFE    OF   THE    SPIRIT.  195 

neai'est  fixed  star,  Alpha  Centauri,  which  the  supposititious 
railway  train  running  at  its  speed  of  fifty  miles  an  hour 
would  not  reach  in  less  than  42,000,000  years.  And  yet 
this  star,  as  just  said,  is  the  nearest  to  our  earth  of  the 
fixed  stai'S. 

It  is  thus  seen  that  while  vast  multitudes  of  human 
beings  may  be  represented  by  figures  in  a  gTeater  or  less 
degree  apprehensible  by  our  understanding,  the  immensity 
of  even  a  comparatively  hmited  space,  like  that  of  the  orbit 
of  the  moon,  is  inconceivable,  the  figures  representing  it 
beai-ing  to  oui'  minds  comparatively  httle  relation  to  its  vast 
dimensions. 


CONCLUSION. 

The  description  of  the  heavens,  and  their  inhabitants, 
contained  in  this  work,  is  but  partial  and  fi-agm^ntary,  for 
while  a  comparatively  few  things  are  described  the  far 
greater  number  remain  unnoticed.  The  things  described 
compare  with  those  unnoticed,  and  yet  unknown,  as  the 
recorded  observations  of  a  traveller  on  a  railway  compare 
with  a  comprehensive  history  of  the  country,  in  which  its 
varied  features  and  the  characteristics  of  its  inhabitants  are 
accurately  noted.  It  remains  for  other  explorers  of  this 
partially  comprehended,  and  invisible  realm,  to  add  to  this 
description,  and  each  successive  future  generation  will 
learn  new  and  important  truths,  and  better  comprehend 
their  philosophy. 

This  is  the  child-life  of  the  spirit,  and  this  world  the 
primary  school  of  the  race,  in  which  we  are  taught,  princi- 
j^ally,  by  observation  and  experience.  None  truly  become 
men  and  women  until  they  are  developed  in  spirit-life. 
The  oldest  and  wisest  of  us  are  only  approacliing  real  man 
and  womanhood.     ^Tio,  among  us,  can  truly  say  he  has 


190  OUR    GLORIOUS    DESTINY. 

passed  the  period  when  lie  can  be  "pleased  with  a  rattle, 
and  tickled  with  a  straw." 

Man,  while  in  the  flesh  is  bound  to  the  earth,  and  the 
creeping  thing  may  call  him  brother,  but  when  his  immor- 
tal spirit  becomes  liberated  from  the  tenement  of  clay  he 
enters  on  a  new  and  glorious  existence,  soars  in  boundless 
freedom  through  realms  of  celestial  beauty  and  brigh!- 
ness,  drinks  in  wisdom  and  knowledge  with  every  breath, 
while  every^  movement,  every  thought,  every  aspiration,  is 
tributary  to  his  happiness,  and  he  is  amazed  that  he  ever 
could  have  been  so  blind,  so  groveling,  as  to  seek  his  highest 
gratification  in  things  of  sense.  The  spirit-world  is  peopled 
by  men  and  women  who  here  lived,  enjoyed,  suffered,  and 
died  as  we  are  now  doing,  or  destined  to  do,  who  resembled 
us  in  all  respects,  and  whatever  possibihties  have  been  or 
are  yet  to  be  realized  by  them  in  their  present  existence, 
will  be  realized  by  us  when  we  have  followed  them  to  that 
world.  Every  lofty  aspiration,  every  noble  thought,  every 
rational  hope  will  there  be  realized,  and  every  prophecy  of 
the  soul  will  there  find  its  fulfillment.  No  conception  of 
the  poet's  mind  ever  equalled  in  subhmity  and  grandeur 
the  reahty  of  that  hfe,  in  its  highest  estate,  and  no  orien- 
tal ecstatic  in  his  wildest  flights  of  fancy  ever  dreamed 
of  such  beauty  and  perfection  as  characterize  the  higher 
heavens. 


"  Hope  on,  0  weary  heart,  heaven's  glory  shines, 
Earth  fades,  and  soon  we  shall  rejoice  tog-ether  ; 

Night  hastes,  and  death  its  drowsy  wreath  entwines ; 
Into  our  realm  from  earth's  Decembral  weather 
We  bid  yon  welcome.     Gently  as  drops  the  feather 

From  the  swan's  breast,  your  dust,  ye  weary  hearted, 
Shall  from  you  fall,  and  none  shall  ask  you  whether 

Ye  feared  or  hoped  ;  each  rankling  wound  that  smarted 

Shall  pain  no  more,  for  peace  dwells  with  the  world's  departed. 


IlOPt:    ON,    O    WEARY    HEART.  197 


'^  Crowned  with  rose-blooms,  on  thy  my  banks  reposing, 

Sweet  lovers  wait  you ;   O  one  fond  embrace, 
One  loving  smile,  from  eyes  their  love  disclosing, 

Shall  compensate  you  for  this  mortal  race, 

And  every  sorrow  from  the  heart  erase. 
Love  God  in  man,  and  thus  on  earth  obtain 

The  victor's  wreath  ;  So,  death  shall  not  efface 
Aught  from  the  soul  save  disappointment's  pain ; 
All  shall  be  yours  in  heaven  the  young  heart  hoped  to  gain." 

—Harris, 


THE   END. 


THE   IDENTITY 

OF 

PRIMITIVE    CHRISTIANITY 

AND 

MODERN   SPIRITUALISM, 

BY 

EUGENE  CKOWELL,  M.D., 

AUTHOB   OF 

"the  spikit  world,  its  inhabitants,  nature,  and  philos- 
ophy," 

7iV  TWO  VOLUMES,  OCTAVO. 

Price,  ^2.50  Per  Voliirae. 

for  sale  by  .  ' 

COLBY     &    RICH, 

9  Montgomery  Place,  Boston. 


opinions    OF    THE  PRESS. 

"  Dr.  Eugene  Crowell  has  made  an  important  contribution  to  the  litera- 
ture of  Spiritualism  in  '  The  Identity  of  Primitive  Christianity  and 
Modern  Spiritualism.'  .  .  .  It  is  written  in  a  temperate  style,  and 
with  evident  fairness,  and  is  especially  remarkable  for  the  amount  and 
aptness  of  the  evidence  adduced.  Readers  who  desire  to  know  just  what 
intelligent  Spiritualists  believe,  will  find  this  book  well  worth  their  atten- 
tion."— Literary  World,  Boaton. 

"  This,  one  of  the  most  important  books  on  Spiritualism  ever  published, 
is  receiving,  as  it  fitly  deserves,  the  encomiums  of  the  secular  and  religious 
press,  everywhere.  Columns  of  extracts  from  it  may  be  found  in  the  Npv) 
York  TForZfZ,  and  other  dailies.  It  is  very  obvious  that  this  is  one  of  the 
few  books  that  are  of  positive  value  for  the  times." — Banner  of  Light, 
Bostoji. 

"  Dr.  Crowell  has  been  enabled  to  present  a  volume  which  is  a  complete 
compendium  of  alleged  facts  in  Spiritualism,  and  an  ingenious  defence  of 


OPINIONS    OF   THE    PRESS. 

it,  as  well.  .  .  .  We  know  of  no  work  on  the  subject,  yet  published, 
which  we  would  more  readily  recommend  to  readers  who  care  to  study  the 
phases  of  the  new  faith."— iV.  Y.  World. 

"  We  regard  the  work  as  most  admirably  adapted  to  aid  in  spreading 
broadcast  the  truths  of  the  harmonial  philosophy."— ^e%^o-JPA^Zo6•op7i^m^ 
Joitrnal.^  Chicago. 

"Many  of  the  narratives  in  Dr.  Crowell's  book  are  of  thrilling  interest. 
.  .  .  The  work  is  intensely  interesting,  and  read  by  persons  of  what- 
ever faith,  or  opinion,  it  will  prove  a  volume  of  more  than  considerable 
interest.  .  .  .  For  those  who  will  see  all  things,  prove  all  things,  this, 
the  latest  addition  to  our  Spiritualistic  lore,  will  be  welcomed  with  glad- 
ness."— Brooklyn  Eagle. 

"The  author  has  written  carefully  on  every  phase  of  spiritual  phe- 
nomena. He  writes  from  conviction,  after  a  long  and  impartial  investiga- 
tion. .  .  .  Any  spiritualist  who  desires  to  be  stored  with  historical, 
scientific,  or  theological  arguments  relating  to  the  spiritual  philosophy, 
will  not  only  read,  but  study  this  volume."— A^irifwaZ  Scientist^  Boston. 

"The  object  is  attained  by  the  author  in  a  degree  which  cannot  fail  to 
surprise  and  interest  all  who  have  heretofore  regarded  Spiritualism  as  a 
modern  discovery,  or  invention,  or  a  gross  delusion." — Detroit  Commer- 
cial Advertiser. 

"This  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  books  we  have  ever  read  on  the 
subject.  We  can  come  nearer  endorsing  all  the  author  says  than  anyone 
we  have  ever  read.  Dr.  Crowell  has  been  most  of  his  life  a  materialist. 
His  investigation  of  Spiritualism  converted  him  from  his  belief  in  Material- 
ism, and  convinced  him  of  the  truth  of  the  Bible.  .  ^  .  We  predict 
that  his  work  will  do  much  toward  harmonizing  true  Christianity  and 
true  Spiritualism.  We  cordially  recommend  this  book  to  honest  inquirers 
after  truth." — Spiritual  Magazine. 

"  Those  who  want  the  literature  and  the  evidences  of  the  Spiritualists 
will  find  them  here,  set  out  at  length." — Albany  Evening  Journal. 

"  This  book  is  a  splendid  addition  to  the  literature  of  Spiritualism, 
equal  in  quality  to  Mr.  Dale  Owen's  Debatable  Land,  but  differing  in 
kind.  It  is  more  a  scientific  than  a  theological  work,  yet  in  every  chap- 
ter the  spiritual  manifestations  recorded  in  the  Bible  are  paralleled  by 
those  taking  place  now.  The  religious  standpoint  taken  by  the  author  is 
broad  and  liberal,  and  the  philosophical  portion  of  the  book  deals  ably 
with  questions  of  great  interest  to  Spiritualists.  There  is  a,  rich  and  well 
selected  store  of  records  of  spiritual  manifestations,  many  of  which 
occurred  beneath  his  own  observation," — London  Spiritualist, 


University  of 
Connecticut 

Libraries 


39153020578003